DIA6ED2061001EN US 438553 Catalog
2014-05-16
: Pdf 438553-Catalog 438553-Catalog 785901 Batch3 unilog
Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 218
Download | ![]() |
Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
Automation & Control Modicon® M340™ PLC Automation Platform Unity™ Software Catalog June 07 Flexibility ■ Interchangeable modular functions, to better meet the requirements for extensions ■ Software and accessories common to multiple product families This international site (www.us.telemecanique. com) allows you to access all the Telemecanique products in just 2 clicks via comprehensive range data-sheets, with direct links to: ■ Complete library: technical documents, catalogs, certificates, FAQs, brochures... ■ Selection guides from the e-catalog. ■ Product discovery sites and their Flash animations. You will also find illustrated overviews, news to which you can subscribe, a discussion forum, the list of country contacts... To live automation solutions every day! Ingenuity ■ Auto-adapts to its environment, “plug & play” ■ Application functions, control, communication and diagnostics embedded in the products ■ User-friendly operation either directly on the product or remotely Compactness ■ High functionality in a minimum of space ■ Freedom in implementation Openness ■ Compliance with field bus, connection, and software standards ■ Enabling decentralized or remote surveillance via the web with Transparent Ready ® products Simplicity ■ Cost effective “optimum” offers that make selection easy for most typical applications ■ Products that are easy to understand for users, electricians and automation specialists ■ User-friendly intuitive programming Contents Modicon® M340™ PLC Automation Platform 1 Modicon M340 hardware and Unity™ software, a naturally productive pair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Chapter 1 Modicon M340 processors, racks & power supplies b Processor modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/4 b Power supply modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/10 b Single rack configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/14 Chapter 2 Input/output modules b Discrete I/O modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2/6 b Analog I/O modules and programmable process control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2/24 b IP 67 and IP 20 distributed I/O modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2/34 b Counter modules and Motion Function Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2/36 Chapter 3 Communication b Ethernet TCP/IP network - Transparent Ready® Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3/4 b CANopen machine and installation bus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3/38 b Modbus® communication system and character mode serial link . . . . . . . . . . 3/42 Chapter 4 Unity™ software b Unity™ software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4/4 Chapter 5 Connection interfaces b Advantys™ Telefast® ABE7 pre-wired I/O system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5/8 b Phaseo Universal range of regulated switch mode power supplies . . . . . . . . 5/22 b HMI Operator dialog terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5/34 Chapter 6 Services b Technical information v Standards, certifications and environment conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6/2 v Automation product certifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6/6 v Power consumption table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6/8 b Index v Product reference index. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6/9 Advantys™, Altivar®, Atrium™, Concept™, ConneXium™, FactoryCast™, Fipio®, Fipway®, Lexium®, Magelis®, Modbus®, Modbus Plus™, Modicon®, M340™, Modsoft®, Momentum™, Monitor Pro™ OsiTrack™, Phaseo®, PL7™, PowerSuite™, Premium™, Preventa™, ProWORX™, Quantum™, Tego®, Telefast®, Telemecanique®, TeSys®, Transparent Ready®, Twido®, TwidoSuite™, Unity™, Unity Pro™, and Vijeo™, are trademarks or registered trademarks of Schneider Electric. Other trademarks used herein are the property of their respective owners. 1 Modicon® hardware platforms and Unity™ software Simply Smart! (*) A naturally productive pair The family of Modicon PLC platforms associated with Unity software offers you ingenuity, flexibility and openness to ever-increasing productivity. Modicon ® M340™ PLC concentrates power and innovation, offering the optimum response to the needs of machine manufacturers. It is also the ideal companion for Modicon ® Premium™ PLC and Modicon ® Quantum™ PLC to satisfy the need for automation of industrial processes and infrastructures. Programming software Automation platforms Modicon® automation platforms Modicon® M340™ PLC, the ideal solution for machine specialists Robust, powerful and compact, the new Modicon M340 PLC is the ideal solution for machine manufacturers in applications such as secondary packaging, materials handling, textiles, printing, food processing, woodworking machines, ceramics, etc. The integration of Altivar® and Lexium® adjustable speed drives, Magelis® display units and Preventa™ safety modules has been enhanced to simplify the setup and use of Telemecanique® solutions. Modicon M340 PLC is also the ideal companion for Modicon Premium PLC and Modicon Quantum PLC to meet the demand for automation of industrial processes and infrastructures, at the heart of Transparent Ready® architectures. Modicon® Premium™ PLC, the optimum solution for the manufacturing industry and infrastructures Modicon Premium PLC stands out as the specialist in complex machines and manufacturing processes. Its level of performance when processing Boolean, numeric instructions and instructions on tables make it the market preference. Thanks to its ability to integrate distributed architectures, Modicon Premium PLC provides ideal solutions for infrastructure projects, particularly in the water and transport sectors. In addition, Modicon® Atrium™ PLC, the version of Modicon Premium PLC in PCI format, offers a “PC Based” alternative. Modicon® Quantum™ PLC, the specialist in critical systems in the process industries and infrastructures ( * ) Smarter and more intelligent, yet even easier to use. ♦ A globally run program, to develop and offer solutions to our customers 2 Capable of sophisticated distributed architectures, with an extensive catalog of modules complemented by several technological partnerships in the context of the Collaborative Automation program ♦, Modicon Quantum PLC offers a perfect response to the needs of continuous or semi-continuous industrial processes, and control of large infrastructure sites. Capitalizing on more than 25 years' experience in the field of redundancy, Modicon Quantum PLC is the ideal solution for applications requiring very high levels of availability. The offer is therefore suitable for critical applications such as petrochemicals, metallurgy, cement, energy, tunnels and airports. 0 Simply Smart! Modicon® hardware platforms and Unity™ software Unity™ software An organizer environment for Modicon® platforms Unity Pro™ software is the common programming, debugging and run-time software for Modicon M340, Premium and Quantum PLCs, and Atrium™ slot PLCs. Meeting the requirements of an IEC 61131-3 program, Unity Pro software is based on the acknowledged standards of PL7™ and Concept™ software. It opens the doors of a complete set of new functions for increased productivity: b State-of-the-art functionality b Optimum standardization enabling re-use of developments b Numerous tools for testing the program and improving system operation b New integrated diagnostic services Migration of existing applications is provided for. This maximizes your software investment, reduces training costs, and offers unrivaled potential for development and compatibility. The Unity software catalog includes specialist software for even better productivity: b Openness to developments in C language or in VBA (Visual Basic for Applications) b Design and generation of batch/process applications with PLC/HMI integration Transparent Ready® Services Naturally communicative Based on Ethernet TCP/IP and Web technologies, the Modicon Transparent Ready automation platforms offer solutions to optimizing performances in electrical distribution, automation and control. Modicon controllers offers you the best of Ethernet: Web servers, sending e-mail, direct database access, device synchronization, and I/O distribution. Collaborative Automation The new world of automation b Rather than opting for proprietary systems, Telemecanique has adopted market standards such as IEC languages, Ethernet TCP/IP, Modbus IDA, XML, OPC, and IT standards. b Partnerships with recognized leading hardware and software specialists have been developed within the scope of the Collaborative Automation Partner Program, in an effort to share technology more effectively. b Offers you the ability to design the best solution without compromising on ease of integration. 3 0 Introduction Modicon® M340™ Automation Platform 0 Hardware base New Modicon ® M340™ platform Equipped with enhanced memory and functionality, this midrange PLC will give your applications new capabilities. Designed to operate in total synergy with other Telemecanique® devices, the Modicon M340 PLC represents pure concentrated power. Performance Modicon M340 platform b 7 K instructions/ms b 4 Mb of program memory b 256 Kb of data Compact design b 3 communication ports integrated in the processor b H x W x D = 100 x 32 x 93 mm. b High-density discrete I/O modules with 64 channels in a 32 mm wide format. Communication ports are integrated b b b b CANopen machine and installation bus Ethernet TCP/IP network - Transparent Ready ® services Modbus® serial link or character mode Remote access via STN, GSM/GPRS, Radio or ADSL Expert b Counter modules with ready-to-use functions b Function block library dedicated to motion control. MFB (Motion Function Blocks) to the PLCopen standard b Advanced library of process control blocks oriented towards control of machinery Innovative b b b b b USB port as standard Embedded Web server Recipe file management via FTP protocol “Plug and Load” SD memory card No batteries Ruggedness b Rack architecture enabling hot swapping of modules during operation (Hot-Swap) b Exceeds the standards in terms of shock, vibration, temperature, altitude and withstand to electrical interference. As standard, Modicon® M340™ PLC has exclusive services normally reserved for PLCs in a higher category. 4 Introduction (continued) Modicon® M340™ Automation Platform 0 Unity Pro™ software Unity™ software productivity All-in-one, easy-to-use software Unity Pro software fully exploits the advantages of the graphic and contextual interfaces of Windows® XP and Windows® 2000 : b Direct access to tools and information b 100% graphics-based configuration b Customizable toolbar and icons b Advanced drag & drop and zoom functions b Integrated diagnostic window All the advantages of standardization Unity Pro software provides a complete set of functions and tools for applying the application structure to the structure of the process or machine. The program is divided into hierarchically-organized function modules containing: b Program sections b Animation tables b Operator screens b Hyperlinks Basic functions that are used repeatedly can be encapsulated in user function blocks (DFBs) in an IEC 61131-3 language. Time savings from re-use of modules Once they have been tested and qualified, your standardized application code reduce development and installation times on site, thereby optimizing quality and reducing lead times: b Function modules that can be reused in the application or between projects by XML import/export. b Function blocks instantiated by dragging and dropping them from the library. b Instances can be updated automatically to reflect modifications made in the library (if this option is selected by the user) Maximum quality assured The integrated PLC simulator faithfully reproduces the behavior of the target program on a PC. All the debugging tools can be used during simulation, to enhance quality before installation: b Step-by-step program execution b Breakpoint and watchpoint b Real-time animations for displaying the state of the variables and the logic during operation Reduced downtime Unity Pro software features a DFB library for application diagnostics. Integrated into the program, these DFBs can be used (depending on their function) to monitor permanent conditions relating to security and the development of a process over time. A display window provides a clear display of all system and application faults in chronological order (date-stamped at source). From this window, you can simply click to access the editor for the program in which the error occurred (search for missing conditions at source). Online modifications can be grouped consistently in local mode on a PC and transferred directly to the PLC in a single operation in order to take effect in the same scan cycle. A complete range of functions provide the basis for precision control of your operations, to minimize downtime: b Log of operator actions on Unity Pro software in a protected file b User profile and password protection b Integrated graphic runtime screens 5 1 1/0 0 Contents 1 - Processors, power supplies and racks 1 Modicon® M340™ processors b Processor modules v Presentation, description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/4 v Memory structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/6 v Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/8 v References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/9 b Power supply modules v Presentation, description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/10 v Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/11 v Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/12 v References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/13 b Single-rack configuration v Presentation, description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/14 v Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/14 v References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/15 v Dimensions, mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/15 1/1 1 Selection guide Modicon® M340™ Automation Platform Modicon® M340™ processors Modicon M340 platform for Unity Pro™ software offer BMX 34 10 Standard processor Racks Number of racks Max. number of slots (excluding power supply module) In-rack discrete I/O (1) In-rack analog I/O (1) Distributed I/O 1 (4, 6, 8 or 12 slots) 12 Max. number of channels (counter and serial link) Counter (1) Motion control 20 1 Inputs/Outputs In-rack application-specific channels Process control, programmable loops Integrated Ethernet TCP/IP network communication ports CANopen Master machine and installation bus Serial link Communication modules USB port Max. number of networks (1) Ethernet TCP/IP network Internal memory capacity Internal user RAM Program, constants and symbols Located/unlocated data Memory card capacity Backup of program, constants and (on processor) symbols Hosting and display of user web pages File storage Application structure Master task Fast task Event tasks No. of instructions 100% Boolean executed per ms 65% Boolean + 35% fixed arithmetic Rack power supply 512 channels (modules with 8, 16, 32 or 64 channels) 128/66 channels (2) (modules with 2, 4, 6 or 8 channels) Limited depending on the type of medium: Over Ethernet TCP/IP network via network module (63 devices with I/O Scanning function), over Modbus® serial link (32 devices) 2-channel (60 kHz) or 8-channel (10 kHz) modules – Process control EFB library – – 1 in RTU/ASCII Modbus® communication master/slave mode or in character mode (non-isolated RS232/RS485, 0.3...19.2 Kbps) 1 programming port (PC terminal) 1 (BMX NOE 0110/0110 network module) 1 x 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX (Modbus TCP/IP, BOOTP/DHCP, FDR, Global Data, I/O Scanning, web server (standard, class B30 or configurable, class C30) 2,048 Kb 1,792 Kb 128 Kb 8 Mb as standard – (3) – 1 1 32 5.4 K instructions/ms 4.2 K instructions/ms 24 V c isolated, 24…48 V c isolated or 100…240 V a depending on power supply module Modicon M340 processor BMX P34 1000 Page 1/9 (1) The maximum values for the number of discrete I/O, analog I/O and counter channels and the number of networks are not cumulative (they are limited by the number of slots in the single-rack configuration, i.e. 11 maximum). (2) The first value is applied to a multi-rack configuration (not available). The second value corresponds to the physical limit with a single-rack configuration. (3) User web pages with FactoryCast™ web server module BMX NOE 0110 (16 Mb available). 1/2 0 0 BMX 34 20 Performance processors 1 1 (4, 6, 8 or 12 slots) 12 1,024/704 channels (2) (modules with 8, 16, 32 or 64 channels) 256/66 channels (2) (modules with 2, 4, 6 or 8 channels) Limited depending on the type of medium: on CANopen bus (63 devices), on Ethernet TCP/IP network via network module (63 devices with I/O Scanning function), on a Modbus ® serial link (32 devices) 36 2-channel (60 kHz) or 8-channel (10 kHz) modules MFB (Motion Function Blocks) library (control of drives or servo drives on the CANopen bus) Process control EFB library – 1 (63 slaves, 50…1,000 Kbps, class M20) – MFB (Motion Function Blocks) library (control of drives or servo drives on the CANopen bus) 1 x 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX (Modbus TCP/IP, BOOTP/DHCP, FDR, class B10 standard web server) – 1 (63 slaves, 50…1,000 Kbps, class M20) 1 in RTU/ASCII Modbus master/slave mode or in character mode (non-isolated RS232/RS485, – 0.3...19.2 Kbps) 1 programming port (PC terminal) 1 (BMX NOE 0100/0110 network module) 1 x 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX [Modbus TCP/IP, BOOTP/DHCP, FDR, Global Data, I/O Scanning, web server (standard, class B30 or configurable, class C30)] 4,096 Kb 3,584 Kb 256 Kb 8 Mb as standard – (3) 16 Mb (with optional card BMX RMS 008MPF) 1 1 64 8.1 K instructions/ms 6.4 K instructions/ms 24 V c isolated, 24…48 V c isolated or 100…240 V a power supply module BMX P34 2010 BMX P34 2020 BMX P34 2030 1/9 1/3 Modicon® M340™ Automation Platform Presentation Processor modules Presentation Modicon M340 automation platform 1 Standard and Performance processors from the Modicon M340 automation platform manage an entire PLC single-rack station on which a maximum of 11 slots can be equipped with: v Discrete I/O modules v Analog I/O modules v Application-specific modules (counter, Ethernet TCP/IP communication) The four processors offered have different memory capacities, processing speeds, number of I/O and number and type of communication ports. I/O and application-specific modules BMX P34 processor c or a power supply In addition, depending on the model, they offer a maximum (non-cumulative) of: v 512 to 1024 discrete I/O v 128 to 256 analog I/O v 20 to 36 counter channels v 0 to 2 Ethernet TCP/IP networks (with or without integrated port and network module) Depending on the model, Modicon M340 processors include: v A 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX Ethernet TCP/IP port v A CANopen machine and installation bus v A Modbus® serial link v A USB type TER port (for a programming terminal) Each processor is supplied with a memory card used for: v Backing up the application (program, symbols and constants) v Activating a standard web server for Transparent Ready® service — B10 class integrated Ethernet port (depending on the model) This memory card can be replaced by another type of memory card, to be ordered separately, that supports: v Backing up the application and activating the standard web server (same as other card) v A 16 Mb storage area for additional data organized in a file system (directories and sub-directories) Programming Modicon® M340™ applications To set up processors from the Modicon M340 automation platform, you need either: b Unity Pro™ Small programming software b Unity Pro™ Medium, Large or Extra Large programming software identical to that used to set up Modicon® Premium™ and Modicon® Quantum™ automation platforms b With possibly, depending on requirements: v Unity™ EFB toolkit software for developing EF and EFB libraries in C language v Unity™ SFC View software for viewing and diagnostics of applications written in Sequential Function Chart language (SFC) or Grafcet The function block software libraries provide Modicon M340 processors with the processing capability required to meet the needs of specialist applications in the following areas: b Process control via programmable control loops (EF and EFB libraries) b Motion control with multiple independent axis functions (MFB Motion Function Blocks) library. The axes are controlled by Altivar® 31/71 adjustable speed drives or Lexium® 05/15 servo drives connected over the CANopen machine and installation bus. 1/4 0 Modicon® M340™ Automation Platform Description 0 Processor modules 1 2 3 4 5 BMX P34 1000 1 2 3 4 Description of BMX P34 1000/2010 processors BMX P34 1000/2010 Standard and Performance single-format processors have the following on the front panel: 1 Securing screw for locking the module in its slot (marked 0) in the rack 2 A display block comprising 5 or 7 LEDs, depending on the model: v RUN LED (green): Processor running (program executing) v ERR LED (red): Processor or system fault v I/O LED (red): I/O module fault v SER COM LED (yellow): Activity on the Modbus® serial link v CARD ERR LED (red): Memory card missing or faulty With, in addition, for model BMX P34 2010: v CAN RUN LED (green): Integrated machine/installation bus operational v CAN ERR LED (red): Integrated machine/installation bus fault 3 A mini B USB connector for a programming terminal (or Magelis® XBT GT operator interface) 4 A slot equipped with Flash memory card for backing up the application (an LED, located above this slot, indicates recognition of or access to the memory card) 5 An RJ45 connector for the Modbus® serial link or character mode link (RS 232C/RS-485, 2-wire, non-isolated) With, in addition, for model BMX P34 2010: 6 A 9-pin SUB-D connector for the CANopen master machine and installation bus 5 Description of BMX P34 2020/2030 processors with integrated Ethernet TCP/IP port 6 BMX P34 2010 1 2 3 4 5 6 BMX P34 2020 1 2 3 4 5 BMX P34 2020/2030 Performance single-format processors have the following on the front panel: 1 Securing screw for locking the module in its slot (marked 0) in the rack 2 A display block comprising 8 or 10 LEDs, depending on the model: v RUN LED (green): Processor running (program executing) v ERR LED (red): Processor or system fault v I/O LED (red): I/O module fault v SER COM LED (yellow): Activity on the Modbus® serial link v CARD ERR LED (red): Memory card missing or faulty v ETH ACT LED (green): Activity on the Ethernet TCP/IP network v ETH STS LED (green): Ethernet TCP/IP network status v ETH 100 LED (red): Data rate on the Ethernet TCP/IP network (10 or 100 Mbps) With, in addition, for model BMX P34 2030: v CAN RUN LED (green): Integrated machine/installation bus operational v CAN ERR LED (red): Integrated machine/installation bus fault 3 A mini B USB connector for a programming terminal (or Magelis® XBT GT operator interface) 4 A slot equipped with Flash memory card for backing up the application (an LED, located above this slot, indicates recognition of or access to the memory card) 5 An RJ45 connector for connection to the Ethernet TCP/IP 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX network Also included, depending on the model: 6 BMX P 34 2020 processor: An RJ45 connector for the Modbus® serial link or character mode link (RS 232C/RS 485, 2-wire, non-isolated) 7 BMX P 34 2030 processor: A 9-pin SUB-D connector for the CANopen master machine and installation bus On the back panel there are two rotary switches for assigning the IP address. There are three ways to define this assignment: v Address set by the position of the two rotary switches v Address set by the application parameters v Address set by the Ethernet TCP/IP BOOTP server 6 BMX P34 2030 1/5 1 Memory structure Modicon® M340™ Automation Platform 0 Processor modules Memory structure BMX P34 1000/20p0 processor with memory card supplied as standard Application internal RAM (1) 1 Application internal RAM User internal RAM Located data 1 Unlocated data 1 Program, symbols and comments 2 Program, symbols and comments 22 Constants 3 Constants 33 BMX RMS 008MP memory card (supplied as standard) System data Area for online program modification 4 Application internal RAM The application memory is divided into memory areas, physically distributed in the Modicon M340 PLCs internal RAM: 1 Application data area, which may be one of two possible types: v Located data, corresponding to the data defined by an address (for example% MW237) with which a symbol can be associated (for example, Counter_reject). v Unlocated data, corresponding to data defined only by a symbol. The use of unlocated data eliminates the restrictions of managing the memory location since the addresses are assigned automatically and also allows data to be structured and re-used. This data area is backed up automatically when the PLC is turned off by duplicating its contents in a 256 Kbyte non-volatile internal memory integrated in the processor. It is also possible to back up this memory at any time with a user program. 2 Program, symbols and comments area: At program level this area contains the executable binary code and IEC source code. 3 Constants area: This area supports the constant located data (%KWi). 4 Area for online program modification (see page 1/7) The user can choose to transfer the source data to the executable program in the PLC. The fact of having the program source in the PLC means that, when an empty programming terminal is connected to the PLC, all the elements needed to debug or upgrade this application can be restored to the terminal. Comments and animation tables can be excluded from the data embedded in the PLC. Memory card Modicon M340 processors are supplied with an SD (Secure Digital) type Flash memory card. This memory card is intended for backing up the program, symbols and comments area 2 and the constants area 3. Duplication (for areas 22 and 33) and retrieval (on return of power) operations are managed automatically by the system and are therefore transparent to the user. This card (formatted by Schneider Electric® and supplied with each processor) is referenced as a replacement part BMX RMS 008MP. (1) For the size of the different memory areas, see characteristics, page 1/8. 1/6 Memory structure (continued) Modicon® M340™ Automation Platform 0 Processor modules Memory structure (continued) BMX P34 20p0 processor with BMX RMS 008MPF memory card Application internal RAM (1) Application internal RAM User internal RAM 1 Located data 1 Unlocated data 1 Program, symbols and comments 2 Program, symbols and comments 22 Constants 3 Constants 33 BMX RMS 008MP memory card (supplied as standard) System data Area for online program modification 4 File storage 5 In place of the BMX RMS 008MP memory card (supplied as standard with each processor), BMX P34 2010/2020/2030 processors can take the BMX RMS 008MPF memory card. With the three above-mentioned processors, this card also offers (in addition to the features of the BMX RMS 008MP card supplied as standard described on page 1/6): 5 A file storage area (for additional data, such as production data and manufacturing sequences): This area is limited to 16 Mb. These files can be managed from the application program or by any FTP client connected to the Ethernet TCP/IP port integrated in the processor. For BMX P34 2020/2030 processors with integrated Ethernet TCP/IP port, the BMX RMS 008MPF memory card also offers standard Transparent Ready® web service - class B10). The Unity Pro™ programming software assists the application designer with managing the structure and memory space occupation of the Modicon M340 automation platform. Protecting the application If necessary, it is possible to prohibit access to the application (in terms of reading or modifying the program) by only loading the executable code to the PLC. Additionally, a memory protection bit, set in configuration mode, is also available to prevent any program modification (via the programming terminal or downloads). Modifying the program in online mode As with Modicon® Premium™ and Quantum™ platforms (with Unity Pro™ software), the online program modification function is available on the Modicon M340 automation platform with the option of adding or modifying the program code and data in different places in the application in a single modification session (thus ensuring modification is homogenous and consistent with the controlled process). The application internal RAM memory area 4 authorizes these program modification or addition sessions while observing the recommendation to structure the application program in several reasonably sized sections. 1/7 Modicon® M340™ Automation Platform Characteristics Processor modules Modicon M340 Micro-PLCs have been designed to conform with the main national and international standards relating to electronic devices for industrial control systems (see pages 6/2 to 6/7) “Standards, certifications and environmental conditions”. Characteristics and performance Processor 1 Maximum configuration Functions Standard BMX P34 1000 1 12 No. of racks 4, 6, 8 or 12 slots Max. number of slots for processor and modules (excluding power supply module) Max. no. (1) Discrete I/O Analog I/O Control channels Counter channels Motion control Integrated connections Ethernet TCP/IP CANopen master bus Serial link USB port Communication Ethernet TCP/IP module Internal user RAM Total capacity Program, constants and symbols Data Memory card Supplied as standard (reference BMX RMS 008MP) Kb Kb Kb Performance BMX P34 2010 BMX P34 2020 BMX P34 2030 512 1,024; 704 in single-rack configuration (64 I/O x 11) 128; 66 in single-rack 256; 66 in single-rack configuration (4I/2Q x 11) configuration (4I/2Q x 11) Programmable loops (via CONT-CTL process control EFB library) 20 36 – Independent axes on – Independent axes on CANopen bus (via CANopen bus (via MFB library) MFB library) – 1 RJ45 port, 10/100 Mbps, with Transparent ® Ready web server - class B10 standard – 1 (9-pin SUB-D) – 1 (9-pin SUB-D) 1 RJ45 port, Modbus® communication master/slave RTU/ASCII or – character mode (non-isolated RS 232C/RS 485), 0.3...19.2 Kbps 1 port, 12 Mbps 1 RJ45 port, 10/100 Mbps, with: - Transparent Ready® web server - class B30 standard with BMX NOE 0100 module - Transparent Ready® web server - class C30 configurable with BMX NOE 0110 module 2,048 4,096 1,792 3,584 128 256 Kb Backup of program, constants, symbol and data – Activation of standard web server, class B10 – Backup of program, constants, symbol and data – File storage, 16 Mb – Activation of standard web server, class B10 16,250% Mi 32,464% Mi 256% Mi 512% Mi 32,464% MWi internal words, 32,760% KWi constant words 512% MWi internal 1,024% MWi internal words, 256% KWi constant words words, 128% KWi constant words 128 (2) 256 (2) Execution time Boolean for one On words or fixed Single-length words instruction point arithmetic Double-length words On floating points μs μs μs μs 1 cyclic or periodic 1 periodic – 32 (including 2 with priority) 0.18 0.38 0.26 1.74 100% Boolean No. of K instructions executed per 65% Boolean and 35% fixed arithmetic ms K inst/ ms K inst/ ms 5.4 8.1 4.2 6.4 System overhead ms ms 1.05 0.20 0.70 0.13 mA 72 90 To be ordered separately (reference BMX RMS 008MPF) Maximum size Located internal Maximum of object areas bits Default Located internal Maximum data Default Max. unlocated internal data Application structure Power consumption bits bits Bytes Bytes Master task Fast task Auxiliary tasks Event tasks Master task Fast task With 24 V c voltage 64 (including 2 with priority) 0.12 0.25 0.17 1.16 95 (1) Only affects in-rack modules. The remote I/O on the CANopen bus are not included in these maximum numbers. (2) The size of the located data (internal bits and data) and the size of the configuration data should be deducted from this value. 1/8 135 0 Modicon® M340™ Automation Platform References 0 Processor modules BMX P34 Modicon ® M340™ processors Modicon M340 processor modules are supplied with the BMX RMS 008MP Flash memory card. This card performs the following actions transparently: - Backing up the application (program, symbols and constants) supported in the processor internal RAM that is not backed up - Activation of the Transparent Ready® web server - class B10 standard (with BMX P34 2020/2030 Performance processors) This card can be replaced by another card featuring a file storage option. I/O capacity (1) Memory capacity Max. no. of network Integrated modules communication ports Reference (3) Weight kg 2,048 Kb integrated 1 Ethernet TCP/IP network Modbus® serial link BMXP341000 0.200 1 Ethernet TCP/IP network Modbus® serial link CANopen bus Modbus® serial link Ethernet TCP/IP network Ethernet TCP/IP network CANopen bus BMXP342010 0.210 BMXP342020 0.205 BMXP342030 0.215 Processor compatibility BMX P34 20p0 Reference Length Reference 1.8 m 4.5 m BMXXCAUSBH018 BMXXCAUSBH045 Standard BMX P340 10 512 discrete I/O 128 analog I/O 20 application-specific channels Performance BMX P340 20 BMX P34 1000 1,024 discrete I/O 256 analog I/O 36 application-specific channels 4,096 Kb integrated Memory card Description BMX P34 2010/2030 Use Memory card 16 Mb As replacement for the memory card supplied as standard with each processor, used for: - Backup of program, constants, symbol and data - File storage, 16 Mb - Activation of class B10 web server BMXRMS008MPF Weight kg 0.002 Separate parts Description Terminal port/USB cord sets Use From To Mini B USB port PC terminal type A on the Modicon USB port M340 processor Weight kg 0.065 0.110 BMX P34 2020 Replacement parts Description Memory card 8 Mb BMX RMS 008MP / MPF Use Supplied as standard with each processor, used for: - Backup of program, constants, symbol and data - Activation of class B10 web server Processor Reference compatibility BMX P34 1000 / 20p0 BMXRMS008MP Weight kg 0.002 (1) For I/O capacity in single-rack configuration, see characteristics, page 1/8. BMX XCA USB H0pp 1/9 1 Modicon® M340™ Automation Platform Presentation, description Power supply modules Presentation BMX CPS ppp0 power supply modules provide the power supply for each BMX XBP pp00 rack and the modules installed on it. There are two types of power supply module: b Power supply modules for AC supplies b Power supply modules for DC supplies 1 Description The power supply module is selected according to: v The electrical line supply: 24 V c, 48 V c or 100...240 V a v The required power (see the power consumption table on page 6/8) (1) 1 2 3 BMX CPS ppp0 power supply modules have the following on the front panel : 1 A display block comprising: v OK LED (green), lit if rack voltages are present and correct v 24 V LED (green), lit when the sensor voltage is present (for BMX CPS 2000/3500 AC power supply modules only) 2 A pencil-point RESET push button for a cold restart of the application 3 A 2-pin connector that can receive a removable terminal block (screw or spring-type) for connecting the alarm relay 4 A 5-pin connector that can receive a removable terminal block (screw or spring-type) for connecting the following: v c or a line supply v Protective earth ground v Dedicated 24 V c power supply for the input sensors (for BMX CPS 2000/3500 AC power supply modules only) 4 To be ordered separately: Pack of two removable terminal blocks, depending on the model: v Screw clamp BMX XTS CPS10 v Spring-type BMX XTS CPS20 (1) This power consumption calculation for the rack can also be performed by the Unity Pro™ programming software. Functions: page 1/11 1/10 Characteristics: page 1/12 References: page 1/13 0 Modicon® M340™ Automation Platform Functions 0 Power supply modules Functions Alarm relay The alarm relay located in each power supply module has a voltage-free contact accessible from the front of the 2-pin connector. The operating principle is as follows: In normal operation, with the PLC in RUN, the alarm relay is activated and its contact is closed (state 1). The relay de-energizes and its associated contact opens (state 0) whenever the application stops, even partially, due to any of the following: b Occurrence of a blocking fault b Incorrect rack output voltages b Loss of supply voltage RESET push button The power supply module in each rack has a RESET button on the front panel; when activated, this triggers an initialization sequence for the processor and the rack modules it supplies. Pressing this push button triggers a sequence of service signals, which is the same as that for: b A power break when the push button is pressed b A power-up when the push button is released These operations represent a cold start (forcing the I/O modules to state 0 and initializing the processor). Sensor power supply The BMX CPS 2000/3500 AC power supply modules have an integrated 24 V c voltage supply for powering the input sensors. Connection to this sensor power supply is via the 5-pin connector on the front panel. The power available on this 24 V c voltage depends on the power supply model (0.45 or 0.9 A) (see characteristics on page 1/12). Presentation: page 1/10 Description: page 1/10 Characteristics: page 1/12 References: page 1/13 1/11 1 Modicon® M340™ Automation Platform Characteristics Power supply modules Characteristics c power supply module Primary Voltage Nominal Limit (including ripple) Input nominal I rms Current Initial power-up at 25 °C (1) 1 Secondary Micro-break duration Integrated protection Useful power 3.3 V c voltage (2) I inrush I2t on activation It on activation Line (accepted) Max. Nominal voltage Nominal current Typical power 24 V c output Nominal voltage (3) Nominal current Typical power Integrated protection on the voltages (4) Max. dissipated power Max. length of Copper wires with 1.5 mm2 cross-section power supply Copper wires with 2.5 mm2 cross-section cable Insulation Dielectric strength Primary/secondary and primary/ground Insulation resistance Primary/secondary and primary/ground a power supply module Primary Voltages Nominal Limit (including ripple) Frequencies Nominal/limit Power Apparent Current Input nominal I rms Initial power-up at 25 °C I inrush (1) I2t on activation It on activation Micro-break duration Line (accepted) Integrated protection Secondary Useful power Max. overall Max. on 3.3 V c and 24 V c rack output voltages 3.3 V c voltage Nominal voltage (2) Nominal current Power (typical) 24 V rack c voltage Nominal voltage (3) Nominal current Typical power 24 V c sensor voltage Nominal voltage (4) Nominal current Typical power Integrated protection on the voltages (5) Maximum dissipated power Insulation Dielectric strength Primary/secondary (24 V/3.3 V) Primary/secondary (sensor 24 V) Primary/ground 24 V sensor output/ground Insulation resistance Primary/secondary and primary/ground W m m BMX CPS 2010 BMX CPS 3020 24 c isolated 24...48 c isolated 18...31.2 c 18...62..4 c 1 at 24 V c 1.65 at 24 V c; 0.83 at 48 V c 24 c 24 c 48 c 30 30 60 ≤ 0.6 ≤1 ≤3 ≤ 0.15 ≤ 0.2 ≤ 0.3 ≤1 With internal fuse (not accessible) 17 32 3.3 2.5 4.5 8.25 14.85 24 c 0.7 1.3 16.8 31.2 Yes, against overloads, short-circuits and overvoltages 8.5 20 10 30 15 V rms 1,500 - 50 Hz for 1 min at an altitude of 0...4,000 m MΩ ≥ 10 V V A V A A2s As ms W V A W V A W V V Hz VA A rms V A A2s As ms W W V A W V A W V A W BMX CPS 2000 100...240 a 85...264 a 50-60/47-63 70 0.61 at 115 V a; 0.31 at 240 V a 120 a 240 a ≤ 30 ≤ 60 ≤ 0.5 ≤2 0.03 0.06 ≤ 10 With internal fuse (not accessible) 20 16.5 BMX CPS 3500 120 1.04 at 115 V a; 0.52 at 240 V a 120 a 240 a ≤ 30 ≤ 60 ≤1 ≤3 ≤ 0.05 ≤ 0.07 36 31.2 W V rms 3.3 2.5 4.5 8.25 14.85 24 c 0.7 1.3 16.8 31.2 24 c 0.45 0.9 10.8 21.6 Yes, against overloads, short-circuits and overvoltages 8.5 1500 V rms 2300 V rms V rms 1500 500 MΩ ≥ 100 (1) These values should be considered when starting several devices simultaneously and when sizing protection devices. (2) 3.3 V c voltage for the I/O module logic power supply (3) 24 V c voltage for the I/O module power supply and the processor (4) 24 V c sensor output for the sensor power supply (5) Protected by a fuse that cannot be accessed Presentation: page 1/10 1/12 Description: page 1/10 Functions: page 1/11 References: page 1/13 0 Modicon® M340™ Automation Platform References 0 Power supply modules References Each BMX XBP pp00 rack must be equipped with a power supply module. These modules are inserted into the first two slots of each rack (marked CPS). The power required to supply each rack depends on the type and number of modules installed in the rack. It is therefore necessary to draw up a power consumption table rack by rack to determine the BMX CPS ppp0 power supply module most suitable for each rack (see page 6/8). Power supply modules Line supply 24 V c isolated 24...48 V c isolated 100...240 V a Available power (1) 3.3 V c (2) 24 V 24 V Total rack c (2) sensor c (3) 8.3 W 16.5 W – 16.5 W Reference Weight kg BMXCPS2010 0.290 15 W 31.2 W – 31.2 W BMXCPS3020 0.340 8.3 W 15 W 16.5 W 31.2 W 10.8 W 21.6 W 20 W 36 W BMXCPS2000 BMXCPS3500 0.300 0.360 BMX CPS 2010 / 3020 Separate parts Description Pack of 2 removable connectors Composition Type Reference One 5-pin terminal block and one 2-pin terminal block Cage clamp Spring-type BMXXTSCPS10 BMXXTSCPS20 Weight kg 0.020 0.015 BMX CPS 2000 / 3500 (1) The sum of the absorbed power on each voltage (3.3 V c and 24 V c) should not exceed the total power of the module. See the power consumption table on page 6/8 (2) 3.3 V c and 24 V rack c voltages for powering Modicon M340 PLC modules (3) 24 V c sensor voltage for powering the input sensors (voltage available via the 2-pin removable connector on the front panel) Presentation: page 1/10 Description: page 1/10 Functions: page 1/11 Characteristics: page 1/12 1/13 1 Modicon® M340™ Automation Platform Presentation, description, function Single-rack configuration Presentation BMX XBP pp00 racks are the basic element of the Modicon M340 automation platform in a single-rack configuration. These racks perform the following functions: b Mechanical function: They are used to install all the modules in a PLC station (power supply, processor, discrete I/O, analog and application-specific I/O). These racks can be mounted on a panel, plate or DIN rail: v Inside enclosures v On machine frames, etc. b Electrical function: The racks incorporate a Bus X. They are used to: v Distribute the power supplies required for each module in the same rack v Distribute data and service signals for the entire PLC station v Hot swap modules during operation 1 Description 1 5 3 2 7 6 4 Rack 6 slots BMX XBP 0600 BMX XBP pp00 racks are available in 4, 6, 8 or 12-slot versions, and comprise: 1 A metal frame that performs the following functions: v Holds the Bus X electronic card and protects it against EMI and ESD type interference v Holds the modules v Gives the rack mechanical rigidity 2 A ground terminal for grounding the rack 3 Holes for mounting the rack on a frame. These holes are big enough for M6 screws. 4 Connecting points for the shielding connection bar 5 Tapped holes to receive each module locking screw 6 A connector for an expansion module. This connector (marked XBE) is not used for this version. 7 40-pin female ½ DIN connectors forming the connection between the rack and each module. When the rack is delivered, these connectors are protected by covers that should be removed before inserting the modules. Slots for anchoring the module pins To be ordered separately: BMX XSP pp00 cable shielding connection kit, used to protect against electrostatic discharge when connecting the shielding of cord sets for connecting: v Analog modules v A Magelis® XBT operator interface to the processor (via BMX XCA USBH0pp shielded USB cable) This kit comprises: 8 A metal bar that receives the clamping rings 9 Two sub-bases to be mounted on the rack 10 A set of spring clamping rings for attaching cables with their shielding to the metal bar. Packs of 10 STB XSP 30p0 clamping rings can be ordered in addition if required. Function Addressing modules in a single-rack configuration Each rack must contain a power supply module and a processor module. CPS 00 01 02 03 04 Example of installation with 8-slot rack 1/14 05 06 07 Inserting different modules into the rack: v The power supply module always occupies the CPS slot. v The processor module must always be installed in slot 00. v Its I/O modules and application-specific modules are installed in slot 01 to slot ... - 03 with a 4-slot rack - 05 with a 6-slot rack - 07 with an 8-slot rack - 11 with a 12-slot rack 0 Modicon® M340™ Automation Platform References, dimensions, mounting 0 Single-rack configuration Racks Description Racks BMX XBP 0400 Type of module to be inserted BMX CPS power supply, BMX P34 processor, I/O modules and application-specific modules (counter, communication) No. of slots (1) 4 6 8 12 Reference BMXXBP0400 BMXXB0600 BMXXBP0800 BMXXBP1200 Weight kg 1.470 1.750 2.310 – Accessories BMX XBP 0800 Description Shielding connection kits comprising: - a metal bar - two sub-bases - one set of spring clamping rings Spring clamping rings (pack of 5) BMX XBP 1200 Protective covers (pack of 5) For use with Unit reference BMX XBP 0400 rack BMX XBP 0600 rack BMX XBP 0800 rack BMX XBP 1200 rack BMXXSP0400 BMXXSP0600 BMXXSP0800 BMXXSP1200 Weight kg 0.280 0.310 0.340 0.400 Cables with 1.5…6 mm2 cross-section STBXSP3010 Cables with 5…11 mm 2 cross-section STBXSP3020 Unoccupied slots on BMX XBP pp00 BMXXEM010 rack 0.050 0.070 0.005 (1) Number of slots receiving the processor module, I/O modules and application-specific modules (excluding power supply module). BMX XSP pp00 STB XSP 30p0 Dimensions, mounting BMX XBP Common side view Front view: BMX XBP example Rail (1) 100 150 (2) 140 (1) 150 (1) 160 (2) a BMX XBP 0400 242.4 BMX XBP 0600 307.6 BMX XBP 0800 372.8 BMX XBP 1200 503.2 (1) With removable terminal block (cage, screw or spring). (2) With FCN connector. a Mounting the racks On AM1 PA and AM3 PA pre-slotted plate Installation rules 4 holes (2) 16 AF1-EA6 u 80 a 60 100 (2) u 60 a u 80 b a b BMX XBP 0400 207.8 242.2 BMX XBP 0600 273 307.6 BMX XBP 0800 338.2 372.8 BMX XBP 1200 468.6 503.2 (1) On AM1 ED rail: 35 mm wide, 15 mm deep Only possible with BMX XBP 0400/0600/0800 rack. (2) For panel-mounting: The diameter of the mounting holes must be sufficient to accept M4, M5, M6 screws ( 4.32 to 6.35). (1) (2) a (2) a≥ a u 60 23,4 u 60 19 a 24 11,2 3 mm (1) Equipment or enclosure. (2) Cable ducting or clip. 1/15 1 2 2/0 0 Contents 2 - Input/output modules 1 Discrete I/O modules b Discrete I/O modules v Presentation, description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2/6 v Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2/8 v Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2/10 v References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2/16 v Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2/18 2 Analog I/O modules and process control b Analog I/O modules v Presentation, description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2/24 v Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2/25 v Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2/26 v Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2/28 v References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2/31 b Programmable process control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2/32 Distributed I/O modules Counter modules and Motion Function Blocks b Counter modules v Presentation, description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2/36 v Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2/37 v Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2/40 v References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2/41 v Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2/42 b MFB, Motion Function Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2/44 2/1 Modicon® M340™ Automation Platform Selection guide Discrete I/O modules Input modules and mixed I/O modules Applications 16-channel input modules Connection via cage clamp, screw clamp or spring-type removable terminals Type Voltage c 24 V Modularity (Number of channels) 16 isolated channels Connection Via BMX FTB 2000/2010/2020 20-pin cage clamp, screw clamp or spring-type removable terminals Type 3 Type 1 Type 1 (a) Type 3 2 Isolated inputs IEC 1131-2 conformity Logic Sensor compatibility in accordance with standard IEC 947-5-2 48 V c or a 24 V a 48 V Positive 2-wire c, 3-wire c PNP any type Pos. or neg. 2-wire c/a, 3-wire c PNP or NPN any type – 2-wire a Module BMX DDI 1602 BMX DAI 1602 r BMX DAI 1603 r Page 1/16 Isolated outputs 100…120V Fallback IEC 1131-2 conformity Protection Logic Compatibility with installation help system Compatibility with Advantys™ Telefast® ABE7 pre-wired I/O system Tego® Dial – TeSys ® – Quickfit Connection sub-bases – Input and output adapter sub-bases – Passive connection sub-base Optimum “Economy” – Optimum “Miniature” – Universal – Fixed relays – Plug-in relays – Relay adapter sub-base Preformed cord sets with 40-pin connector – Pages – BMX DDI 1603 r r Available 4th quarter 2007 2/2 BMX DAI 1604 0 0 32/64-channel high-density input modules Connection via 40-pin connectors with preformed cord sets 16/32-channel mixed I/O modules Connection via cage clamp, screw clamp or spring-type removable terminals Connection via 40-pin connectors with preformed cord sets 2 c 24 V c 24 V I/O c and a (outputs only) 24 V inputs, relay outputs c 24 V I/O 32 isolated channels 64 isolated channels 8 isolated inputs and 8 isolated outputs 16 isolated inputs and 16 isolated outputs Via one 40-pin connector Via two 40-pin connectors Via one 40-pin connector Type 3 Non-IEC Via BMX FTB 2000/2010/2020 20-pin cage clamp, screw clamp or spring-type removable terminals Type 3 Positive 2-wire c, 3-wire c PNP any type Positive Positive – – Configurable output fallback, continuous monitoring of output control and resetting of outputs in case of internal fault Yes Protected Not protected Protected Positive – Positive BMX DDI 3202K BMX DDI 6402K BMX DDM 16022 1/16 1/17 APE 1B24M Dialbase interface with 8I/8Q – LU9 G02 splitter boxes (8 motor starters) and BMX FCC pp1/pp3 preformed cord sets – BMX DDM 16025 BMX DDM 3202K APE 1B24M Dialbase interface LU9 G02 splitter boxes (8 motor starters) and BMX FCC pp1/pp3 preformed cord sets Depending on model, 8- or 16-channel passive sub-bases, with or without LED, with common or 2 terminals per channel Depending on model, 16-channel active sub-bases with solid state or electromechanical, fixed or removable relays, 5...48 V c, 24 V c, 24 V...240 V a or voltage-free, with common or 2 terminals per channel, screw or spring-type connection ABE7H20Ep00 – ABE7H20Ep00 ABE7H16Cpp – ABE7H16Cpp ABE7H08Rpp/7H08S21, ABE7H16R1p/7H16R50, ABE7H16R2p/7H16S21, ABE7H16R3p/7H16R23, ABE7H16S43, ABE7S16E2pp – ABE7P16F31pp – BMX FCC pp1/FCC pp3 – ABE7H08Rpp/7H08S21, ABE7H16R1p/7H16R50, ABE7H16R2p/7H16S21, ABE7H16R3p/7H16R23, ABE7H16S43/7H16F43 ABE7S16E2pp ABE7S16Sppp/7R16S ABE7P16F31pp ABE7R16Tppp/7P16Tppp BMXFCC pp3 5/10 to 5/16, 2/17 – 5/10 to 5/16, 2/17 – 2/3 Selection guide (continued) Modicon® M340™ Automation Platform Discrete I/O modules Output modules Applications 32/64-channel high-density output modules Connection via 40-pin connectors with preformed cord sets Type c solid state Voltage Current 24 V 0.1 A per channel Modularity (Number of channels) Connection 32 protected channels 64 protected channels Via one 40-pin connector Via two 40-pin connectors 2 Isolated outputs Fallback Configurable output fallback, continuous monitoring of output control and resetting of outputs in case of internal fault IEC 1131-2 conformity Protection Yes Current limiter with electronic tripping Logic Positive – Discrete output module BMX DDO 3202K BMX DDO 6402K Page 2/16 Tego® Dial – TeSys ® Quickfit – Compatibility with Advantys™ Telefast® ABE7 pre-wired I/O system Connection sub-bases – Input adapter sub-bases – Passive sub-base Optimum “Economy” ABE7H20Ep00 Optimum “Miniature” ABE7H16Cpp Universal Fixed relays ABE7H08Rpp/7H08S21, ABE7H16R1p/7H16R50, ABE7H16R2p/7H16S21, ABE7H16R3p ABE7H16F43 ABE7S16Sppp / 7R16S Removable relays ABE7R16Tppp/7P16Tppp Compatibility with installation help system Relay adapter sub-base Preformed cord sets with 40-pin connector BMXFCCpp1/FCC pp3 Pages 5/10 to 5/16, 2/17 2/4 0 0 16-channel output modules Connection via cage clamp, screw clamp or spring-type removable terminals 8/16-channel output modules 2 c solid state a triac c/a relay 24 V c 0.5 A per channel 100…240 V 0.6 A per channel 24 V c, 24...240 V a 3 A (Ith) per channel 2 A (Ith) per channel 16 protected channels 16 non-protected channels 8 non-protected channels 16 non-protected channels BMX DRA 0805 BMX DRA 1605 Via BMX FTB 2000/2010/2020 20-pin cage clamp, screw clamp or spring-type removable terminals Configurable output fallback, continuous monitoring of output control and resetting of outputs in case of internal fault Configurable output fallback Yes Current limiter with electronic tripping Yes – Positive Negative – BMX DDO 1602 BMX DDO 1612 r BMX DAO 1605 r 2/16 – – – – – – – – – – – r Available 4th quarter 2007 2/5 Modicon® M340™ Automation Platform Presentation, description Discrete I/O modules Presentation Discrete I/O modules in the Modicon M340 PLC offer are standard modules occupying a single slot, equipped with either of the following: v A connector for a screw or spring-type 20-pin removable terminal block v One or two 40-pin connector(s) A wide range of discrete inputs and outputs can be used to meet whatever requirements arise in terms of: v functions: AC or DC I/O, positive or negative logic v modularity: 8, 16, 32 or 64 channels per module 2 The inputs receive signals from the sensors and perform the following functions: v v v v v acquisition adaptation electrical isolation filtering protection against interference signals The outputs memorize commands issued by the processor to enable control of the actuators via the decoupling and amplification circuits. Description BMX DpI/DpO/DRA discrete I/O modules are standard format (1 slot). Their case ensures IP 20 protection of the electronics, and they are locked into position by a captive screw. 1 I/O modules connected via 20-pin removable terminal block 2 1 Rigid body providing support and protection for the electronic card 2 Module reference marking (a label is also visible on the right-hand side of the module) 3 Channel status display block 4 Connector accepting the 20-pin removable terminal block for connecting sensors or preactuators 8 4 To be ordered separately: A BMX FTB 20p0 20-pin removable terminal block or a preformed cord set with a 20-pin removable terminal block at one end and wires at the other (see page 2/7. Module and 20-pin removable terminal block 1 2 I/O modules connected via 40-pin connector 5 8 4 1 Rigid body providing support and protection for the electronic card 2 Module reference marking (a label is also visible on the right-hand side of the module) 3 Channel status display block 4 One or two 40-pin connectors (32 or 64 channels) (1) for connecting sensors or preactuators 5 With the 64-channel module, a push button which, with successive presses, displays the state of channels 0...31 or 32...63 on the block 3 (see page 2/9) To be ordered separately, depending on the type of module: One or two preformed cord set(s) with a 40-pin connector (see page 2/7). 32- and 64-channel modules with for connection via 40-pin connector(s) (1) Fujistu FCN 40-pin connector Characteristics: pages 2/11 to 2/15 Connections: pages 2/18 to 2/21 2/6 References: pages 2/16 to 2/17 0 Presentation (continued) Modicon® M340™ Automation Platform 0 Discrete I/O modules Connecting modules with removable terminal blocks There are three types of 20-pin removable terminal blocks: v Screw clamp terminal block v Cage clamp terminal block v Spring-type terminal block Each removable terminal block can accept: v Bare wires v Wires equipped with DZ5-CE cable ends One version of the removable terminal block is equipped with BMX FTWpp1 cord sets with color-coded wires (3, 5 or 10 m long). Cage clamp terminal blocks Preformed cord set with removable terminal block at one end and wires at the other The capacity of each terminal is: v Minimum: One 0.34 mm2 wire (22 AWG) v Maximum: One 1.5 mm2 wire (14 AWG) BMX FTB 2000 cage clamp connectors are equipped with captive screws maximum tightening torque 0.5 N.m (4.4 lb-in). Screw clamp terminal blocks The capacity of each terminal is: v Minimum: One or two 0.34 mm2 wires (22 AWG) v Maximum: Two 1.5 mm2 wires (14 AWG) BMX FTB 2010 screw clamp connectors are equipped with captive screws maximum tightening torque 0.5 N.m (4.4 lb-in). B A Spring-type terminal blocks A B Preformed cord set with 40-pin connector at one end and 2 wires at the others The capacity of each terminal in the BMX FTB 2020 spring-type terminal blocks is: v Minimum: Two 0.34 mm2 wires (22 AWG) v Maximum: Two 1.5 mm2 wires (14 AWG) Connecting modules with 40-pin connectors Preformed cord sets with 40-pin connector at one end and wires at the other Preformed cord sets can be used for easy direct wire-to-wire connection between the I/O of modules with connectors 1, and the sensors, preactuators or intermediate terminals. These preformed cord sets comprise: v At one end, a 40-pin connector 2, with either of the following: - One sheath 3, containing 20 wires sized 0.34 mm2 (22 AWG) (BMX FCW pp1) - Two sheaths 4, each containing 20 wires sized 0.34 mm2 (22 AWG) (BMX FCW pp3) v At the other end 5, color-coded wires conforming to standard DIN 47100 (see page 2/21) Preformed cord set with 40-pin connector and HE 10 connector for Advantys Telefast ABE7 pre-wired I/O system Preformed cord sets with 40-pin connector and HE 10 connector(s) Two types of cord sets can be used for connecting the I/O modules with 40-pin connectors 1, using the Advantys™ Telefast® ABE7 pre-wired I/O system of rapid wiring connections, and 2, adaptation interfaces (see page 5/8). These preformed cord sets comprise: v At one end, a 40-pin connector 3, with either of the following: - One sheath 4, containing 20 wires (BMX FCC pp1) - Two sheaths 5, each containing 20 wires (BMX FCC pp3) v At the other end, one or two HE 10 connectors 6 Connection to Tego® Dial and TeSys® Quickfit systems BMX DDI 3202K/6402K input modules and BMX DDO 3202K/6402K output modules 1 are designed for use in conjunction with Tego® Dial and TeSys® Quickfit installation help systems. The modules are easily connected using a connection cable. Example of connection to the Tego Dial installation help system Characteristics: pages 2/11 to 2/15 References: pages 2/16 to 2/17 Connections: pages 2/18to 2/21 2/7 2 Modicon® M340™ Automation Platform Functions 0 Discrete I/O modules Functions Hot swapping Due to their integrated devices, I/O modules (including application-specific modules) can be removed and connected while powered up. Note : When the PLC is powered up and running, the I/O modules can be removed without any material risk by performing the following sequence before removing the module: - Disconnect the power voltage on the outputs - Disconnect the sensor and preactuator power supply - Remove the terminal block or connector 2 I/O module assignment Discrete I/O modules have different parameters for each channel. The channels are grouped into blocks of 4, 8 or 16 consecutive channels depending on the type of module. Each group of channels can be assigned to a specific application task (master or fast). Protection of DC inputs The 24 and 48 V c inputs are constant-current type. This characteristic makes it possible to: v Ensure minimum current in active state in compliance with the IEC standard v Limit the current consumption when the input voltage increases, to avoid unwanted temperature rise in the module v Reduce the current consumption on the sensor power supply provided by the PLC power supply or by a process power supply Protection of DC outputs All protected solid state outputs have a protective device which, when an output is active, can detect the occurrence of: v An overload or short-circuit: This type of fault deactivates the output (tripping) and indicates a fault on the display located on the module front panel (the faulty channel LED flashes, and the I/O module fault LED lights up). v Reverse polarity: This type of fault short-circuits the power supply without damaging the module. For this protection to work in optimum conditions, it is essential to place a fast-blow fuse on the power supply upstream of the preactuators. v Inductive overvoltage: Each output is protected individually against inductive overvoltages and has a fast zener diode demagnetization circuit for electromagnets, which can reduce the output response time for some fast machines. Reactivation of DC outputs If a fault has caused an output to trip, the output can be reactivated using this parameter if no other terminal fault is present. Reactivation is defined for each group of 8 channels. It has no effect on an inactive channel or one that is not faulty. The reactivation command can be: v Programmed: Reactivation is carried out by a command from the PLC application or via the debug screen. To avoid repeated reactivations too close together, the module automatically allows a time delay of 10 s between two reactivations. v Automatic: Reactivation takes place automatically every 10 s until the fault disappears. RUN/STOP command An input can be configured to control the RUN/STOP mode for the PLC. This takes effect on a rising edge. A STOP command from an input has priority over a RUN command from a programming terminal or via the network. Characteristics: pages 2/11 to 2/15 2/8 References: pages 2/16 to 2/17 Connections: pages 2/18 to 2/21 Modicon® M340™ Automation Platform Functions (continued) 0 Discrete I/O modules Functions (continued) Output fallback This parameter defines the fallback mode used by the DC solid state outputs when the PLC stops, following a: v Processor fault v Rack fault v Fault on the cable connecting the racks The outputs must be set to a state that is not harmful to the application. This state, known as the fallback position, is defined for each module when the DC solid state outputs are configured. This configuration offers a choice between: v Fallback: The channels are set to 0 or 1 according to the fallback value defined for the group of 8 corresponding channels. v Maintain: The outputs maintain their state from before the stop. I/O module diagnostics 2 1 3 Each discrete I/O module is equipped with a display block on the front panel centralizing all the information necessary for module control, diagnostics and maintenance. The display block comprises: 1 A set of 8, 16 or 32 green LEDs, depending on the module. Each LED is associated with one channel: - On: channel in state 1; Off: channel in state 0 - Flashing: channel faulty, overloaded or short-circuit 2 Three LEDs indicating the module status: - RUN (green): On: Normal operation - ERR (red): On: Internal module fault; Flashing: Exchange fault between the module and the processor - I/O (red): On: External fault (sensor/preactuator voltage, overload, short-circuit, etc.); Flashing: Terminal block fault 3 A +32 LED (green) indicating, in the case of 64-channel modules, whether the set of 32 LEDs 1 displays the state of channels 0...31 (off) or the state of channels 32...63 (on). This +32 LED is activated or deactivated by a push button located on top of the module. Diagnostics via Unity Pro™ software Using the integrated diagnostics in Unity Pro™ software, the local diagnostics indicators on the modules front panel are complemented by system diagnostics based on predefined screens at the global hardware configuration level, the module level and the channel level (see pages 4/21 and 4/22). Remote diagnostics using a web browser on a “Thin Client” PC In addition, the diagnostics described above can be performed remotely using a simple web browser thanks to the standard web server integrated in the Modicon M340 platform (processor with integrated Ethernet port or Ethernet module), using the ready-to-use Rack Viewer function (see page 3/4). Compatibility with 2-wire and 3-wire sensors Input type 24 V c Non-IEC positive log. (sink) 48 V c type 1 positive log. (sink) Any 3-wire c sensor, PNP type Any 3-wire c sensor, NPN type Telemecanique ® 2-wire c sensor or other brand with the following characteristics: - Residual voltage in closed state ≤ 7 V - Minimum switched current ≤ 2.5 mA - Residual current in open state ≤ 1.5 mA Telemecanique ® 2-wire c sensor or other brand with the following characteristics: - Residual voltage in closed state ≤ 4 V - Minimum switched current ≤ 1 mA - Residual current in open state ≤ 0.5 mA 2-wire c/a sensor (1) 2-wire a sensor 24 V c type 3 positive log. (sink) 24 V a type 1 48 V a type 3 100...120 V a type 3 (1) Not compatible Compatible (1) 24 V a sensors can be used as negative logic (source) 24 V c inputs compatible with 3-wire c sensor NPN type, but in this case, are not IEC-compliant. 2/9 2 Modicon® M340™ Automation Platform Characteristics Discrete I/O modules Common characteristics Environment Conformity to standards Temperature derating NFC 63 850, IEC 664, IEC 1131 2, UL 508, UL7 46C, CSA 22 2 no. 142 The characteristics at 60 °C are assured for 60% of inputs and 60% of outputs at state 1 Characteristics of DC input modules Module Number of inputs Connection 2 BMX DDI 3202K 32 One 40-pin connector BMX DDI 6402K 64 Two 40-pin connectors BMX DAI 1602 16 Spring or screw-type 20-pin removable terminal block 1 3 Negative (source) ≥ 15 >1 (for U ≥ 15 V) ≥ 14 >2 Voltage Current Logic V mA 24 c 3.5 Positive (sink) 48 c 2.5 24 c 2.5 At state 1 Voltage Current V mA At state 0 Voltage Current V mA ≥ 11 >2 (for U ≥ 11 V) <5 ≤ 1.5 ≥ 34 >2 (for U ≥ 34 V) < 10 ≤ 0.5 ≥ 11 >2 (for U ≥ 11 V) <5 ≤ 1.5 Nominal input values Input limit values BMX DDI 1602 BMX DDI 1603 16 Spring or screw-type 20-pin removable terminal block Sensor power supply (including ripple) Input impedance at nominal voltage KΩ 19…30 (possible 38...60 up to 34 V, limited to 1 hour in every 24 hours) 6.8 19.2 Response time (filtering) ms ms 4 7 MΩ Vrms V Protected Type 3 Type 1 Type 3 IEC 947-5-2 Yes No Use one 0.5 A fast-blow fuse per group of channels >10 at 500 V c 1,500 - 50/60 Hz for 1 minute (up to 4,000 m) – 500 c V V Current sink > 18 c < 14 c mA 798,237 696,320 See power consumption table page 6/8 Typical Maximum Reverse polarity IEC 1131-2 conformity Compatibility with 2-wire/3-wire sensors Paralleling of inputs (1) Protection of inputs Insulation resistance Dielectric strength Primary/Secondary Between groups of channels Type of input Sensor voltage control OK threshold Fault Reliability Consumption MTBF in hours At Tambient = 30 °C Typical W Maximum dissipated power Temperature derating References: pages 2/16 to 2/17 2/10 V Connections: pages 2/18 to 2/21 ≤ 0.5 19…30 (possible up to 34 V, limited to 1 hour in every 24 hours) 9.6 24 6.4 10 20 No Non-IEC – – – Resistive > 36 c < 24 c > 18 c < 14 c 362,681 1,504,958 2.5 3.6 3.9 4.3 3 None (1) This characteristic allows several inputs to be wired in parallel on the same module or on different modules for input redundancy. 0 Modicon® M340™ Automation Platform Characteristics (continued) 0 Discrete I/O modules Characteristics of AC input modules Module Number of inputs Connection Nominal input values Input limit values At state 1 At state 0 Voltage Current Frequency V mA Hz BMX DAI 1602 BMX DAI 1603 16 Spring or screw-type 20-pin removable terminal block 24 a 48 a 3 5 50/60 Voltage Current Voltage Current V mA V mA Hz V ≥ 15 ≥2 ≤5 ≤1 47...63 20...26 ≥ 34 40...52 85…132 mA 5 95 240 KΩ ms ms 6 15 20 9 10 13 MΩ Vrms V V Type 1 Type 3 IEC 947-5-2 Use one 0.5 A fast-blow fuse per group of channels >10 at 500 V c 1,500 - 50/60 Hz for 1 minute (up to 4,000 m) Resistive Capacitive > 18 > 36 < 14 < 24 mA 1,504,958 See power consumption table page 6/8 Frequency Sensor power supply (including ripple) Current peak At nominal voltage on activation Input impedance at nominal voltage and F = 55 Hz Response time (filtering) Activation Deactivation IEC 1131-2 conformity Compatibility with 2-wire/3-wire sensors Protection of inputs Insulation resistance Dielectric strength Type of input Sensor voltage control threshold OK Fault Reliability Consumption MTBF in hours At T ambient = 30 °C Typical Maximum dissipated power Temperature derating W 3 None BMX DAI 1604 y 10 ≥ 74 ≥ 2.5 y 20 100...120 a 2 4 > 82 < 40 3.8 Characteristics of triac output module Module Number of inputs Connection Operating voltages Currents Maximum inrush current Leakage current Residual voltage Response time Nominal resistive load Type of command Built-in protection Protection fuses Dielectric strength Insulation resistance Reliability Consumption W Nominal Limit Maximum Minimum At state 0 At state 1 Activation Deactivation A mA V ms ms Vrms MΩ Typical mA ≤ 20/cycle ≤ 1.5 for 120 V a, 60 Hz, ≤ 3 for 240 V a, 60 Hz ≤ 1.5 ≤ 1 +/- 0.5 Hz ≤ 1 +/- 0.5 Hz Passage through zero Varistor None (use an external fast-blow fuse) 2,830 a/3 cycles (2,000 m altitude) >10 at 500 V c – See power consumption table page 6/8 – Maximum dissipated power References: pages 2/16 to 2/17 V V A BMX DAO 1605 16 Spring or screw-type 20-pin removable terminal block 100...240 a 85...288 a 0.6 per channel, 2.4 per common, 4.8 for all 4 commons 25 mA at 100 V a, 25 mA at 240 V a Connections: pages 2/18 to 2/21 2/11 Modicon® M340™ Automation Platform Characteristics (continued) Discrete I/O modules Characteristics of DC solid state output modules Module Number of inputs Connection Output nominal values Output limit values 2 Tungsten filament lamp power Leakage current Residual voltage V A Voltage (including ripple) Current per channel Current per module V 19…30 (possible up to 34 V, limited to 1 hour in every 24 hours) A 0.625 0.125 A 10 3.2 W mA V 6 maximum < 0.5 < 1.2 1.2 maximum 0.1 (for U = 30 V) < 1.5 (for I = 0.1 A) Ω ms ms 48 1.2 – Yes (type 3, not IEC) 220 Minimum load impedance Response time (1) Maximum overload time Compatibility with IEC 1131-2 DC inputs Paralleling of outputs Switching frequency on inductive load Built-in protection Against overvoltages Against reverse polarity Against short-circuit and overloads Preactuator voltage control At state 0 threshold Fault Reliability Consumption MTBF in hours 2/12 Hz 6.4 if θ ≤ 40 °C 5.1 if θ ≤ 50 °C 3.8 if θ ≤ 60 °C 15 Yes (type 3, not IEC) Yes (2 max.) Yes (3 max.) 0.5/LI2 Yes, by Transil® diode Yes, with current limiter and electronic circuit breaker 1.5 In < Id < 2 In V V W Connections: pages 2/18 to 2/21 Yes (not IEC) 0.1 Positive (source) Yes, by reverse-mounted diode. Use a 2 A fuse on the + 24 V of the preactuators. MΩ Output/ground or Vrms output/internal logic Between groups of V channels At Tambient = 30 °C Typical mA Maximum dissipated power Temperature derating References: pages 2/16 to 2/17 BMX DDO 3202K BMX DDO 6402K 32 64 One 40-pin connector Two 40-pin connectors Voltage Current Logic At state 0 At state 1 Insulation resistance Dielectric strength BMX DDO 1602 BMX DDO 1612 16 Spring or screw-type 20-pin removable terminal block 24 c 0.5 Positive (source) Negative (sink) Yes, with current limiter and electronic circuit breaker 0.125 A < Id < 0.185 A > 18 < 14 > 10 at 500 V c 1,500 a - 50/60 Hz for 1 minute – 500 c 409,413 – See power consumption table page 6/8 360,412 4 None 3.6 2.26 173,792 6.85 See “Current per module” above (1) All outputs are equipped with a fast demagnetization circuit for the electromagnets. Discharge time for the electromagnets < L/R. (2) Excluding load current. 0 Modicon® M340™ Automation Platform Characteristics (continued) 0 Discrete I/O modules Characteristics of relay output modules Module Number of inputs Connection Limit operating voltages Thermal current Switching load Electrical life AC load DC AC V V BMX DRA 0805 BMX DRA 1605 8 16 Spring or screw-type 20-pin removable terminal block 10...34 c 24...125 c (resistive load) 10...264 a 200...264 a (Cos ϕ = 1) A mA 3 1 at 5 V c 2 Minimum VA – – 24 V – VA – – W – 24 (1), 7.2 (2) 24 V Power cos ϕ = 0.7 Power cos ϕ = 0.35 Power DC load Voltage AC load DC load Resistive loads AC-12 Inductive loads AC-15 (cos ϕ = 0.3) Inductive loads AC-14 (cos ϕ = 0.7) Resistive loads DC-12 Inductive loads DC-13 (14) Response time Built-in protection 48 V 50 (4), 110 (5) 10 (6), 24 (7) Power VA 50 (3) Power VA 24 (5) Power VA – Power W Power W Activation Deactivation ms ms 24 (4), 40 (13) 10 (7), 24 (4) < 10 <8 Against overloads and short-circuits Against AC inductive overvoltages MΩ Vrms At T ambient = 30 °C Typical Dissipated power Temperature derating 110... 120 V 110 (4), 220 (5) 10 (8), 50 (9), 110 (10) 200... 240 V 220 (4) 10 (8), 50 (11), 110 (4), 220 (12) 240 V 240 (1), 72 (2) 120 (1), 36 (2) – 200 V 240 V 200 (1), 60 (2) 120 (1), 36 (2) 300 (1), 80 (2) 240 (1), 72 (2) 2 – – – – 24 (1), 7.2 (2) – < 12 None. Use a fast-blow fuse per channel or group of channels None. Use an RC circuit or ZNO surge limiter appropriate to the voltage in parallel on each output None. Use a discharge diode on each output Against DC inductive overvoltages Insulation resistance Dielectric strength Reliability MTBF in hours Consumption 24 V 200 V 300 (1), 80 (2) 200 (1), 60 (2) – mA W > 10 at 500 V c 2,000 - 50/60 Hz for 1 minute 1,573,341 See power consumption table page 6/8 2.7 max. None 2,463,296 3 (1) For 1 x 10 5 operating cycles (2) For 3 x 10 5 operating cycles (3) For 0.7 x 10 6 operating cycles (4) For 1 x 10 6 operating cycles (5) For 0.5 x 10 6 operating cycles (6) For 5 x 10 6 operating cycles (7) For 2 x 10 6 operating cycles (8) For 10 x 10 6 operating cycles (9) For 1.5 x 10 6 operating cycles (10)For 0.15 x 10 6 operating cycles (11)For 3 x 10 6 operating cycles (12)For 0.1 x 106 operating cycles (13)For 0.3 x 106 operating cycles (14)Where L/R = 60 ms for BMX DRA 0805 module, L/R = 7 ms for BMX DRA 1605 module References: pages 2/16 to 2/17 Connections: pages 2/18 to 2/21 2/13 Modicon® M340™ Automation Platform Characteristics (continued) 0 Discrete I/O modules Characteristics of mixed I/O relay module Module Number of inputs/outputs Connection Nominal values Inputs Outputs 2 Input limit values Voltage Current DC voltage Direct current AC voltage Alternating current At state 1 Voltage Current At state 0 Voltage Current Sensor power supply (including ripple) Relay output voltage AC load Inductive loads Power AC-14 (cos ϕ = 0.7) Inductive loads Power AC-15 (cos ϕ = 0.35) DC load Inductive loads Power DC-13 Maximum switching frequency Input impedance at nominal voltage Input response time Typical Maximum V mA V A V A V mA V mA V ≥ 11 ≥ 2 (for U ≥ 11) 5 ≤ 1.5 19…30 (possible up to 30 V, limited to 1 hour in every 24 hours) VA – 24 V – 200 V 300 (1), 80 (2) 240 V 240 (1), 72 (2) VA – – 200 (1), 60 (2) 120 (1), 36 (2) W – KΩ ms ms – 6.8 4 7 24 (1), – 7.2 (2) 3,600 cycles/hour – – – Protected Yes, type 3 IEC 947-5-2 No Current sink – – – – – – – – – – ≤ 12 ≤ 10 5 V c/1 mA 264 a/125 c ≥ 20 million Use one 0.5 A fast-blow fuse per group of channels No (use one fast-blow fuse per channel or group of channels) > 18 < 14 > 10 at 500 V c 1,500 - 50/60 Hz for 1 minute 500 c – 912,167 See power consumption table page 6/8 – – Reverse polarity on inputs IEC 1131-2 conformity Compatibility with 2-wire/3-wire sensors Paralleling of inputs Input type Output response time Switching load Mechanical durability Activation Deactivation Minimum Maximum No. of switching operations ms ms V Fuse protection Sensor voltage control thresholds OK Fault Insulation resistance Dielectric Primary/secondary strength Between groups of I/O Max. voltage Reliability MTBF in hours At Tambient = 30 °C Consumption Typical V V MΩ Vrms V Vrms Dissipated power Temperature derating W References: pages 2/16 to 2/17 2/14 Connections: pages 2/18 to 2/21 BMX DDM 16025 24 V c inputs 24 V c or 24...240 V a relay outputs 8 8 Spring or screw-type 20-pin removable terminal block 24 c (positive logic) – 3.5 – – 24 c – 2 (resistive load) – 220 a, Cos ϕ = 1 – 2 mA 3.1 maximum None (1) For 1 x 105 operating cycles (2) For 3 x 105 operating cycles (3) Excluding load current – – – – – – – 2,830 a/cycle – Modicon® M340™ Automation Platform Characteristics (continued) 0 Discrete I/O modules Characteristics of 24 V c mixed I/O modules Module Tungsten filament lamp power Input limit At state 1 values W V mA V mA V BMX DDM 16022 Inputs Solid state outputs 8 8 Spring or screw-type 20-pin removable terminal block 24 c 3.5 500 Positive (sink) Positive (source) – 6 maximum ≥ 11 – > 3 (for U ≥ 11 V) – 5 – ≤ 1.5 – 19…30 – Output limit values V – 19…30 – 19…30 mA A – – 625 5 – – 125 3.2 Input impedance at nominal voltage Input response time Typical Maximum Reverse polarity on inputs IEC 1131-2 conformity Compatibility with 2-wire/3-wire sensors Input type KΩ ms ms 6.8 4 7 Protected Yes, type 3 IEC 947-5-2 Current sink – – – – – – – 9.6 4 7 Protected Yes, type 3 IEC 947-5-2 Current sink – – – – – – – Leakage current At state 0 Residual voltage At state 1 Minimum load impedance Output response time (1) Max. overload time before fault state Compatibility with IEC 1131-2 DC inputs Paralleling of outputs Switching frequency on inductive load Built-in protection Against overvoltages Against inversions mA V Ω ms ms – – – – – – – – – < 0.5 < 1.2 48 1.2 15 Yes (type 3, not IEC) Yes (2 maximum) 0.5/LI2 Yes, by Transil® diode – – – – – – – – – 0.1 < 1.5 (for I=0.1 A) 220 1.2 15 Yes (type 3, not IEC) Yes (3 maximum) 0.5/LI2 Yes, by Transil® diode – Yes, by reverse-mounted diode. Use a 2 A fuse on the preactuator + 24 V Yes, by current limiter and electronic circuit breaker 1.5 ln< Id < 2 ln – Yes, by reverse-mounted diode. Use a 2 A fuse on the preactuator + 24 V Yes, by current limiter and electronic circuit breaker 0.125 A < Id < 0.185 A Number of inputs/outputs Connection Nominal values Voltage Current Logic Voltage Current At state 0 Voltage Current Possible up to Sensor power supply (including 30 V, limited to 1 hour in every 24 ripple) hours Voltage (including Possible up to ripple) 30 V, limited to 1 hour in every 24 hours Currents Per channel Per module V mA Hz Against short-circuits and overloads Sensor and preactuator voltage control thresholds OK Fault Insulation resistance Dielectric Primary/secondary strength Between groups of inputs and outputs Outputs/ground or outputs/internal logic Reliability MTBF in hours At T ambient = 30 °C Consumption 3.3 V c Typical Maximum 24 V c Typical preactuators (2) Maximum Maximum dissipated power Temperature derating References: pages 2/16 to 2/17 Use one 0.5 A fast-blow fuse per group of channels V MΩ Vrms V mA mA mA mA W BMX DDM 3202K Inputs Solid state outputs 16 16 One 40-pin connector 2.5 Positive (sink) – ≥ 11 ≥ 2 (for U ≥ 11) 5 ≤ 1.5 19…30 100 Positive (source) 1.2 maximum – – – – – Use one 0.5 A fast-blow fuse per group of channels > 18 < 14 > 10 at 500 V c 1,500 - 50/60 Hz for 1 minute 500 c – 1,500 - 50/60 Hz for 1 – 1,500 - 50/60 Hz for 1 minute minute 447,581 432,904 79 125 111 166 59 69 67 104 3.7 4 None (1) All outputs are equipped with a fast demagnetization circuit for the electromagnets. Discharge time for the electromagnets < L/R. (2) Excluding load current. Connections: pages 2/18 to 2/21 2/15 2 Modicon® M340™ Automation Platform References 0 Discrete I/O modules References Discrete input modules Type of current c Input voltage Connection by (1) IEC 1131-2 Modularity Reference conformity (no. of channels) Weight 24 V (positive logic) Screw or spring-type 20-pin removable terminal block One 40-pin connector Type 3 16 isolated inputs BMXDDI1602 kg 0.115 Type 3 32 isolated inputs BMXDDI3202K 0.112 Two 40-pin connectors Non-IEC 64 isolated inputs BMXDDI6402K 0.145 24 V (negative logic) Screw or spring-type 20-pin removable terminal block Non-IEC 16 isolated inputs BMXDAI1602 r 0.115 48 V (positive logic) Screw or spring-type 20-pin removable terminal block Type 1 16 isolated inputs BMXDDI1603 r 0.115 24 V Screw or spring-type 20-pin removable terminal block Screw or spring-type 20-pin removable terminal block Screw or spring-type 20-pin removable terminal block Type 1 16 isolated inputs BMXDAI1602 r 0.115 Type 3 16 isolated inputs BMXDAI1603 r 0.115 Type 3 16 isolated inputs BMXDAI1604 0.115 BMX DpI 160p 2 a 48 V 100...120 V BMX DDI 3202K BMX DDI 6402K Discrete output modules Type of current Output voltage Connection by (1) BMX DDO 3202K Characteristics: pages 2/11 to 2/15 2/16 Weight Yes 16 protected outputs BMXDDO1602 kg 0.120 24 V/0.5 A Screw or spring-type 20-pin (negative logic) removable terminal block Non-IEC 16 protected outputs BMXDDO1612 r 0.120 24 V/0.1 A (positive logic) One 40-pin connector Yes BMXDDO3202K 0.110 Two 40-pin connectors Yes BMXDDO6402K 0.150 Screw or spring-type 20-pin removable terminal block – 32 protected outputs 64 protected outputs 16 outputs BMXDAO1605 r 0.140 c 24 V/0.5 A solid state (positive logic) BMX DDO 16p2 IEC 1131-2 Modularity Reference conformity (no. of channels) BMX DRA 0805/1605 Screw or spring-type 20-pin removable terminal block a triac 100...240 c or a relay 12...24 V c/3 A, Screw or spring-type 20-pin 24...240 Va/3 A removable terminal block Yes 8 non-protected outputs BMXDRA0805 0.145 24 V c/2 A, 240 V a/2 A Yes 16 non-protected outputs BMXDRA1605 0.150 Screw or spring-type 20-pin removable terminal block (1) By connector, module supplied with cover(s) r Available 4th quarter 2007 BMX DDO 6402K Connections: pages 2/6o 2/9 Modicon® M340™ Automation Platform References (continued) 0 Discrete I/O modules References (continued) Discrete mixed I/O modules Number of I/O 16 32 BMX DDM 160p2 Connection via (1) Screw or spring-type 20-pin removable terminal block One 40-pin connector No. and type of inputs 8 (positive logic) 16 (positive logic) No. and type of outputs 8, solid state 24 V c / 0,5 A 8, relay 24 V c or 24...240 V a 16, solid state 24 V c / 0,1 A IEC 1131 2 conformity Inputs, type 3 Reference BMXDDM16022 Weight kg 0.115 Inputs, type 3 BMXDDM16025 0.135 Inputs, type 3 BMXDDM3202K 0.110 BMX DDM 3202K 2 Removable connection blocks Description 20-pin Cage clamp removable Screw clamp terminal Spring-type blocks Use Reference For module with 20-pin removable terminal block For module with 20-pin removable terminal block For module with 20-pin removable terminal block BMXFTB2000 BMXFTB2010 BMXFTB2020 Weight kg 0.093 0.075 0.060 Preformed cord sets for I/O modules with removable terminal block Description BMX FTB 20p0 Preformed cordsets with one end with wires Composition Length Reference One 20-pin terminal block One end with color-coded wires 3m 5m 10 m BMXFTW301 BMXFTW501 BMXFTW1001 Weight kg 0.850 1.400 2.780 Preformed cordsets for I/O modules with 40-pin connectors Description BMX FTW p01 BMX FCW p01 CrossLength section 0.324 mm2 3 m 5m 10 m BMXFCW301 BMXFCW501 BMXFCW1001 Weight kg 0.820 1.370 2.770 2 x 20 One 40-pin connector wires (32 Two ends with channels) color-coded wires 0.324 mm2 3 m 5m 10 m BMXFCW303 BMXFCW503 BMXFCW1003 0.900 1.490 2.960 Preformed cord sets for One 40-pin connector 1 x 20 Telefast ® Advantys™ ABE7 wires (16 One HE 10 connector channels) sub-bases 0.324 mm2 0.5 m 1m 2m 3m 5m 10 m BMXFCC051 BMXFCC101 BMXFCC201 BMXFCC301 BMXFCC501 BMXFCC1001 0.140 0.195 0.560 0.840 1.390 2.780 0.324 mm2 0.5 m 1m 2m 3m 5m 10 m BMXFCC053 BMXFCC103 BMXFCC203 BMXFCC303 BMXFCC503 BMXFCC1003 0.210 0.350 0.630 0.940 1.530 3.000 Preformed cord sets with one end with wires No. of sheaths 1 x 20 wires (16 channels) Composition One 40-pin connector One end with color-coded wires BMX FCW p03 2 x 20 One 40-pin connector wires (32 Two HE 10 connectors channels) BMX FCC p01 Characteristics: pages 2/11 to 2/15 Reference Connections: pages 2/6 to 2/9 2/17 Connections Modicon® M340™ Automation Platform Discrete I/O modules Input modules BMX DDI 1602 BMX DDI 3202K/6402K B Chnl 2 Sensors Chnl 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 Fu 47 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 15 + + 24 V – 17 18 – 19 20 BMX DDI 1603 Fu Chnl A Chnl 20 20 19 19 18 18 17 17 16 16 15 15 14 14 13 13 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Fu 15 11 + 11 - - 16 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 Sensors 1 9 9 8 8 7 7 6 6 5 5 4 4 3 3 2 + 2 - + 1 + 1 - 2 - B A 20 20 19 19 18 18 17 17 16 16 15 15 14 14 13 13 12 + 12 - 24 V 10 24 V Sensors - 10 + 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 A B 12 + 12 - + + 14 Fu + 24 V c – Sensors 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 Fu 31 11 + 11 10 24 V - 10 9 9 8 8 7 7 6 6 5 5 4 4 3 3 2 + 2 - 1 + 1 - 3 4 5 6 7 8 BMX DDI 3202K: Connector A (inputs I0...I32) BMX DDI 6402K: Connector A (inputs I0...I32) and connector B (inputs I33...I63) For correspondence of the 40-pin connector pins with the wire colors of BMX FCW p01/p03 prewired cord sets, in accordance with DIN 47100, see table on page 2/21 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 + Fu + 48 V c – + – 17 18 – 19 20 BMX DAI 1602/1603/1604 Chnl Chnl Sensors 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 BMX DAI 1602, use in 24 V c, negative logic 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Sensors 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 – 18 P Fu 19 20 N P-N voltage: 24 V a: BMX DAI 1602 48 V a: BMX DAI 1603 100/120 V a: BMX DAI 1604 Fu: 0.5 A fast-blow fuse 2/18 – – 24 V c + Fu + 17 + 19 18 20 0 Connections (continued) Modicon® M340™ Automation Platform 0 Discrete I/O modules Output modules BMX DDO 1602 BMX DDO 3202K/6402K B Chnl Preactuators Chnl Preactuators 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 + + + c 24 V - 17 - 19 20 - BMX DDO 1612 Chnl Preactuators 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 20 20 19 19 18 18 17 17 16 16 15 15 14 14 13 13 10 10 9 9 8 8 7 7 6 6 5 5 4 4 3 3 2 + 2 - 1 + 1 - + c 24 V - 1 2 Chnl Preactuators 11 + 11 - 48 48 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 18 A 12 + 12 - + c 24 V - 15 16 A B 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 B A 20 20 19 19 18 18 17 17 16 16 15 15 14 14 13 13 2 12 + 12 - + c 24 V - 11 + 11 - 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 10 + c 24 V - 10 9 9 8 8 7 7 6 6 5 5 4 4 3 3 2 + 2 - 1 + 1 - 3 BMX DDO 3202K: Connector A (outputs Q0...Q32) BMX DDO 6402K: Connector A (outputs Q0...Q32) and connector B (outputs Q33...Q63) 4 5 6 Nota : For correspondence of the 40-pin connector pins with the wire colors of BMX FCW p01/p03 prewired cord sets, in accordance with DIN 47100, see table on page 2/21. 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 + - 17 + - 18 + c 24 V 19 20 - BMX DAO 1605 BMX DRA 0805 BMX DRA 1605 Preactuators Preactuators 0 1 2 3 a 120/240 V 4 5 6 7 a 120/240 V 8 9 10 11 Channel 1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 a 120/240 V 14 12 13 14 15 a 120/240 V 16 Description: pages 2/6 and 2/7 a 2 12…24 V c/24 V…240 V a Chnl Preactuators Channel a a 0 1 2 1 3 4 2 5 6 a 3 7 8 a 4 4 5 6 7 6 a 12/24 V 11 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 10 a 5 6 13 7 15 16 17 17 18 18 19 19 20 20 1 3 4 5 7 8 9 10 12 a a Characteristics: pages 2/10 to 2/15 2 9 14 15 0 1 2 3 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 a 12/24 V 19 20 References: pages 2/16 and 2/17 2/19 Connections (continued) Modicon® M340™ Automation Platform 0 Discrete I/O modules Mixed I/O modules BMX DDM 16025 Chnl - BMX DDM 16022 Chnl Sensors 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 c 24 V 2 +0 10 Fu 11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 14 15 16 17 18 20 BMX DDM 3202K A Chnl Sensors 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 + c 24 V - B A 20 20 19 19 18 18 17 17 16 16 15 15 14 14 13 13 12 + 12 - Fu 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 + c 24 V - 11 + 11 10 9 8 8 7 7 6 6 5 5 4 4 3 3 2 + 2 - 1 + 1 - Fu: 0.5 A fast-blow fuse 2/20 10 9 Preactuators References: pages 2/16 and 2/17 - 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Fu 11 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 c 24 V + Preactuators Characterist1ics: pages 2/10 to 2/15 + 13 19 1 2 c 24 V 12 c 24 V/a 24…240 V Description: pages 2/6 and 2/7 - Sensors 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 20 Preactuators Connections (continued) Modicon® M340™ Automation Platform 0 Discrete I/O modules Cord set color codes in accordance with DIN 47100 Connection cables with 40-pin connector and end(s) with wires BMX FCW p01/p03 Correspondence of connector pins with the wire colors at the sheath end 20 wires A 20 wires B B A Cord set with one sheathed end with wires BMX FCW p01 20 wires Cord set with two sheathed ends with wires BMX FCW p03 Connector pin no. B20 A20 B19 A19 B18 A18 B17 A17 B16 A16 B15 A15 B14 A14 B13 A13 B12 A12 B11 A11 B10 A10 B9 A9 B8 A8 B7 A7 B6 A6 B5 A5 B4 A4 B3 A3 B2 A2 B1 A1 Color at sheath end White Brown Green Yellow Gray Pink Blue Red Black Purple Gray/pink Red/blue White/green Brown/green White/yellow Yellow/brown White/gray Gray/brown White/pink Pink/brown White Brown Green Yellow Gray Pink Blue Red Black Purple Gray/pink Red/blue White/green Brown/green White/yellow Yellow/brown White/gray Gray/brown White/pink Pink/brown 32/64-channel inputs Input 0/32 Input 1/33 Input 2/34 Input 3/35 Input 4/36 Input 5/37 Input 6/38 Input 7/39 Input 8/40 Input 9/41 Input 10/42 Input 11/43 Input 12/44 Input 13/45 Input 14/46 Input 15/47 + 24 V - 24 V + 24 V - 24 V Input 16/48 Input 17/49 Input 18/50 Input 19/51 Input 20/52 Input 21/53 Input 22/54 Input 23/55 Input 24/56 Input 25/57 Input 26/58 Input 27/59 Input 28/60 Input 29/61 Input 30/62 Input 31/63 + 24 V - 24 V + 24 V - 24 V 32/64-channel outputs Output 0/32 Output 1/33 Output 2/34 Output 3/35 Output 4/36 Output 5/37 Output 6/38 Output 7/39 Output 8/40 Output 9/41 Output 10/42 Output 11/43 Output 12/44 Output 13/45 Output 14/46 Output 15/47 + 24 V - 24 V + 24 V - 24 V Output 16/48 Output 17/49 Output 18/50 Output 19/51 Output 20/52 Output 21/53 Output 22/54 Output 23/55 Output 24/56 Output 25/57 Output 26/58 Output 27/59 Output 28/60 Output 29/61 Output 30/62 Output 31/63 + 24 V - 24 V + 24 V - 24 V 32-channel I/O Input 0 Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 Input 4 Input 5 Input 6 Input 7 Input 8 Input 9 Input 10 Input 11 Input 12 Input 13 Input 14 Input 15 + 24 V - 24 V + 24 V - 24 V Output 0 Output 1 Output 2 Output 3 Output 4 Output 5 Output 6 Output 7 Output 8 Output 9 Output 10 Output 11 Output 12 Output 13 Output 14 Output 15 + 24 V - 24 V + 24 V - 24 V 2 Connection cables with 20-pin terminal block at one end and wires at the other BMX FTW p01 Correspondence of 20-pin removable terminal block pins with the wire colors (at sheath end) Correspondence of terminal block pins with the wire colors at the Terminal Color at sheath 16-channel sheath end block pin no. end inputs 1 White Input 0 2 Brown Input 1 3 Green Input 2 4 Yellow Input 3 5 Gray Input 4 6 Pink Input 5 7 Blue Input 6 8 Red Input 7 9 Black Input 8 20 wires Cord set with 1 sheathed end with wires BMX FTW p01 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Purple Gray/pink Red/blue White/green Brown/green White/yellow Yellow/brown White/gray Gray/brown White/pink Pink/brown Input 9 Input 10 Input 11 Input 12 Input 13 Input 14 Input 15 Power supply + common pwr sup. Power supply Power supply 8- or 16-channel outputs See page 2/19 See page 2/19 See page 2/19 See page 2/19 See page 2/19 See page 2/19 See page 2/19 See page 2/19 See page 2/19 See page 2/19 See page 2/19 See page 2/19 See page 2/19 See page 2/19 See page 2/19 See page 2/19 See page 2/19 See page 2/19 See page 2/19 See page 2/19 16-channel I/O Input 0 Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 Input 4 Input 5 Input 6 Input 7 Sensor + common power supply Sensor pwr supply Output 0 Output 1 Output 2 Output 3 Output 4 Output 5 Output 6 Output 7 Preactuator pwr sup. Preactuator pwr sup. 2/21 Selection guide Modicon® M340™ Automation Platform Analog I/O modules Applications Analog inputs Type of I/O Isolated low-level voltage inputs, resistors, thermocouples and temperature probes Type Multi-range 2 Range Voltage ± 40 mV, ± 80 mV, ± 160 mV, ± 320 mV, ± 640 mV and ± 1.28 V Current – Thermocouple, Temperature probe, Resistor Modularity Thermocouples type B, E, J, K, L, N, R, S, T, U Temperature probes type Pt 100, Pt 1000, Ni 100, Ni 1000 and Cu 10, 2-,3- or 4-wire Resistors 2-, 3- or 4-wire, 400 Ω or 4,000 Ω 4 channels 8 channels Acquisition period 400 ms for all 4 channels Conversion time – Resolution 16 bits Isolation Between channels: 750 V c Between channels and bus: 2,000 V c Between channels and ground: 750 V c Connection 400 ms for all 8 channels Directly to the module Via 40-pin connector Via two 40-pin connectors Via preformed cord sets BMX FCW p01S cord sets with one end with color-coded wires (3 or 5 m long) BMX ART 0814 r Module BMX ART 0414 Page 2/32 Compatibility with Advantys™ Telefast® ABE7 pre-wired I/O system Sub-base with 4 channels for direct connection of 4 thermocouples plus connection and provision of cold-junction compensation Type of module Connection sub-base ABE7CPA412 Preformed cord sets (1.5, 3 or 5 m long) BMX FCApp2 Pages 5/16 and 2/32 r Available 4th quarter 2007 2/22 0 0 Analog inputs Analog outputs Mixed analog I/O 2 Isolated high-level inputs Isolated high-level outputs Non-isolated high-level inputs Voltage/current Non-isolated high-level outputs Voltage/current Voltage/current ± 10 V, 0...10 V, 0...5 V, 1...5 V, ± 5 V ± 10 V 0...20 mA, 4...20 mA, ± 20 mA 0...20 mA, 4...20 mA ± 10 V, 0...10 V, 0...5 V, ± 10 V 1...5 V 0...20 mA, 4...20 mA 0...20 mA, 4...20 mA – – – – 4 channels 2 channels 4 channels 2 channels Fast: 1 + (1 x no. of declared channels) ms By default, 5 ms for all 4 channels – – y 1 ms Fast: 1 + (1 x no. of – declared channels) ms By default, 5 ms for all 4 channels – y 2 ms 16 bits 16 bits Between channels: 300 V c Between channels and bus: 2,000 V c Between channels and ground: 2,000 V c Between channels: 1,400 V c Between channels and bus: 2,000 V c Between channels and ground: 2,000 V c 12 bits in 10 V range 12 bits 10 bits in 20 mA range Between group of input channels and group of output channels: 1,400 V c Between channels and bus: 2,000 V c Between channels and ground: 2,000 V c Via 20-pin removable terminals (screw or spring-type) BMX FTW p01S cord sets with one end with color-coded wires (3 or 5 m long) BMX AMI 0410 BMX AMO 0210 BMX AMM 0600 r 2/32 4-channel sub-base for direct connection of 4 inputs, delivers and distributes 4 protected isolated power supplies – ABE7CPA410 BMX FCApp0 5/16 and 2/32 – 2/23 Modicon® M340™ Automation Platform Presentation, description Analog I/O modules Presentation The analog I/O module offer consists of: b Three isolated analog input modules: v 4 analog high-speed channels (16 bits), voltage or current, BMX AMI 0410 v 4 and 8 analog channels (15 bits + sign) for thermocouples, Pt, Ni or Cu temperature probes, BMX ART 0414/0814 b One analog output module with 2 voltage/current channels, BMX AMO 0210 b One mixed module (12 bits) with 4 analog input channels and 2 analog output channels, non-isolated, voltage or current, BMX AMM 0600 Analog I/O modules are equipped with a connector for a 20-pin removable terminal block, except for BMX ART 0414/0814 analog input modules with thermocouples/temperature probes, which are equipped with a 40-pin connector. 2 All analog modules occupy a single slot in the BMX XBP ppp racks. These modules can be installed in any slot in the rack, except the first two (PS and 00) reserved for the power supply module in the BMX CPS pp0 rack, and the BMX P34 pp0 processor module respectively. The power supply for the analog functions is supplied by the backplane bus (3.3 V and 24 V). Analog I/O modules are hot-swappable (see page 2/8). In a Modicon M340 single-rack configuration, the maximum number of analog channels is limited by the number of slots available in the rack (11 slots maximum). Description BMX AMp/ART analog I/O modules are standard format (1 slot). Their case ensures IP 20 protection of the electronics, and they are locked into position by a captive screw. 1 I/O modules connected via 20-pin removable terminal block 2 BMX AMp analog I/O modules have the following on the front panel: 1 A rigid body providing support and protection for the electronic card 2 A module reference marking (a label is also visible on the right-hand side of the module). 3 A module and channel status display block 4 A connector taking the 20-pin removable terminal block, for connecting sensors or preactuators on screw or spring-type terminals 3 4 To be ordered separately: 5 A BMX FTB 20p0 20-pin removable terminal block, or preformed cord sets with 20-pin terminal block at one end and wires at the other (BMX FTW p01S or, with 25-pin SUB-D connector, BMX FCA pp0) for direct connection to Advantys™ Telefast® ABE7 sub-bases (see page 2/30). 5 1 I/O modules connected via 40-pin connector 2 BMX ART 0p14 analog input modules have the following on the front panel: 1 A rigid body providing support and protection for the electronic card 2 A module reference marking (a label is also visible on the right-hand side of the module) 3 A module and channel status display block 4 A 40-pin connector for connecting the sensors 3 4 2/24 5 To be ordered separately: 5 Preformed cord sets with a 40-pin connector at one end and wires at the other (BMX FCW p01S or, with 25-pin SUB-D connector, BMX FCA pp2) for direct connection to Advantys™ Telefast® ABE7 sub-bases (see page 2/31). To be ordered separately regardless of the type of module: b A shielding connection kit to protect against electrostatic discharge, consisting of a metal bar and two sub-bases for mounting on the rack supporting the analog modules b A set of STB XSP 3020 clamping rings for the shielding braids of analog signal cables. 0 Modicon® M340™ Automation Platform Connections 0 Analog I/O modules Connecting modules with removable terminal blocks BMX AMI 0410/AMO 0210/AMM 0600 modules with 20-pin terminal block These 20-pin removable terminal blocks are the same as those used for discrete I/O modules (screw clamp, cage clamp or spring-type). See page 2/7. One version of the removable terminal block is equipped with a 3 or 5 m long cord set with color-coded wires (BMX FTWppS). These preformed cord sets, with reinforced shielding have, at the other end 1, color-coded wires conforming to standard DIN 47100. 2 Connecting modules with 40-pin connectors BMX ART 0p14 modules with 40-pin connectors BMX FTW p01S cord set (with 20-pin removable terminal block at one end and wires at the other) BMX FCW p01S cord set (with 40-pin connector at one end and wires at the other) 1 2 Two types of cord set are available: b Preformed cord sets with reinforced shielding (BMX FCW p01S) have, at the other end 2, color-coded wires conforming to standard DIN 47100. They are available in 3 or 5 m lengths, and provide easy direct wire-to-wire connection of the analog sensors via terminal blocks. b Preformed cord sets with reinforced shielding (BMX FCA p02) which have at the other end 3, a 25-pin SUB-D connector. They are available in 1.5, 3 or 5 m lengths, and provide direct connection to the Advantys™ Telefast® ABE7CPA412 sub-base (see below). Use with Advantys™ Telefast® ABE7 sub-bases Using the Advantys Telefast ABE7 pre-wired I/O system makes it easier to install the modules since the inputs (or outputs) can be accessed using screw terminals. Two special sub-bases are available: Advantys™ Telefast® ABE7CPA410 sub-base BMX FCA pp2 cord sets BMX ART 0414 4-channel module 3 ABE7CPA412 sub-base The Advantys Telefast ABE7CPA410 sub-base is mainly used in conjunction with the BMX AMI 0410 voltage/current analog 4-input module. It is used to: b Connect the four sensors directly b Remotely locate the input terminals in voltage mode b Power the 4...20 mA conditioners one channel at a time with 24 V voltage-protection, and circuit-limiting to 25 mA, while maintaining isolation between channels b Protect the current impedance matching resistors integrated in the sub-base against overvoltages Connection is via the BMX FCA pp0 cord set (1.5, 3 or 5 m long). Advantys™ Telefast® ABE7CPA412 sub-base The Advantys Telefast ABE7CPA412 sub-base is specially designed as a wiring interface for the BMX ART 0414 and BMX ART 0814 thermocouple modules. It is used to: b Connect the four thermocouple probes b Provide external cold-junction compensation with a temperature probe integrated in the sub-base b Ensure continuity of the shielding The BMX ART 0814 module requires two Advantys Telefast ABE7CPA412 sub-bases. The connection with each sub-base is made via a BMX FCA pp2 cord set (1.5, 3 or 5 m long). Functions: pages 2/26 and 2/27 Characteristics: pages 2/28 to 2/30 References: page 42/31 2/25 Functions Modicon® M340™ Automation Platform Analog I/O modules BMX AMI 0410 analog input modules The BMX AMI 0410 module is a high-level analog input module with 4 isolated inputs (16 bits). Used with sensors or transmitters, it performs monitoring, measurement and process control functions for continuous processes. For each input, the BMX AMI 0410 module offers the following ranges: v Voltage ± 10 V, ± 5 V, 0…10 V, 0…5 V and 1…5 V v Current 0...20 mA, 4…20 mA and ± 20 mA, depending on the choice made during configuration The module operates with voltage inputs. It includes four reading resistors connected to the terminal block to form the current inputs. 2 Functions The BMX AMI 0410 module includes the following functions: b Adaptation and multiplexing: v Physical connection to the process v Protection of the module against overvoltages v Protection of the current reading resistors v Adaptation of input signals by analog filtering v Scanning of input channels by solid state multiplexing, by optical commutator switches b Adaptation to input signals: Gain selection, drift compensation b Conversion: 24-bit analog/digital converter b Conversion of input measurements to a unit that is suitable for the user: v Taking account of the alignment coefficients to be applied to measurements, as well as the module auto calibration coefficients v Measurement filtering, depending on the configuration parameters v Measurement scaling, depending on the configuration parameters b Interface and communication with the application: v Receipt of the configuration parameters for the module and its channels v Transmission of measured values to the application, as well as module status b Module power supply b Module monitoring and indication of any faults to the application: v Conversion circuit test v Channel range overshoot test and watchdog test. BMX ART 0414/0814 analog input modules BMX ART 0414/0814 modules are multi range input modules with 4 or 8 low-level isolated inputs (15 bits + sign) respectively. Depending on the choice made during configuration, the modules offer, for each of the inputs, the following range: b Temperature probe: Pt100, Pt1000, Cu10, Ni100 or Ni1000, with open-circuit detection b Thermocouple: B, E, J, K, L, N, R, S, T or U, with broken wire detection b Resistor: 0...400 or 0...4000 Ω, 2-, 3- or 4-wire b Voltage: ± 40 mV, ± 80 mV, ± 160 mV, ± 320 mV, ± 640 mV, ± 1.28 V. Functions BMX ART 0414/0814 modules offer the following functions b Adaptation and current source per channel: v Accepting an overload of ± 7.5 V v Auto calibration of the analog module offset as close as possible to the input terminal v Selection of the cold-junction compensation sensor included in the Advantys™ Telefast® ABE7CPA412 sub-base or externally by the Pt 100 probe b Adaptation to input signals: Based on a low offset amplifier internal to the A/D converter b Conversion: 16-bit converter b Conversion of input measurements to a unit that is suitable for the user: v Taking account of the alignment coefficients to be applied to measurements, as well as the module auto calibration coefficients v Measurement filtering, depending on the configuration parameters v Measurement scaling, depending on the configuration parameters b Interface and communication with the application: v Receipt of the configuration parameters for the module and its channels v Transmission of measured values to the application, as well as module status b Module monitoring and indication of any faults to the application: v Conversion circuit test v Channel range overshoot test and watchdog test. 2/26 0 Functions (continued) Modicon® M340™ Automation Platform 0 Analog I/O modules BMX AMO 0210 analog output module The BMX AMO 0210 module has 2 high-level isolated outputs (15 bits + sign). For each of them it offers the ranges: v Voltage: ± 10 V v Current: 0...20 mA and 4...20 mA The range is selected during configuration. Functions The BMX AMO 210 module includes the following functions: b Physical connection to the processor b Protection of the module against overvoltages b Adaptation of the output signals: v Voltage or current adaptation by software configuration v Protection of the outputs against short-circuits and overloads b Conversion to 15 bits + sign with redefinition of data b Conversion of application values into data that can be used by the digital/analog converter: v Use of factory calibration parameters b Interface and communication with the application: v Managing exchanges with the processor v Geographical addressing v Receipt of the configuration parameters for the module and its channels v Transmission of module status to the application b Module monitoring and indication of any faults to the application: v Output power supply test v Channel range overshoot test v Output fault presence test v Watchdog test. BMX AMM 0600 mixed analog I/O module The BMX AMM 0600 mixed module is a module with 4 inputs 14/12 bits and 2 outputs 12 bits non-isolated between one another. For each of them it offers the ranges: v Voltage: ± 10 V, 0...10 V, 0...5 V and 1...5 V v Current: 0...20 mA and 4...20 mA. Functions The BMX AMM 0600 module has the following functions: b Protection of the module against overvoltages b Adaptation to the different actuators: voltage or current output b Conversion of digital signals (10 bits or 12 bits depending on the range) to analog signals b Conversion of application data into data that can be used by the digital/analog converter b Module monitoring and fault indication to the application: Converter test, range overshoot test, watchdog test. Description: page 2/26 Characteristics: pages 2/28 to 2/30 References: page 2/31 2/27 2 Characteristics Modicon® M340™ Automation Platform 0 Analog I/O modules Characteristics of BMX AMI 0410 analog input modules Input module Input type Number of channels Nature of inputs BMX AMI 0410 Isolated high-level inputs 4 Voltage ± 10 V, 0…10 V, 0…5 V, 1…5 V, ± 5 V 0...20 mA, 4…20 mA, ± 20 mA (via protected internal 250 Ω resistors) Current 2 Analog/digital conversion Voltage/current range 24 bits ± 10 V Maximum conversion value Resolution Input impedance Typical Permitted overload on Voltage range the inputs Current range ± 11.4 V 0.35 mV 10 (regardless of the input level) ± 30 c Voltage/current internal conversion resistor Precision of internal conversion resistor Filtering Read cycle time Measurement errors (1) Consumption Ω 0…5 V 0…10 V 1…5 V 0…20 4…20 mA mA ± 30 mA 0.92 μA – – 250 0.1% - 15 ppm/°C ms ms 1st order digital filtering 1 + 1 x no. of channels used (periodic reading of no. of declared channels) 5 for 4 channels (periodic reading of all channels) At 25 °C Maximum at 0…60 °C %FS %FS 0.075% 0.1% 0.15% (2) 0.3% (2) 30 ppm/°C dB 15 ppm/°C Internal 120 Between channels Between channels and bus Between channels and ground V V V Typical mA ± 20 mA ± 90 of short-circuit to + 24 V c Fast Default Temperature drift Recalibration Common mode between channels Digital value format Isolation MΩ V mA ±5V ± 10,000 by default, ± 32,000 in user scale ± 300 c 2,000 c 2,000 c See power consumption table page 6/8 Characteristics of BMX ART 0414/0814 analog input modules Input module Input type Number of channels Nature of inputs Analog/digital conversion Resolution Filtering Read cycle time Recalibration Isolation Consumption V V V mA v Using the dedicated Advan tys™ Telefast® ABE7CPA412 sub-base including the probe v Using a 2-wire temperature probe wired on channel 0 and/or 4 v Using a 3-wire temperature probe wired on channel 3 and/or 7 Internal 750 c 2,000 c 750 c See power consumption table page 6/8 mV ms Permitted overload on the inputs 50/60 Hz rejection Differential mode Typical Common mode Typical Cold junction compensation V dB dB BMX ART 0414 BMX ART 0814 Isolated inputs, low-level voltage, resistors, temperature probes, thermocouples 4 8 ± 40 mV; ± 80 mV; ± 160 mV; ± 320 mV; ± 640 mV; ± 1.28 V Σ Δ 16 bits 15 + sign 1st order digital filtering 400 with temperature probes (1...4) 400 with temperature probes (1...8) 200 with thermocouples (1...4) 200 with thermocouples (1...8) ± 7.5 c 60 120 External compensation by Pt100 probe Between channels Between channels and bus Between channels and ground Typical (1) %FS: Error as a% of full scale (2) Including the conversion resistor error Description: page 2/24 2/28 Functions: pages 2/26 and 2/27 References: page 2/31 Characteristics (continued) Modicon® M340™ Automation Platform 0 Analog I/O modules Characteristics of BMX ART 0414/0814 analog input modules Input ranges for BMX ART 0414/0814 modules Voltage range Typical input impedance Maximum conversion value Maximum resolution Measurement errors At 25 °C (1) Maximum at 0…60 °C Temperature drift MΩ mV %FS %FS ppm/° C Resistor range Type Maximum conversion value Maximum resolution Measurement errors At 25 °C (1) Maximum at 0…60 °C Temperature drift mV %FS %FS ppm/° C Temperature probe ranges Measurement range °C Resolution Detection type Measurement errors At 25 °C (2) (1) Maximum at 0…60 °C °C Max. wiring resistance Ω Ω 4-wire 2/3-wire °C °C Temperature drift Thermocouple ranges Measurement range Resolution Detection type Measurement errors At 25 °C (1) Maximum at 0…60 °C °C °C ppm/° C Temperature drift Thermocouple ranges (continued) Measurement range Resolution Detection type Measurement errors At 25 °C (1) Maximum at 0…60 °C Temperature drift Description: page 2/24 °C °C °C °C °C °C ± 40 mV 10 ± 102.5% 40/214 0.05 0.15 ± 80 mV ± 160 mV ± 320 mV ± 640 mV ± 1.28 V 80/214 160/214 320/214 640/2 14 1280/2 14 30 400 Ω 2-, 3- or 4-wire ± 100% 400/214 0.12 0.2 4,000 Ω 2 4,000/214 25 Pt100 Pt1000 Cu10 According to IEC: -200...+850 -100...+260 According to US/JIS: -100...+450 0.1 Open circuit (detection on each channel) ± 2.1 ±4 ±2 ±4 50 20 30 ppm/°C 500 200 Ni100 -60...+180 Ni1000 ± 2.1 ± 3.0 0.7 1.3 50 20 B E J +130...+1820 -270...+1000 -200...+760 0.1 Open circuit (detection on each channel) ± 3.5 ± 3.7 ± 2.8 ±5 ±5 ± 4.5 500 200 K -270...+1370 L -200...+900 ± 3.7 ±5 ± 3.0 ± 4.5 T -270...+400 U -200...+600 ± 3.7 ±5 ± 2.7 ± 4.5 25 N R S +270...+1300 -50...+1769 -50...+1769 0.1 Open circuit (detection on each channel) ± 3.7 ± 3.2 ± 3.2 ±5 ± 4.5 ± 4.5 ppm/° 25 C (1) %FS: Error as a % of full scale. ± 1 °C with Pt100 temperature probe range, - 100...+ 200 °C (2) Excluding error caused by the wiring Functions: pages 2/26 and 2/27 References: page 2/31 2/29 Characteristics (continued) Modicon® M340™ Automation Platform Analog I/O modules Characteristics of the BMX AMO 0210 analog output module Module Output type Number of channels Ranges 2 Resolution Conversion time Output power supply Output ranges Adjustment range Voltage Current bits ms Temperature drift Recalibration Fallback mode (2) Isolation Consumption Current 0...20 mA, 4...20 mA 24 mA y 600 Open circuit Nominal Maximum V V Ω At 25 °C Maximum at 0…60 °C %FS %FS 0.10 0.25 V rms V rms V rms mA 40 ppm/°C None, factory-calibrated Default or configurable 1,400 V c 2,000 V c 2,000 V c See power consumption table page 6/8 Load impedance Detection type Measurement errors (1) BMX AMO 0210 Isolated high-level outputs 2 ± 10 V 0...20 mA and 4...20 mA 15 + sign y 1 Internal power supply via rack Voltage ± 10 V ± 11.25 V ≥ 1,000 Short-circuit Between channels Between channels and bus Between channels and ground Typical Characteristics of BMX AMM 0600 mixed analog I/O module Module Channel type BMX AMM 0600 Non-isolated high-level inputs Number of channels Ranges 4 ± 10 V Maximum conversion value Voltage Current 0…5 V 0…10 V 1…5 V 0…20 mA – 0...30 4…20 mA Non-isolated high-level outputs 2 ± 10 V 0…20 4…20 mA mA ± 11.25 – – 0...24 mA V mA ± 11.25 – Resolution Filtering Precision of internal conversion resistor Read cycle time Fast bits 12 Default Conversion time Permitted overload on Voltage the input channels Current Measurement errors At 25 °C (1) Maximum at 0…60 °C ms ms V mA %FS %FS 14 12 13 12 12 1st order digital filtering by firmware 250 Ω, 0.2% - 25 ppm/°C 1 + 1 x no. of channels used (periodic reading of no. of declared channels) 5 for 4 channels – ± 30 – – ± 30 0.25 0.35 0.35 0.50 Temperature drift 30 ppm/°C 100 ppm/°C Recalibration Fallback mode (2) Isolation Consumption ms 50 ppm/°C Between group of input channels and group of output channels Between channels and bus Between channels and ground V Internal – 1,400 c V V 2,000 c 2,000 c Typical mA See power consumption table page 6/8 11 – – – y2 ± 11.25 – – 0...24 0.25 0.60 None, factory-calibrated Default or configurable (1) %FS: Error as a % of full scale (2) Default: Output at 0 (V or mA). Configurable: Hold last value or set at predefined value for each channel. Description: page 2/24 2/30 Functions: pages 2/26 and 2/28 0 Modicon® M340™ Automation Platform References 0 Analog I/O modules References Analog input modules Input type Input signal range Resolution Connection Isolated high-level inputs 16 bits ± 10 V, 0...10 V, 0...5 V, 1...5 V, ± 5 V 0...20 mA, 4...20 mA, ± 20 mA Isolated low-level inputs Temperature probe, 15 bits thermocouple + sign ± 40 mV, ± 80 mV, ± 160 mV, ± 320 mV, ± 640 mV, ± 1.28 V 0...400 Ω, 0...4000 Ω BMX AMp 0pp0 No. of Reference channels 4 fast BMXAMI0410 channels Via cage clamp, screw clamp or spring-type removable terminal block 40-pin connector 4 channels BMXART0414 8 channels BMXART0814 r Weight kg – – – 2 Analog output module Output type Isolated high-level outputs BMX ART 0414 BMX ART 0814 Output signal Resolution Connection No. of Reference range channels 2 channels BMXAMO0210 ± 10 V, 16 bits Via cage clamp, 0...20 mA, 4...20 mA screw clamp or spring-type removable terminal block Weight kg – Mixed analog I/O module Channel type Signal range Resolution Connection No. of Reference channels BMXAMM0600 r I: 4 Via cage clamp, 14 bits or Mixed I/O, non-isolated ± 10 V, 0...10 V, channels screw clamp or 12 bits 0...5 V, 1...5 V, 0...20 mA, 4...20 mA depending cage spring-type Q: 2 on the range removable terminal channels block Weight kg – Connection accessories for analog modules (1) Description BMX FTB 20p0 20-pin removable terminal blocks Preformed cord sets BMX FTW p01S For use with modules BMX AMI 0410 BMX AMO 0210 BMX AMM 0600 BMX AMI 0410 BMX AMO 0210 BMX AMM 0600 BMX ART 0414 BMX ART 0814 (2) Type, composition Length Reference Weight kg – – – Cage clamp Screw clamp Spring-type – – – BMXFTB2000 BMXFTB2010 BMXFTB2020 One 20-pin removable terminal block One end with color-coded wires One 40-pin connector One end with color-coded wires 3m 5m BMXFTW301S BMXFTW501S – – 3m 5m BMXFCW301S BMXFCW501S – – – ABE7CPA410 0.180 ABE7CPA412 0.180 Advantys™ Telefast® ABE7 pre-wired I/O system Advantys Telefast ABE7 sub-bases BMX AMI 0410 BMX ART 0414 BMX ART 0814 ABE7CPA41p Preformed cord sets for BMX AMI 0410 ABE7CPAppp sub-bases BMX ART 0414 BMX ART 0814 BMX FCA pp0 – 1.5 m 3m 5m BMXFCA150 BMXFCA300 BMXFCA500 – – – 1.5 m 3m 5m BMXFCA152 BMXFCA302 BMXFCA502 – – – (1) The shielding on the cord sets carrying the analog signals must always be connected to the BMX XSPpp00 shielding connection kit mounted under the rack holding the analog modules (see page 1/15). (2) The BMX ART 0814 8-channel module requires two ABE7CPA412 sub-bases and two BMX FCApp2 cord sets. r Available 4 th quarter 2007 BMX FCA p02 Description: page 2/24 Distribution of isolated power supplies Delivers 4 protected isolated power supplies for 4...20 mA inputs Direct connection of 4 inputs Connection and provision of cold junction compensation for thermocouples Direct connection of 4 inputs One 20-pin removable terminal block and one 25-pin SUB-D connector for ABE7CPA410 sub-base One 40-pin connector and one 25-pin SUB-D connector for ABE7CPA412 sub-base Functions: pages 2/26 and 2/27 Characteristics: pages 2/28 to 2/30 2/31 Automation platform Presentation, Functions Modicon® M340™ processors Programmable process control Process control in machines Unity Pro™ software contains CONT_CTL, a library of 36 function blocks used to create control loops for machine control. Modicon M340 processors meet the requirements for closed loop control functions in machines are adequately met by Modicon M340 thanks to the wealth of functions in the library and the flexibility with which function blocks can be linked together through programming. This solution therefore eliminates the need for external controllers, and simplifies the overall control architecture of the machine, as well as its design, roll-out and operation. 2 CONT_CTL, programmable process control integrated in Unity Pro The function blocks, EF or EFB, can be used in all Unity Pro™ languages, i.e., LD, ST, IL and FBD. FBD is particularly suitable for accessing control processing operations in Unity Pro™ software through its assistant for entering and viewing parameters and function block variables. CONT_CTL library functions The library consists of five function families: b Input data conditioning b Controllers b Math functions b Measurement processing b Output value processing Input data conditioning Pure delay DTIME Integrator with limiting INTEGRATOR First order time lag device LAG_FILTER PD device with smoothing LDLG Differentiator with smoothing LEAD Mass flow calculation based on the measurement of differential MFLOW QDTIME SCALING TOTALIZER VEL_LIM PIDFF AUTOTUNE TT18_PV TT18_SP TC18_OUT TC18_START TC18_PREV TC_PARA PV SP RCPY START PREV PARA TR_I TR_S PV_O SP_O PARA_C TRI TRS INFO STATUS TC18_PARA TC18_OUT 1 TC2_OUT OUTD PV SP FF RCPY MAN_AUTO MA_O PARA INFO TR_I STATUT TR_S OUT OUT TC18_OUT IN FORC MA_FORC MAN_AUTO OUTD PARA MA_O TR_I STATUT TR_S OUT OUT Scaling Integrator (typically of flow) until a limit (typically a volume) is reached, with automatic reset Velocity limiter, with manipulated variable limiting Controllers PI_B PIDFF TC2_OUT AUTOTUNE MS TC2_OUT pressure or flow speed with pressure and temperature compensation Deadtime device TC18_OUT IMC Example: PID controller with MS manual control SAMPLETM STEP2 STEP3 Simple PI controller: PI algorithm with a mixed structure (series/parallel) Complete PID controller: PID algorithm with a parallel or mixed structure (series/parallel) Automatic tuner setting for the PIDFF (complete PID) controller or the PI_B (simple PI) controller v Identification using Ziegler Nichols type method v Modeling based on 1st order process v Building of control parameters with criterion for prioritizing either the reaction time to disturbance (dynamic) or the stability of the process Model corrector. The model is a first order model with delay. This corrector is useful: v When there are serious delays compared with the main time constant of the process; this scenario cannot be satisfactorily resolved by standard PID process control v For regulating a non-linear process IMC can handle any stable and aperiodic process of any order. Control of controller startup and sampling Two-point controller Three-point controller for temperature regulation Math functions COMP_DB K_SQRT MULDIV_W SUM_W 2/32 Comparison of two values, with dead zone and hysteresis Square root, with weighting and threshold, useful for linearization of flow measurements Weighted multiplication/division of 3 numerical values Weighted summation of 3 numerical values 0 Functions (continued) Setup Automation platform Modicon® M340™ 0 processors Programmable process control Measurement processing AVGMV AVGMV_K DEAD_ZONE LOOKUP_TABLE1 SAH HYST_XXX INDLIM_XXX Moving average with fixed number of samples (50 max.) Moving average with constant correction factor, 10,000 samples max. Dead zone Linearization of characteristic curves using first-order interpolation Detection of a rising edge Detection of high threshold with hysteresis (1) Detection of high and low thresholds with hysteresis (1) Output value processing Programming in Unity Pro in offline mode MS MS_DB PWM1 SERVO SPLRG Manual control of an output Manual control of an output with dead zone Control via pulse width modulation Control for servo motors Control of two Split Range actuators 2 Setpoint management RAMP RATIO SP_SEL Ramp generator, with separate ascending and descending ramps Ratio controller Selection of setpoint value: local (operator) or remote (processing) Setting up process control function blocks Based on the sequencing of function blocks, the FBD language integrated into Unity Pro™ programming language is particularly suitable for building control loops. Designers can use FBD to easily associate blocks from the CONT_CTL library with their own DFB blocks written in Unity Pro™ software ST, IL, or LD language, or in C language. Debugging, operation All Unity Pro™ standard debugging services (see page 4/21) are available. In particular, the Modicon M340 processor simulator can be used to check correct execution of processing offline. Compatibility The CONT_CTL control function block library is available in all versions of Unity Pro™ software. It is compatible with all processors in the Modicon® M340™ , Premium™ , Quantum™ , and Atrium™ PLC ranges. Resources The technical documentation provides many examples of how to set up programmable process control function blocks in FBD, LD, IL and ST languages. Programming in online mode The techniques for adjusting process control loops are described in the document “Process control, Unity™ V3.0” available on the www.telemecanique.com website. (1) XXX depending on the type of variable: DINT, INT, UINT, UDINT, REAL 2/33 Selection guide Modicon® M340™ Automation Platform Distributed I/O system Splitter box and module type Monobloc I/O splitter boxes Advantys™ FTB distributed I/O system 2 Type of communication with Modicon M340 platform CANopen Max. number per connection points 1 monobloc splitter Discrete inputs/outputs Number of channels Splitter of 16 I, 8 I + 8 O, 12 I + 4 O, 16 I/O or 8 I + 8 I/O Input voltage 24 V c Output voltage 24 V c analog inputs/outputs – Counting – Type of input/output connectors M12 connectors Housing type Plastic and metal Module type FTB 1 Pages Consult our catalog “IP 67 splitter boxes” 2/34 0 0 Monobloc IP 20 distributed I/O Modicon® Momentum™ PLC Optimum IP 20 distributed I/O Modular IP 20 distributed I/O Advantys ™ Advantys™ STB distributed I/O system OTB distributed I/O system 2 Ethernet TCP/IP Ethernet TCP/IP CANopen Modbus® communication (RS 485) 1 interface module Ethernet TCP/IP CANopen Base of 16 I, 32 I, 8 O, 16 O, 32 O, 10 I/8 O, 16 I/8 O, 16 I/12 O and 16 I/16 O 24 V c, 120 V a, and 230 V a 12 I/8 O Module of 2 I, 4 I, 6 I, 16 I, 2 O, 4 O, 6 O or 16 O 24 V c 24 V c, 115 V a, and 230 V a 24 V c, 120 V a, 230 V a, and relay 24 V c, and relay 24 V c, 115/230 V a, and relay Bases 8 I, 16 I or 4 O voltage/current Base 4 I thermocouple or RTD – Modules 2 I and 2 O voltage/current Module 2 I thermocouple or RTD Base 2 channels 10 kHz/200 kHz Module 1 channel 40 kHz Base 6 I/3 O 120 V a with 1 Modbus port Integrated in interface module: - 2 channels 5 kHz/20 kHz - 2 PWM function channels – Screw or spring terminal blocks Removable screw terminal blocks Parallel interface module for TeSys® Quickfit and TeSys® U motor-starters Screw or spring connectors 170 ADp OTB 1pO DM9LP STB Dpp/App Consult our catalog: Modicon Momentum automation platform Consult our catalog: Advantys OTB distributed I/O Consult our catalog: Advantys STB distributed I/O 1 base with 1 communicator 1 “NIM” interface module + 32 I/O modules Plastic 2/35 Modicon® M340™ Automation Platform Presentation 0 BMX EHC 0200/0800 counter modules Presentation BMX EHC 0200 and BMX EHC 0800 counter modules for the Modicon M340 automation platform are used to count the pulses generated by a sensor or to process the signals from an incremental encoder. The two modules differ in the number of counter channels, maximum input frequencies, functions and auxiliary input and output interfaces: Counter module No. of Maximum channels frequency Integrated functions BMXEHC0200 2 60 kHz BMXEHC0800 8 10 kHz Upcounting Downcounting Period meter Frequency meter Frequency generator Axis control Upcounting Downcounting Measurement Interface 2 No. of physical inputs 6 No. of physical outputs 2 2 – The sensors used on each channel can be: b 2-wire 24 V proximity sensors b 3-wire 24 V proximity sensors b 10/30 V output signal incremental encoders with push-pull outputs BMX EHC 0200 / 0800 counter modules can be used to meet the demands of applications such as: b Alarm generation on empty unwinder status using the ratio b Sorting small parts using the period meter b Single electronic cam using the dynamic setting thresholds b Speed control using the period meter 1 2 3 4 BMX EHC 0200 1 2 These standard format modules can be installed in any available slot of a Modicon M340 PLC; they can be removed while powered up. In a Modicon M340 PLC configuration, the number of BMX EHC 0200 / 0800 counter modules should be added to the number of application-specific modules: communication, motion control and weighing. The function parameters are set using Unity Pro™ software. Description BMX EHC 0200 / 0800 analog I/O modules are standard format. They occupy a single slot in BMX XBP pp00 racks. They come in a plastic case which ensures IP 20 protection of the electronics, and locks into position with a screw. BMX EHC 0200 module, 2 channels, 60 kHz The BMX EHC 0200 counter module has the following on the front panel: 1 Module and channel status LED array 2 16-pin connector for wiring the sensors of counter 0 3 16-pin connector for wiring the sensors of counter 1 4 10-pin connector for wiring: vthe auxiliary outputs vthe sensor power supplies To be ordered separately: b A BMX XTS HSC 20 kit containing: vTwo 16-pin connectors vOne 10-pin connector b A BMX XSP 010 electromagnetic compatibility kit. BMX EHC 0800 module, 8 channels, 10 kHz The BMX EHC 0800 counter module has the following on the front panel: 1 Module and channel status LED array 2 20-pin connector compatible with discrete I/O BMX EHC 0800 To be ordered separately: a BMX XSP 010 electromagnetic compatibility kit. Characteristics: page 2/40 2/36 Connections: page 2/42 References: page 2/41 Modicon® M340™ Automation Platform Functions 0 BMX EHC 0200/0800 counter modules Operation Block diagram of a BMX EHC 0200 module counter channel Incremental encoder A/B Input A 32-bit up/down counting Input B SYNC input Reference (2) Reference(1) Enable (1) 2 capture registers Comparator with 2 thresholds 8 configurable modes Function on output 0 (3) Output 0 Function on output 1 (3) Output 1 2 Learn (1) Block diagram of a BMX EHC 0800 module counter channel Used in 16-bit (8 channels) Input A or 16-bit up/down counting 1 capture register Comparator with 1 threshold 5 configurable modes Auxiliary Used in 32-bit (4 channels) Incremental encoder A/B 32-bit up/down counting 1 capture register Comparator with 1 threshold 1 mode Auxiliary B (1) Optional inputs (2) Reference: 5 operating modes for SYNC "IN_SYNC" and Reference "IN_REF" inputs. Functions of inputs: 15 possible types of behavior. Characteristics: page 2/40 Connections: page 2/42 References: page 2/41 2/37 Functions (continued) Modicon® M340™ Automation Platform BMX EHC 0200/0800 counter modules Functional characteristics of the BMX EHC 0200 module Configurable functions Frequency meter Count events 2 Measure time periods Ratio count Downcounting Loop (modulo) counting 32-bit counter counting Width modulation This function measures a frequency, speed, data rate or an event stream. As standard, this function measures the frequency received on the IN A input. This frequency is always expressed in Hz (number of pulses per second), with a precision of 1 Hz. The maximum frequency on the IN A input is 60 kHz. The maximum cyclic ratio at 60 kHz is 60%. This function is used to determine the number of events received intermittently. In this mode, the counter calculates the number of pulses applied to the IN_A input, at time intervals defined by the user. As an option, it is possible to use the IN_SYNC input during a period of time, provided that the enable bit has indeed been configured. The module counts the pulses applied to the IN_A input each time the pulse for this input lasts longer than 5 µs (without anti-bounce filter). IN_A input pulses that have appeared for less than 100 ms after a change of state of the IN_SYNC input are lost. This function is used to: b determine how long an event lasts b determine the time that separates 2 events b measure the execution time of a process Measures the elapsed time during an event or between two events (IN_A input) according to a selectable time base of 10 µs, 100 µs or 1 ms. The IN_SYNC input can be used to enable or stop a measurement. The module can carry out a maximum of 1 measurement every 5 ms. The smallest measurable pulse is 100 µs, even if the unit defined by the user is 10 µs. The maximum measurable duration is 4,294,967,295 units (1) (unit to be defined). The ratio count mode only uses the IN_A and IN_B inputs. This count mode consists of 2 modes: b Ratio 1: used to divide 2 frequencies and useful in applications such as flowmeters and mixers, for example. b Ratio 2: used to subtract 2 frequencies and useful in the same applications but requiring more precise regulation (more similar frequencies). Ratio 1 mode presents the results in thousandths in order to have better accuracy (a display of 2000 corresponds to a value of 2) and ratio 2 mode presents the results in Hz. The maximum frequency that the module can measure on the IN_A and IN_B inputs is 60 kHz. The maximum measurable value is 4,294,967,295 units (1). This function is used to list a group of operations. In this mode, activation of the synchronization function starts the counter which, starting with a preset value, decreases on each pulse applied to the IN_A input, until it reaches the value 0. This downcounting is made possible when the enable function has been activated. The counting register is thus updated at intervals of 1 ms. One basic use of this mode is to use an output to signal the end of a group of operations (when the counter reaches 0). The smallest pulse applied to the IN_SYNC input is 100 µs. The frequency applied to the IN_SYNC input is at maximum 1 pulse every 5 ms. The maximum value of the preset value is 4,294,967,295 (1). The maximum count value is 4,294,967,295 units (1). This function is used in packaging and labeling applications where actions are repeated in series of moving objects. In the counting direction, the counter increases until it reaches the preset modulo value. On the next pulse, the counter is reset to 0 and counting restarts. In the downcounting direction, the counter decreases until it reaches the value 0. On the next pulse, the counter is reset to the preset modulo value. Downcounting can then restart. The maximum frequency applied to the IN_A and IN_B inputs is 60 kHz. The smallest pulse applied to the IN_SYNC input is 100 µs. The frequency applied to the IN_SYNC input is at maximum 1 pulse every 5 ms. The frequency of the modulo event is at maximum 1 every 5 ms. The maximum modulo and counter value is 4,294,967,295 (1). This function is used mainly in the axis following: The maximum frequency applied simultaneously to the IN_A and IN_B inputs is 60 kHz. The smallest pulse applied to the IN_SYNC input is 100 µs. The frequency of the referencing event is at maximum 1 every 5 ms. The counter value is between - 2,147,483,647 and + 2,147,483,647 (2). In this operating mode, the module uses an internal clock generator to supply a periodic signal on the module output Q0. Only the Q0 output is affected by this mode, the Q1 output being independent of this mode. Control of the Q0 output must be at 1 to enable modulation on the Q0 output. The maximum output frequency value is 4 kHz. The frequency applied to the IN_SYNC input is at maximum 1 pulse every 5 ms. Since the Q0 output is source type, a load resistor is needed for the Q0 output signal to change to 0 at the correct frequency. The cyclic ratio adjustment range varies according to the frequency of the Q0 output. (1) If the measurement value exceeds 2,147,483,647 units then the application must convert the measurement naturally to a signed integer (DINT) or an unsigned integer (UINT). (2) The counter value is a signed integer (DINT) which must not be converted to an unsigned integer (UINT). Characteristics: page 2/40 2/38 Connections: page 2/42 References: page 2/41 0 Functions (continued) Modicon® M340™ Automation Platform 0 BMX EHC 0200/0800 counter modules Functional characteristics of the BMX EHC 0800 module Configurable functions Frequency meter Count events Downcounting Loop (modulo) counting Up/down counter 32-bit counter counting Characteristics: page 2/40 Connections: page 2/42 This function measures a frequency, speed, rate or data stream control. As standard, this function measures the frequency received on the IN A input. This frequency is always expressed in Hz (number of pulses per second), with a precision of 1 Hz. The maximum frequency on the IN A input is 60 kHz. The maximum cyclic ratio at 60 kHz is 60%. This function is used to determine the number of events received intermittently. In this mode, the counter calculates the number of pulses applied to the IN_A input, at time intervals defined by the user. As an option, it is possible to use the IN_AUX input during a period of time, provided that the enable bit has indeed been configured. The module counts the pulses applied to the IN_A input each time the pulse for this input lasts longer than 50 µs (without anti-bounce filter). Pulses with less than 100 ms synchronization are lost. This function is used to list a group of operations. In this mode, when counting is enabled (software validation via the valid_sync command), a rising or falling edge on the IN_AUX input causes a value, defined by the user, to be loaded in the counter. The counter decreases on each pulse applied to the IN_A input, until it reaches the value 0. Downcounting is made possible when the force_enable command is high (software positioning). The smallest pulse applied to the IN_AUX input is 100 µs. The frequency applied to the IN_AUX input is at maximum 1 pulse every 25 ms. This function is used in packaging and labeling applications where actions are repeated on series of moving objects. The counter increases on each pulse applied to the IN_A input, until it reaches the preset modulo value. On the next pulse in the upcounting direction, the counter is reset to 0 and upcounting restarts. The maximum frequency applied to the IN_A input is 10 kHz. The smallest pulse applied to the IN_AUX input varies according to the selected filter level. The frequency applied to the IN_AUX input is at maximum 1 pulse every 25 ms. The frequency of the modulo event is at maximum 1 every 25 ms. The minimum acceptable modulo value varies according to the frequency of the IN_A input. For example, for a frequency of 10 kHz applied to the IN_A input, the modulo must be higher than 250. This function is used for an accumulation, upcounting or downcounting operation on a single input. Each pulse applied to the IN_A input produces: b upcounting of pulses if the IN_AUX input is high b downcounting of pulses if the IN_AUX input is low The counter values vary between the limits -65,536 and +65,535. The maximum frequency applied to the IN_A input is 10 kHz. Pulses applied to the IN_A input, after a change of direction, are only upcounted or downcounted after a period corresponding to the delay for taking account of the state of the IN_AUX input due to the programmable filter level on this input. 32-bit counter counting mode is available for channels 0, 2, 4, and 6 (channels 1, 3, 5 and 7 are now inactive). It behaves in the same way as the up/down counting mode using up to 3 physical inputs. It enables simultaneous upcounting and downcounting. The counter values vary between the limits -2,147,483,648 and +2,147,483,647 (31-bit word and 1 sign bit). The eight 16-bit registers can be configured as four 32-bit registers. The maximum frequency applied to the IN_A and IN_B inputs is 10 kHz. The smallest pulse applied to the IN_AUX input is defined according to the filtering applied to this input. The frequency of loading the preset value is at maximum 1 every 25 ms. References: page 2/41 2/39 2 Modicon® M340™ Automation Platform Characteristics BMX EHC 0200/0800 counter modules General characteristics Type of module Modularity Number of physical inputs per module Number of physical outputs per module Application 2 Frequency on counter inputs Module cycle time Number of Inputs inputs/outputs per counter channel kHz ms Number Outputs Encoder Power supply Type Number Type V Sensor voltage Actuator current V A V 24 c, Type 3 2 24 c BMX EHC 0800 8 channels 2 – Upcounting, downcounting, measurement, interfacing max. 10 5 2 in single mode 3 in special dual-phase mode – – V mA 10...30 V incremental encoder model with push-pull outputs 19.2...30 c 0.5 max. per output – 2 per module Yes. – Short-circuit and overload protection, 300 mA typical Yes, in certain conditions: the module can be removed and reinserted in its slot while the rack is powered up, but the counter may need to be re-enabled when it is reinserted in its base. 1500 for 1 min See power consumption table page 6/8 BMX EHC 0800 High-speed inputs (IN_A, IN_B, IN_AUX) V V mA V mA mA BMX EHC 0200 High-speed inputs (IN_A, IN_B, IN_SYNC) and auxiliary inputs (IN_EN, IN_REF, IN_CAP) 6, 24 V c 30 c 11...30 c 6 (24 V c) <5c < 1.5 >2 BMX EHC 0200 2, 24 V c, 0.5 A 19.2...30 c 0.5 1 0.1 <3 1.5 < 200 Protection for each channel Normal logic on both channels Reverse logic on one or more channels The inductive load is calculated by application of the formula: L = 0.5/I2 × F where: v L: load inductance in Henrys v I: load current in A v F: switching frequency in Hz BMX EHC 0800 – – – – – – – – – – – – Distribution of power to the sensors Hot swapping Insulation voltage from the ground to the bus Consumption Typical BMX EHC 0200 2 channels 6 2 Upcounting, downcounting, measurement, frequency meter, frequency generator, axis following max. 60 1 6 Input characteristics Module type Input type Number of inputs per channel Inputs Voltage At state 1 At state 0 Voltage Current Voltage Current Current at 11 V c 2, 24 V c Characteristics of outputs Output type Number of outputs per channel Voltages Maximum load current V A A mA V A μs Each point Per module Maximum leakage current at state 0 Maximum voltage drop at state 1 Maximum short-circuit output current Each point Maximum load capacity Short-circuit and overload Polarity on each output channel Default User configuration Inductive load . Characteristics: page 2/40 2/40 Connections: page 2/42 References: page 2/41 0 Modicon® M340™ Automation Platform References 0 BMX EHC 0200/0800 counter modules References BMX EHC 0200/0800 counter modules Description Counter modules for 2 and 3-wire 24 V c sensors and 10/30 V c incremental encoders with push-pull outputs No. of Characteristics channels 2 Counting at 60 kHz Reference (1) BMXEHC0200 Weight kg 0.112 8 BMXEHC0800 0.113 Unit reference Weight kg 0.021 Counting at 10 kHz BMX EHC 0200 Connection accessories (1) Description Connector kit Composition Use Two 16-pin connectors and one 10-pin connectors for BMX EHC 0200 module 20-pin removable terminals Cage clamp blocks Screw clamp For BMH EHC 0800 module Spring-type Electromagnetic compatibility kits For BMX EHC 0200/0800 modules BMX EHC 0800 Comprising: a metal bar, two sub-bases and one set of spring clamping rings BMXXTSHSC20 BMXFTB2000 BMXFTB2010 BMXFTB2020 0.093 0.075 0.060 See page 2/15 – (1) The shielding on the cord sets carrying the analog signals must always be connected to the BMX XSPpp00 shielding connection kit mounted under the rack that holds the analog modules (see page 2/15). . BMX FTB 20p0 Characteristics: page 2/40 Connections: page 2/42 References: page 2/41 2/41 2 Modicon® M340™ Automation Platform Connections 0 BMX EHC 0200/0800 counter modules Connections Pinout for the BMX EHC 0200 module 16-pin connector 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Pin number 1, 2, 7, 8 5, 6, 13, 14 15, 16 3 4 9 10 11 12 Symbol 24V_SEN GND_SEN FE IN_A IN_SYNC IN_B IN_EN IN_REF IN_CAP Description 24 V c output for the sensor power supply 0 V c output for the sensor power supply Functional earth ground Input A Synchronization input Input B Enable input Referencing input Capture input Pinout for the BMX EHC 0200 module 10-pin connector 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Pin number 1 2 5 6 7 8 9 10 Symbol 24V_IN GND_IN Q0-1 Q0-0 Q1-1 Q1-0 24V_OUT GND_OUT Description 24 V c input for the input power supply 0 V c input for the input power supply Q1 output of counter channel 0 Q0 output of counter channel 0 Q1 output of counter channel 1 Q0 output of counter channel 1 24 V c input for the output power supply 0 V c input for the output power supply Examples of connection to the BMX EHC 0200 module Sensor connections Connection of an incremental encoder 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Incremental encoder + – 10/30 V Z A B GND + – 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 9 10 11 12 11 12 13 14 13 14 15 16 15 16 Reference Enable Capture Connection of power supplies and actuators (1) 24 V c inputs Fuse (1) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Q1, channel 0 Q0, channel 0 Q1, channel 1 Q0, channel 1 Fuse (1) 2 4 OV 3 24 V c outputs 1 (1) A fast-blow fuse should be used to protect the module electronics in the event of reversed polarity of the power supplies on the inputs and outputs. Characteristics: page 2/40 2/42 Connections: page 2/42 References: page 2/41 Connections (continued) Modicon® M340™ Automation Platform 0 BMX EHC 0200/0800 counter modules Connections (continued) Pinout for the connector for the BMX EHC 0800 module 20-pin terminal block Pin number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Description IN_AUX input of channel 0 IN_A input of channel 0 IN_AUX input of channel 1 IN_A input of channel 1 or IN_B input of channel 0 IN_AUX input of channel 2 IN_A input of channel 2 IN_AUX input of channel 3 IN_A input of channel 3 or IN_B input of channel 2 IN_AUX input of channel 4 IN_A input of channel 4 IN_AUX input of channel 5 IN_A input of channel 5 or IN_B input of channel 4 IN_AUX input of channel 6 IN_A input of channel 6 IN_AUX input of channel 7 IN_A input of channel 7 or IN_B input of channel 0 Feedback - 24 V power supply for sensors VDC + Power supply for sensors Functional earth ground, for shielding connection Functional earth ground, for shielding connection 2 19 20 Examples of connection to the BMX EHC 0800 module Connection of sensors (1) (2) (3) Connection of an incremental encoder (1) (2) (3) (4) 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 Z A B 10/30 V Ret 14 15 15 16 16 17 18 0V 24 V 17 18 19 19 20 20 0V 24 V (1) It is advisable to adapt the programmable filtering to the frequency applied to the inputs since using programmable filtering avoids the need to use a shielded cable. (2) In the case of an encoder or a high-speed sensor without programmable filtering, it is advisable to use a shielded cable connected to pins 15 and 16 of the connector. (3) In the case of a very disturbed environment without programmable filtering, it is advisable to use the BMX XSP 010 electromagnetic protection kit to connect the shielding. In this case it is also advisable to use a 24 c power supply dedicated to the inputs as well as a shielded cable for connecting the power supply to the module. (4) A fast-blow fuse should be used to protect the module electronics in the event of reversed polarity of the power supplies. Characteristics: page 2/40 Connections: page 2/42 References: page 2/41 2/43 Automation platform Presentation, Functions Modicon® M340™ 0 PLC MFB motion control Presentation Premium MFB (Motion Function Blocks) is a library of function blocks integrated into the Unity Pro™ software, and is used to set up motion control in the architectures of drives and servo drives on machine buses and CANopen installations: v Altivar® 31 adjustable speed drive: For asynchronous motors from 0.18 to 15 kW v Altivar® 71 adjustable speed drive: For asynchronous motors from 0.37 to 500 kW v Lexium® 05 servo drive: For servo motors from 0.4 to 6 kW v Lexium® 15LP/MP/HP servo drive: For BSH & BDH servo motors from 0.9 to 42.5 kW v Lexium® 17D: For BPH, BPL and SER servo motors from 1.5 to 70 A rms (1) v IclA ® IFA/IFE/IFS: For integrated motor drives from 0.05 to 0.25 kW Modicon M340 CANopen 2 ATV 31 In compliance with PLCopen specifications, the MFB library allows easy and flexible motion programming with Unity Pro™ software, as well as axis diagnosis. In maintenance operations, drives can be replaced quickly and efficiently thanks to drive parameter download blocks. Setting up drives on the CANopen network is facilitated through Motion Tree Manager organization in the Unity Pro™ browser, making it easy for users to access the application drives. ATV 71 Applications Lexium 05 Lexium 15 Lexium 17D (1) IclA MFB: Motion control distributed over CANopen The features of the MFB library are particularly suitable for machines with independent axes. For these modular/special machines, MFB function blocks are the perfect solution for controlling single axes. The following are typical applications for this type of architecture: v Automatic storage/removal v Handling v Palletizers/depalletizers v Conveyors v Packaging, simple label application v Grouping/ungrouping v Adjustment axes in flexible machines, etc. Functions The table below lists the function blocks of the MFB library and the drives compatible with them. The prefix indicates the block family: v MC: Function block defined by the Motion Function Blocks PLCopen standard v TE: Function block specific to Telemecanique® products v Lxm: Function block specific to Lexium® servo drives Type Management and motion Save and restore parameters (FDR) Advanced Lexium functions System Function Function block Read an internal parameter Write an internal parameter Read the current position Read the instantaneous speed Acknowledge error messages Stop all active movement Axis coming to standstill Movement to absolute position Relative movement Additional movement Homing Movement at given speed Read diagnostic data Read servo drive status Read all parameters and store in PLC memory Write all parameters from the PLC memory MC_ReadParameter MC_WriteParameter MC_ReadActualPosition MC_ReadActualVelocity MC_Reset MC_Stop MC_Power MC_MoveAbsolute MC_MoveRelative MC_MoveAdditive MC_Home MC_MoveVelocity MC_ReadAxisError MC_ReadStatus TE_UploadDriveParam TE_DownloadDriveParam Set the reduction ratio Read a motion task Write a motion task Start a motion task Communication with the servo drive Lxm_GearPos Lxm_UploadMTask Lxm_DownloadMTask Lxm_StartMTask TE_CAN_Handler Altivar ATV 31 ATV 71 Lexium 05 15/17D (1) Compatible (1) Lexium 17D drive supported by MFB with Modicon Premium platform only 2/44 IclA IFA/IFE/IFS Setup Automation platform Modicon® M340™ 0 PLC MFB motion control Motion Tree Manager Motion Tree Manager is associated with the Unity Pro™ ' MFB library, and integrated in its browser. It provides specific assistance for: b Axis object management b Axis variable definition b Drive parameter management Motion Tree Manager automatically creates links between the CANopen bus configuration and the MFB function block data using a limited amount of configuration data. 2 General axis parameters In this tab, the designer is prompted to define: b The name of the axis that will identify it in the browser for the entire application b The address of the drive on the CANopen bus Axis parameters The drop down lists in this tab are used to determine the exact type of drive: family, version. Variable names Motion Tree Manager integrated in the Unity Pro browser This last tab is used to identify data structures: b Axis_Reference, used by all the instances of function blocks for the axis in question b CAN_Handler, used to manage communication with the drive via the CANopen network Recipe definition The “recipes” attached to the axis are the data structures containing all the adjustment parameters of a given drive. This data is used when: b Changing the drive with restoration of the context during “Faulty Device Replacement” maintenance b Changing the manufacturing program of the machine, and calling up an appropriate set of parameters, such as servo control gains, limitations etc. adapted to the weight and size of the moving parts. Programming, diagnostics and maintenance Communication between the PLC and drive is automatically set up by the system as soon as a TE_CAN_Handler instance is declared in the Unity Pro task with which the axis is associated. General parameters: Axis name and address Movements are then programmed by sequencing function blocks from the library in the Unity Pro editor as selected by the user (LD, ST, FBD). The two function blocks, MC_ReadStatus, and in some cases MC_ReadAxisError, are useful for determining the overall status of the axis, and the code of active warnings or errors. The function blocks TE_UploadDriveParam and TE_DownloadDriveParam allow the application to save all the parameters of a drive (recipe) and to then quickly reload them into another drive if the first one fails. MFB: Programming a movement in absolute mode 2/45 3 3/0 0 Contents 3 - Communication 1 Ethernet TCP/IP networks with Transparent Ready® Services b Embedded Web services. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3/4 b Ethernet TCP/IP communication services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3/8 b Performances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3/16 b Ethernet integrated port / module selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3/21 b Ethernet processor/module product data sheet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3/22 b ConneXium™ cabling system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3/24 CANopen machines and installations bus b Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3/37 b Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3/38 b Characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3/38 b References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3/39 b Cabling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3/40 Serial links b Modbus® interface and character mode serial link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3/42 b Cabling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3/44 3/1 3 Selection guide Modicon® M340™ Automation Platform Communication, integrated ports and modules 3 Applications Processors with integrated Ethernet TCP/IP port Type Ethernet TCP/IP Structure Physical interface Connector type Access method 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX Data rate 10/100 Mbps Maximum number of devices Maximum length Number of links of the same type per station Other integrated port Double twisted pair copper cable, category CAT 5E Optical fiber via ConneXium ™ wiring system – 100 m (copper cable), 4,000 m (multi-mode optical fiber), 32,500 m (single-mode optical fiber) 1 (integrated port) 1 with BMX P34 1000/2010 processor 2 with BMX P34 2020/2030 processor Serial link CANopen bus – Medium Configuration Ethernet TCP/IP module CSMA-CD Standard services Modbus ® TCP/IP messaging Conformity class Transparent Ready ® server — class B10 Embedded web server Standard services services Configurable services “Rack viewer” PLC diagnostics “Data editor” access to PLC data and variables – Transparent Ready® server — class B30 “Alarm viewer” “Graphic Data Editor” – Transparent Ready® communication services I/O Scanning service FDR service SNMP network management service Global Data service SMTP E-mail notification service SOAP/XML Web services Passband management Transparent Ready® server — class C30 Hosting and display of user web pages (16 Mb) No Yes (client) No No No No Yes Yes Yes (server) Yes Yes Compatibility with processor – Standard and Performance processors Processor or module BMX P34 2020 Page 3/22 Server BMX P34 2030 BMX NOE 0100 BMX NOE 0110 r 3/23 r Available 4th quarter 2007. Before this date, please order the BMX NOE 0100 Ethernet module with BMX RWS C016M memory card, same services except Data editor service with pocket PC or PDA terminal and SOAP/XML Web services. 3/2 0 0 Processors with integrated machine and installation bus Processors with integrated serial link CANopen Modbus® interface and Character mode ISO 11898 (9-pin SUB-D connector) 9-pin SUB-D CSMA/CA (multiple access) 20 Kbps...1 Mbps depending on distance Non-isolated, 4-wire RS 232/2-wire RS 485 RJ45 Master/slave with Modbus link, Half duplex (RS 485)/Full duplex (RS 232) in character mode 0.3...19.2 Kbps Double shielded twisted pair copper cable Double shielded twisted pair copper cable 63 20 m (1 Mbps)...2,500 m (20 kbps) 1 32 per segment, 247 max. 15 m (non-isolated), 1,000 m with insulating case 1 Serial link – Ethernet TCP/IP CANopen - PDO implicit exchange (application data) - SDO explicit exchange (service data) Class M20 Read/write bits and words, diagnostics with Modbus link Send and receive character string in character mode – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – BMX P34 2010 3/39 BMX P34 2030 BMX P34 1000 BMX P34 2010 3 Ethernet TCP/IP BMX P34 2020 3/46 3/3 Presentation, functions Modicon® M340™ Automation Platform 0 Ethernet TCP/IP network, Transparent Ready® services Overview of the Web services In conformity with Schneider Electric Ethernet products (processors and Ethernet modules on Modicon automation platforms, distributed I/O modules, adjustable speed drivesadjustable speed drives and gateways), standard Web functions are integrated in BMX P34 2020/2030 processors and the BMX NOE 0100/110 Ethernet network modules on the Modicon M340 platform. From a simple Internet browser, the standard Web server authorizes the following “ready-to-use” functions: b Remote diagnostics and maintenance of products b Display and adjustment of products (read/write variables, status) With the BMX NOE 0110 (1) Ethernet network module, the Web server also offers the following functions: b Management of PLC alarms (system and application) with partial or total acknowledgement (ready-to-use Alarm Viewer function pages). b Hosting and display of Web pages created by the user. The embedded Web server is a real-time data server. All the data can be presented in the form of standard Web pages in HTML format and can therefore be accessed using any Web browser that supports the embedded Java code. The standard functions provided by the Web server are supplied ready-to-use and thus do not require any programming of either the PLC or the client PC device supporting a Web browser. 3 Standard Web server on the Modicon® M340™ platform Rack Viewer PLC diagnostics function The Rack Viewer function can be used for PLC system and I/O diagnostics. It displays the following in real-time: b LED status on the front panel of the PLC b The PLC type and version b The hardware configuration of the PLC including the status of the system bits and words b Detailed diagnostics (2) of each of the: v I/O module channels or application-specific channels in the configuration v equipment connected on the CANopen bus. Modicon M340 hardware configuration Data Editor read/write function for PLC data and variables The Data Editor function can be used to create tables of animated variables for real-time read/write access to PLC data in the form of lists. Various animation tables containing specific application variables to be monitored or modified can be created by the user and saved in the standard Web server module. In addition when using FactoryCast™ Web server of the BMX NOE 0110 (1) module: b The variables can be entered and displayed by their symbol (3) (S_Pump 234) b The write access option can be enabled/disabled for each variable using the FactoryCast™ software. The write access is protected by a dedicated password b Dedicated data monitoring tool can be use on pocket PC or PDA terminal (2). Data editor variables table (1) Module available 4 th quarter 2007. Before this date, please order the BMX NOE 0100 module with BMX RWS C016M memory card. (2) Function available 4th quarter 2007. (3) Access to symbols available 4 thquarter 2007. Hence provides access to unlocated data. References: pages 3/22 and 3/23 3/4 Functions (continued) Modicon® M340™ Automation Platform 0 Ethernet TCP/IP network, Transparent Ready® services, and FactoryCast™ Web server BMX NOE 0110 module FactoryCast™ Web server With the BMX NOE 0110 (1) Ethernet network module, the Web server offers the functions below, in addition to the standard Web services. Alarm Viewer function (2) Alarm Viewer (2) is a ready-to-use, password-protected function. This function can be used to process alarms (display, acknowledgment and deletion) managed at the PLC level by the system or using diagnostic function blocks known as DFBs (system-specific diagnostic function blocks and application-specific diagnostic function blocks created by the user). Alarm display from the diagnostic buffer These alarms are stored in the diagnostic buffer managed by the Modicon M340 platform (special memory space for storing all the diagnostics events). . The diagnostics viewer is a Web page comprising a list of messages, which displays the following information for each alarm: v Dates and times of the occurrence removal of a fault v Alarm message v Alarm status v Type of associated diagnostic function block (DFB). Graphic Data Editor function This function is used to create the graphic views animated by the PLC variables that can be accessed via their address or their symbol (3) (access to located data). The ready-to-use graphic editor is available online, connected to the BMX NOE 0110 module (1). Library of predefined graphic objects These views are created from a library of predefined graphic objects by simple copy/paste operations. The objects are configured to suit the user's requirements (color, PLC variables, name, etc). List of proposed graphic objects: b Analog and digital indicators b Horizontal and vertical bar charts b Boxes for displaying messages and entering values b Push button boxes b Functions for recording trends b Vats, valves, motors, etc Customized graphic objects can be added to this list. They can be reused in user Web pages that have been created using standard software for editing HTML pages. The views thus created are saved in the BMX NOE 0110 module and displayed using any Web browser. User Web page hosting and display function The BMX NOE 0110 Ethernet network module has a 16 Mbyte non-volatile memory (accessible as a hard disk). This allows hosting of Web pages and any user-defined Word or Acrobat Reader document (for example, maintenance manuals, or wiring diagrams). The Web pages can be created using any standard tool for creation and editing in HTML format. These pages can be enhanced by inserting animated graphic objects linked to PLC variables. These animated objects are created using the Graphic Data Editor. They are then downloaded to the BMX NOE 0110 module via configuration software of FactoryCast Web server. Real-time supervision graphic interface The Web pages created can be used, for example, to: b Display and modify all PLC variables in real time b Create hyperlinks to other external Web servers (documentation, suppliers, etc) This function is particularly suitable for creating graphic interfaces used for the following purposes: b Real-time display and supervision b Production monitoring b Diagnostics and help with maintenance b Operator guides (1) Module available 4 th quarter 2007. Before this date, please order the BMX NOE 0100 module with BMX RWS C016M memory card. (2) Function available 4 th quarter 2007. (3) Access to symbols available 4 thquarter 2007. 3/5 3 Functions (continued) Modicon® M340™ Automation Platform 0 Ethernet TCP/IP network, Transparent Ready® services, FactoryCast™, & SOAP/XML Web server FactoryCast™ Web server configuration software The FactoryCast Web server configuration software is supplied on CD-ROM with th BMX NOE 0110 FactoryCast module. This software is used for configuration and administration of the Web server embedded in these modules. It is compatible with Windows® 2000 and Windows® XP operating systems. It provides the following functions: b Setting the parameters of the FactoryCast functions v Definition of access security, and passwords v Importing of PLC symbol databases v Definition of access to write-enabled variables b Management of the Web site: v Management of default Web site pages v Management of user Web site pages (2) v Graphic object editor for animating Web pages v Downloading of Web pages between the PC and the module v Debugging of Web pages in online mode or in simulation mode (including animations and Java beans) b Simulation mode The application and the Web site (including the Java animations) can be set up in online mode or in simulation mode. Simulation mode is used to test the operation of the Web application without a FactoryCast module (with no physical connection to a PLC) thereby simplifying debugging. A graphics editor integrated in the configuration software can be used for easy customization of graphic objects (bar charts, gauges, LEDs, curves, cursors, operator input fields, alphanumeric display fields, buttons, etc). b Creation of user Web pages (1) User Web pages are created graphically using an external HTML editor (FrontPage® or similar, not supplied). User Web pages created in the FactoryCast environment are actual animated supervision screens and can be used to monitor your process. Based on Web technologies (HTML and Java) they provide real-time access to PLC variables using the FactoryCast graphic object library (Java beans). 3 SOAP/XML Web services (2) The BMX NOE 0110 FactoryCast module (3) incorporates a standard SOAP/XML data server that provides direct interoperability between automation devices and computer management applications (MES, ERP, SAP, pNet application, etc). SOAP/XML Web Services embedded in the PLC Communication between platforms or applications is now a necessity in a market where e-manufacturing and e-business are an essential fact of life for companies. Web service technology currently represents the most successful strategy for ensuring interoperability of heterogeneous software applications via an Intranet or the Internet, independently of any platform, operating system and programming language. The standardization of Web services has come about as a result of joint development between Microsoft and IBM, among others, validated at the W3C (World Wide Web Consortium) as an open standard. It now provides all the tools, specifications and environments needed for each platform. Web services are based on standards such as: b XML (eXtensible Markup Language): the universal standard for data exchange b SOAP (Single Object Access Protocol) carried via the HTTP (Hypertext Transfer Protocol) channel. b WSDL (Web Services Description Language) in XML format. SOAP is currently considered to be the reference protocol, including in industry. It has since been adopted by technology leaders such as Microsoft (pNET, SQL Server, Office, etc), IBM (Java, Web Sphere), Lotus, ORACLE, Sub, and SAP. (1) FactoryCast includes a plug-in for FrontPage ® 2000. This plug-in makes it easier to set up animations for real-time access to the PLC variables in HTML pages created by the user. They are created in the HTML editor by simply inserting customized graphic objects. (2) Web services available 4 th quarter 2007. (3) Module available 4th quarter 2007. References: pages 3/22 and 3/23 3/6 Modicon® M340™ Automation Platform Functions (continued) 0 Ethernet TCP/IP network, Transparent Ready® service, and SOAP/XML Web services SOAP/XML Web services (suite) Embedded SOAP/XML Web Services: Modbus® XMLDa Web services This new Transparent Ready® service offers the previously unused (or uncommon) possibility of making an IT/e-business application interact directly with the control system levels using the same standards. With the implementation of Modbus XMLDa (Modbus XML Data access) Web services in FactoryCast™ Web servers, the IT engineer can easily create an application which will access the desired information directly in the PLC and in real time. Data exchanges are made in XML standard format in response to a request using SOAP protocol. The implementation of Web services in control system equipment makes it easy to achieve vertical integration of the control level and the creation of even more collaborative architectures which can be used to link production systems to the corporate management systems. It simplifies access to information; reduces the costs of training, development, and deployments; and increases productivity. Development tool 1, 2 WSDL SOAP server Visual Studio pNET 3 SOAP request BMX NOE 0110 FactoryCast Web server module pNET Java Implementation of the Modbus® XMLDa Web services: server interface This implementation enables a SOAP client application (management level computer application, such as MES, ERP) to communicate directly with a FactoryCast Web server module embedded in the PLC. Exchanges are initiated by the SOAP client application (the server responds to these requests). b Step 1: Creating the client application and learning the Web services. The development environment (for example, Visual Studio pNET) searches in the FactoryCast server for the list of available services and their WSDL standard interfaces provided by the module. b Step 2: Developing the client application. The developer integrates the Web service functions using the code retrieved at the learning stage. b Step 3: Executing the client application. The client application communicates in real time with the FactoryCast Web server module using the SOAP protocol. Requests implemented in the BMX NOE 0110 FactoryCast Web server module provides data access to either physical or symbolic variables. They are defined in the table below. Access to data via physical address Modbus® XMLDa functions implemented in each FactoryCast Web server module ReadDeviceIdentification ReadMultipleRegisters WriteMultipleRegisters ReadCoils WriteMultipleCoils ReadDiscreteInputs Access to data via symbol Read, operation to read item list value Write, operation to write item list value Browse, operation to browse item list References: pages 3/22 and 3/23 3/7 3 Modicon® M340™ Automation Platform Presentation 0 Ethernet TCP/IP network, and communication services, and Transparent Ready® services Presentation BMX P34 2020 / 2030 processors, via their integrated Ethernet port (class 10) and the BMX NOE 0100/0110 network module (class 30) provide transparent communication on a single Ethernet TCP/IP network. Applications Transportation Network management SNMP Global Data FDR automatic reconfiguration RTPS DHCP TFTP Web server FTP UDP Messaging HTTP I/O Scanning Modbus MIB Transparent Ready Services TCP IP Link Ethernet 802.3 and Ethernet II Physical 3 In addition to universal Ethernet services (HTTP, BOOTP/DHCP, FTP, etc) and with the Modicon M340 automation platform, the Transparent Ready device communication services designed for use in automation applications include: b Modbus® TCP/IP messaging for class 10 or 30 devices b I/O Scanning service for class 30 devices b FDR (Faulty Device Replacement) for class 10 or 30 devices b SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) network management for class 10 or 30 devices b Global Data, for class 30 devices b Bandwidth management for class 10 or 30 devices The following pages present the various options available through all of these services to provide the optimum choice of solutions when defining a system integrating Transparent Ready devices. Presentation: pages 3/4 and 3/5 3/8 Performance: pages 3/16 to 3/21 Selection: pages 3/2 and 3/3 References: pages 3/22 and 3/23 Connections: pages 3/24 to 3/37 Modicon® M340™ Automation Platform Functions 0 Ethernet TCP/IP network, and communication services, and Transparent Ready® services Functions Ethernet universal services HTTP “Hypertext Transfer Protocol” (RFC1945) HTTP (Hypertext Transfer Protocol) is used to transmit Web pages between a server and a browser. HTTP has been used on the Web since 1990. Web servers embedded in Transparent Ready automation products provide easy access to products located anywhere in the world from a standard Internet browser such as Internet Explorer. BOOTP/DHCP (RFC1531) BOOTP/DHCP is used to supply devices with IP parameters automatically. This avoids having to manage each device address individually by transferring this management to a dedicated IP address server. The DHCP protocol (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) is used to assign configuration parameters to devices automatically. DHCP is an extension of BOOTP. The DHCP protocol consists of 2 components: b One to supply the IP network address. b One to supply the specific IP parameters to the device from a DHCP server. Telemecanique® devices can be: b BOOTP clients used to retrieve the IP address automatically from a server. b BOOTP servers allowing the device to distribute IP addresses to the network stations. Telemecanique® products use BOOTP/DHCP standard protocols to offer the FDR (Faulty Device Replacement) service. FTP “File Transfer Protocol” (RFCs 959, 2228, and 2640) File Transfer Protocol (FTP) provides the basic elements for file sharing. FTP is used by several systems to exchange files between devices. TFTP “Trivial File Transfer Protocol” (updated firmware) Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) is a network transfer protocol used to connect to a device and download code to it. For example, it can be used to transfer a boot code to a workstation without a disk drive or to connect and download updates of network device firmware. Note : Transparent Ready devices implement FTP and TFTP to transfer certain information to or from products, particularly for downloads of firmware or user-defined Web pages. Presentation: pages 3/4 and 3/5 Performance: pages 3/16 to 3/21 Selection: pages 3/2 and 3/3 References: pages 3/22 and 3/23 Connections: pages 3/24 to 3/37 3/9 3 Functions (continued) Modicon® M340™ Automation Platform Ethernet TCP/IP network, and communication services, and Transparent Ready® services Functions (continued) Ethernet universal services (continued) SNMP “Simple Network Management Protocol” (RFCs 1155, 1156 and 1157) The Internet community has developed the SNMP standard to manage the various network components via a single system. The network management system can exchange data with SNMP agent devices. This function allows the manager to display the status of the network and products, modify their configuration, and feed back alarms in the event of a fault. Note : Transparent Ready products are compatible with SNMP and can be integrated naturally into a network administered via SNMP. COM/DCOM “Distributed Component Object Model” COM/DCOM (Distributed Component Object Model) or OLE (Object Linking and Embedding) technology consists of Windows ® objects which enable transparent communication between Windows ® applications. 3 Nota : These technologies are used in the OFS (OLE for Process Control Factory Server) data server software. Presentation: pages 3/4 and 3/5 3/10 Performance: pages 3/16 to 3/21 Selection: pages 3/2 and 3/3 References: pages 3/22 and 3/23 Connections: pages 3/24 to 3/37 0 Functions (continued) Modicon® M340™ Automation Platform 0 Ethernet TCP/IP network, and communication services, and Transparent Ready® services Functions (continued) Modbus TCP/IP function codes dec hex Bit access Read n input bits 02 02 Read n output bits 01 01 Read exception status 07 07 Write 1 output bit 05 05 Write n output bits 15 0F Read 1 input word 04 04 Read n input words 03 03 Write 1 output word 06 06 Write n output words 16 10 Read device ID 43/14 2B/0E Examples of Modbus TCP/IP function codes for accessing data and diagnostics. Modbus® standard communication protocol Modbus, the industry communication standard since 1979, has been brought together with Ethernet TCP/IP, the medium for the Internet revolution, to form Modbus TCP/IP, a totally open protocol on Ethernet. The development of a connection to Modbus TCP/IP does not require any proprietary component nor the purchase of a license. This protocol can easily be combined with any product supporting a standard TCP/IP communication stack. The specifications are available free of charge from the following Web site: www.modbus-ida.org. Modbus TCP/IP, simple and open The Modbus application layer is simple and familiar, with its 9 million installed connections. Thousands of manufacturers are already using this protocol. Many have already developed a Modbus TCP/IP connection and numerous products are currently available. The simplicity of Modbus TCP/IP enables any field device, such as an I/O module, to communicate on Ethernet without the need for a powerful microprocessor or lots of internal memory. Modbus TCP/IP, high-performance Modbus TCP/IP offers excellent performance thanks to the simplicity of its protocol and the fast speed of the 100 Mbps Ethernet. This allows a Modbus TCP/IP network to be used in real-time applications such as I/O scanning. Modbus TCP/IP, a standard The application protocol is identical on serial link Modbus, Modbus TCP/IP or Modbus Plus™ networks. Messages can be routed from one network to the other without converting protocol. Since the Modbus network is implemented on top of the TCP/IP layer, users can also benefit from IP routing that enables devices located anywhere in the world to communicate regardless of the distance between them. Schneider Electric® offers a complete range of gateways for connecting a Modbus TCP/IP network to existing Modbus Plus™ networks, a Modbus serial link or AS-Interface bus. Please consult your local sales office. The IANA organization (Internet Assigned Numbers Authority) has allocated the fixed port TCP 502 (“Well known” port) to the Modbus protocol. Thus Modbus protocol has become an Internet standard. A study by the ARC Advisory Group, the market leader in analysis of the automation and software sectors, has shown that Modbus TCP/IP is the world-leading Ethernet industrial protocol in terms of units sold in 2004. Modbus and Modbus TCP/IP are recognized by the IEC 61158 international standard as a fieldbus. They also comply with the “Chinese National Standard” managed by ITEI. Interfacing CANopen with Modbus TCP/IP CiA DSP 309-2 provides standardized organization of CANopen data to be carried on a Modbus TCP/IP Ethernet network. The specification reserves the Modbus 43/13 function code for this purpose. This function code is reserved exclusively for CANopen. Characteristics of Modbus TCP/IP Maximum size of data: b Read: 125 words or registers b Write: 100 words or registers Presentation: pages 3/4 and 3/5 Performance: pages 3/16 to 3/21 Selection: pages3/2 and 3/3 References: pages 3/22 and 3/23 Connections: pages 3/24 to 3/37 3/11 3 Functions (continued) Modicon® M340™ Automation Platform 0 Ethernet TCP/IP network, and communication services, and Transparent Ready® services Functions (continued) I/O Scanning service Word table Read Modicon M340 Write Ethernet TCP/IP 3 Input words Output words of devices INPUT OUTPUT + – A B INPUT OUTPUT + – A B The I/O Scanning Service is used to manage the exchange of remote I/O states on the Ethernet network after simple configuration, without the need for any special programming. I/O scanning is performed transparently by means of read/write requests according to the Modbus® client/server protocol on the TCP/IP profile. This scanning principle via a standard protocol is used to communicate with any device supporting a Modbus server on TCP/IP. This service allows you to define: b A %MW word zone reserved for reading inputs. b A %MW word zone reserved for writing outputs. b Refresh periods independent of the PLC scan. During operation, the module: b Manages TCP/IP connections for each remote device. b Scans devices and copies the I/O to the configured %MW word zone. b Feeds back status words used to check that the service is working correctly from the PLC application. b Applies pre-configured fallback values if a communication problem occurs An offering is available of hardware and software products used to implement the I/O Scanning protocol on any type of device that can be connected to the Ethernet network (please consult the Modbus-IDA Web site: www.modbus-ida.org). Characteristics b Each Modicon M340 station can exchange a maximum of: v 100 write words v 125 read words b Maximum size in the Modicon M340 PLC that manages the service (64 stations max.): v with BMX NOE 0100/0110 network module, 2 %MW Kwords as inputs and 2 %MW Kwords as outputs v with BMX P34 2020/2030 processor, 512 %MW words as inputs and 512 %MW words as outputs Diagnostics of the I/O Scanning service There are 3 ways to perform diagnostics on the I/O Scanning service: b Via the application program from a specific PLC data zone. b From the setup software debug screen. b From the PLC system diagnostic function displayed using an internet browser on a PC station. b From the ConneXium ™ diagnostic software TCS EAZ 01P SFE10. b From the standard SNMP manager software. Presentation: pages 3/4 and 3/5 3/12 Performance: pages 3/16 to 3/21 Selection: pages 3/2 and 3/3 References: pages 3/22 and 3/23 Connections: pages 3/24 to 3/37 Functions (continued) Modicon® M340™ Automation Platform 0 Ethernet TCP/IP network, and communication services, and Transparent Ready® services Functions (continued) FDR (Faulty Device Replacement) service The faulty device replacement service uses standard address management technologies (BOOTP, DHCP) and the TFTP (Trivial File Transfer Protocol) file management service to simplify maintenance of Ethernet products. Using FDR, you can replace a faulty device with a new one that will then be detected, configured, and automatically rebooted by the system. The main steps in replacement are: 1 A device using the FDR service malfunctions. 2 Another similar device is taken from maintenance storage, preconfigured with the Device name for the faulty device, and installed on the network. Depending on the devices, addressing can be performed using rotary buttons (for example, Advantys™ STB distributed I/O system, a or Advantys™ OTB distributed I/O system) or can be given via the keypad integrated in the device (for example Altivar ® adjustable speed drives). 3 The FDR server detects the new device, allocates it an IP address, and transfers the configuration parameters to it. 4 The substituted device checks that all these parameters are ompatible with its own characteristics and switches to operational mode. a The FDR server can be: v A Modicon M340 Ethernet module, BMX NOE 0100/0110 v A Modicon® Premium™ Ethernet module, TSX ETY 4103/5103 v A Modicon® Quantum™ PLC Ethernet module, 140 NOE 771 01/771 11 v A Modicon Premium processor with integrated Ethernet port, TSX P57 ppppM v A Modicon Quantum processor with integrated Ethernet port, 140 CPU 651 50/60 “NIM” network module for Advantys STB I/O Presentation: pages 3/4 and 3/5 Performance: pages 3/16 to 3/21 Selection: pages 3/2 and 3/3 References: pages 3/22 and 3/23 Connections: pages 3/24 to 3/37 3/13 3 Functions (continued) Modicon® M340™ Automation Platform Ethernet TCP/IP network, and communication services, and Transparent Ready® services Functions (continued) Global Data service Distribution group 1 Data exchange 4 Kb max. IP multicast 239.255.255.251 Modicon Premium Modicon Quantum Ethernet TCP/IP Modicon M340 3 Modicon Premium IP multicast 239.255.255.250 Data exchange 4 Kb max. Distribution group 2 The Global Data service exchanges data in real time between stations belonging to the same distribution group. It is used to synchronize remote applications, or even to share a common database between a number of distributed applications. Exchanges are based on a producer/consumer type standard protocol, avoiding optimum performances with a minimum load on the network. This RTPS (Real Time Publisher Subscriber) protocol is promoted by Modbus-IDA (Interface for Distributed Automation), and is already a standard adopted by several manufacturers. Characteristics A maximum of 64 stations can participate in Global Data within a single distribution group. Each station can: b Publish 1 variable of 1024 bytes. The publication period can be configured from 1 to n processor master task (Mast) periods. b Subscribe between 1 and 64 variables. The validity of each variable is controlled by status bits (Health Status bits) linked to a refresh time-out configurable between 50 ms and 1 s. Access to an element of the variable is not possible. The total size of subscribed variables amounts to 4 contiguous Kbytes. To further optimize the performance of the Ethernet network, Global Data can be configured with the “multicast filtering” option which, combined with switches in the ConneXium ™ range (see pages 3/26 to 3/33), distribute data only to Ethernet ports where there is a station subscribed to the Global Data service. If these switches are not used, Global Data is sent in “multicast” mode to all switch ports. Global Data service diagnostics The diagnostic screens show the status of Global Data using a color code: b Configured/not configured/faulty b Published/subscribed Presentation: pages 3/4 and 3/5 3/14 Performance: pages 3/16 to 3/21 Selection: pages 3/2 and 3/3 References: pages 3/22 and 3/23 Connections: pages 3/24 to 3/37 0 Functions (continued) Modicon® M340™ Automation Platform 0 Ethernet TCP/IP network, and communication services, and Transparent Ready® services Functions (continued) SNMP network management service From a network management station, SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) monitors and checks all components of the Ethernet architecture, ensuring quick diagnostics in the event of a problem. It is used to: b Interrogate network components such as computer stations, routers, switches, bridges, or terminal devices to display their status. b Obtain statistics about the network on which devices are connected. This network management software adheres to the conventional client/server model. However, to avoid confusion with other communication protocols that use this terminology, we talk instead about: b ConneXview network diagnostics software, TCS EAZ 01P SFE10. For more information, please consult our “Machines & Installations with industrial communications” catalog. b Network manager for the client application that operates on the computer station. b SNMP agent for the network device server application Transparent Ready devices can be managed by any SNMP network manager, including the HP Openview and IBM® Netview®. Automatic recognition of IP devices via the ConneXview diagnostic software for Ethernet industrial networks The SNMP managers standard protocol is used for access to configuration and management objects that are contained in the device MIB (Management Information Base). These MIBs must comply with certain standards to be accessed by any commercially available manager, but depending on the complexity of products, manufacturers can add certain objects to private databases. The Transparent Ready private MIB presents management objects specific to the Telemecanique® offering. These objects simplify the installation, setup and maintenance of Transparent Ready devices in an open environment using standard network management tools. Transparent Ready devices support 2 levels of SNMP network management: b The Standard MIB II interface: An initial level of network management is accessible via this interface. It enables the manager to identify the devices making up the architecture and retrieve general information on the configuration and operation of Ethernet TCP/IP interfaces. b The Transparent Ready MIB interface: the management of Transparent Ready devices is improved via this interface. The MIB data set enables the network management system to supervise all the Transparent Ready services. The Transparent Ready MIB can be downloaded from the FTP server of any Transparent Ready Ethernet module in a PLC. Presentation: pages 3/4 and 3/5 Performance: pages 3/16 to 3/21 Selection: pages 3/2 and 3/3 References: pages 3/22 and 3/23 Connections: pages 3/24 to 3/37 3/15 3 Modicon® M340™ Automation Platform Performance Ethernet TCP/IP network, and Transparent Ready® Services — Performance Selecting the communication architecture When choosing an architecture, be sure to consider the required performance as early as possible. To do this, developers must: 1 Know exactly what they need: v quantity and type of devices to be connected to one another v volume and type of exchanges v expected response times v environment 2 Compare their needs with the characteristics of the available offering, being aware that the actual performance level between any 2 points in an architecture depends on the weakest link in the chain, which may: v depend on the hardware v but also depend on the applications (size, architecture, operating system, machine power rating, etc) which are often only vaguely defined at this stage of the project. 3 Work out from this which is the most suitable architecture. 3 The purpose of the next few pages is to provide the main information and instructions needed to answer the second point. Given that the performance of an Ethernet architecture is linked to several parameters, these pages do not supply all the information needed to calculate the network performance. Their purpose is to focus on the following main aspects: b Instructions for calculating the network load to assist in designing an Ethernet network that meets the demands of the applications. b Application response time to be obtained depending on the configuration used. See page 3/17 to 3/19. b Processing capacities of Modicon ® M340™ , Modicon® Premium™ and Modicon ® Quantum™ platforms used to select the processor and define the number of Ethernet connections required on the PLC, depending on the application. See pages 3/20 and 3/21.®™ Calculating the network load Introduction When calculating the load on an Ethernet network, the designer must consider all the communication services of all the peripheral devices connected to the network. Because of the outstanding performance of the Ethernet network, the load is often less than the limits of the Ethernet network and does not greatly affect the application response time. This phenomenon is explained by the high speed of the Ethernet network: the network transaction time is 10% less than the application response time. To ensure a low network load and avoid large theoretical calculations, the designer should separate the collision domain so as to limit the network load, using only the switched network (tree, star, or daisy-chain topology). Presentation: pages 3/4 and 3/5 3/16 Functions: pages 3/9 to 3/15 Selection: pages 3/2 and 3/3 References: pages 3/22 and 3/23 Connections: pages 3/24 to 3/37 0 Performance Modicon® M340™ Automation Platform (continued) 0 Ethernet TCP/IP network, and Transparent Ready® Services — Performance Application response time Event Report TT CT1 CT1 CT1 NAT Station 1 CT1 NAT CT2 CT2 Station 2 The network access time (NAT) appearing in the table below in ms, is the sum of the module transit time and the waiting time before the message can be sent on the network. ®™ Action Processing Modbus TCP/IP message requests 3 Network access time NAT Modbus® messaging (or Uni-TE) service response time Exchanges between the PLC processor and the Ethernet module are synchronous with the PLC scan time, just like the I/O exchanges. On occurrence of an event (for example an input set to state 1), the message is sent on the start of the next cycle. Execution of the PLC program (Modicon® M340™ , Modicon® Premium™ or Modicon® Quantum™ PLC) are on average around 1.5 cycle times after occurrence of the event. Modicon M340 BMX NOE 0100 BMX NOE 0110 BMX P34 2020 BMX P34 2030 Modicon Premium TSX ETY 210 TSX ETY 110WS < 10 ms < 10 ms < 25 ms TSX ETY 4103/5103 TSX WMY 100 TSX P57 10...57 50 < 10 ms Modicon Quantum 140 NOE 771 01/111 140 CPU 113/311 pp 140 CPU 434/534 1p < 10 ms 140 CPU 65 150/160 140 CPU 67 160 3 < 10 ms The transaction time TT integrates the delay between the sending of a message from a client station 1, its reception by the server station 2, the processing of the request, the sending the response, and its being accounted for by the station 1 (updating an output for example). As shown in the above block diagram: b The transaction time TT should be between: 2 x CT1 + 2 x NAT < TT < 4 x CT1 + CT2 + 2 x NAT b The average duration TTav is equivalent to: TTav = 3 x CT1 + 0.5 x CT2 + 2 x NAT Global Data service response time Synchro pulse Synchro feedback Transaction time TT CT CT Publication NAT Subscription CT Presentation: pages 3/4 and 3/5 CT Station 1 NAT Publication CT Station 2 Performances: pages 3/16 to 3/21 The transaction time TT integrates the delay between publication of a Global Data service by station 1, its reception, and processing by the remote station, 2 and its being resent to the initial station 1: For an exchanged variable: b If CT < 5 ms, transaction time: TT = 5 to 6 x CT b If CT u 10 ms, transaction time: TT = 3 x CT Selection: pages 3/2 and 3/3 References: pages 3/22 and 3/23 Connections: pages 3/24 to 3/37 3/17 Modicon® M340™ Automation Platform Performance (continued) 0 Ethernet TCP/IP network, and Transparent Ready® Services — Performance Application response time (continued) CT Manager Ethernet TCP/IP I/O Scanning service response time The response time RT includes the time between accounting for a remote input and updating the state of a remote output. It includes the processing time in the PLC. RT This response time RT consists of the following parameters: Hub Input Device 1 Output Device 2 Input TMod I TIOS I TNet N x cycle T TIOS Q TNet TMod Q Output Response time (RT) 3 v TMod In and TMod Out: Response time of the read/written device, excluding the electrical transit time at the input/output (TMod depends on the device, usually between 1 and 8 ms) v TIOS In and TIOS Out: Time between 2 read/write operations on the same device (0.3 ms x number of scanned devices), at least equivalent to the configured scan time As TIOS is executed in parallel with the PLC scan, it can be hidden with respect to the response time RT). v Cycle T: PLC scan time. v TNet : propagation time on the network (depending on the application, usually TNet = 0.05 ms at 10 Mbit/s and 0.005 ms at 100 Mbit/s). The response time RT can be estimated with the following 3 formulas: b RT min, minimum response time with TIOS hidden and 1 PLC scan: RTmin = (TMod In + 0) x TIOS In + (Tnet + N) x cycle T + (0 x TIOS Out) + Tnet + TMod Out b RT typ., typical response time with 0.5 TIOS hidden: RTtyp. = ((TMod In + 0,5) x TIOS In + (Tnet + N) x Cycle T + ( 0,5 x TIOS Out) + Tnet + TMod Out b RT max, maximum response time with TIOS not hidden: RTmax = TMod In + TIOS In + (Tnet + N) x Cycle T + TIOS Out + Tnet + TMod Out Presentation: pages 3/4 and 3/5 3/18 Performances: pages 3/16 to 3/21 Selection: pages 3/2 and 3/3 References: pages 3/22 and 3/23 Connections: pages 3/24 to 3/37 Performance (continued) Modicon® M340™ Automation Platform 0 Ethernet TCP/IP network, and Transparent Ready® Services — Performance Application response time (continued) I/O Scanning service response time (continued) Below are the TMod In and TMod Out response times: Type of distributed I/O Momentum 170 ENT 110 02 Response time TMod In TMod Out TMod In TMod Out TMod In TMod Out Momentum 170 ENT 110 01 Advantys STB STB NIP 2212 Min. 1 ms 5 ms 4 ms 4 ms 2 ms 2 ms Typical 1 ms 5 ms 6 ms 6 ms 3 ms 3 ms Max. 1 ms 5 ms 8 ms 8 ms 4 ms 4 ms Below are the TIOS In/TIOS Out times measured between 2 scan cycles (Ethernet network with switches) Time (ms) 25 20 3 3 15 10 5 0 1 5 10 20 30 40 50 60 No. of scanned devices Below is the number of processor cycles N: Number of processor cycles N Number of processor cycles N Modicon® M340™ platform with modules: BMX NOE 0100 and BMX NOE 0110 Modicon® Premium™ platform with modules: TSX ETY 4103 and TSX ETY 5103 Modicon® Quantum™ platform with modules: 140 NOE 771 01 and 140 NOE 771 11 Modicon® M340™ processors: BMX P34 2020 and BMX P34 2030 Modicon® Premium™ processors: TSX P57 26/3634M, TSX P57 26/2823M and TSX P57 36/4823AM Modicon® Premium™ processors: TSX P57 4634M and 5634M Modicon® Quantum™ processors: 140 CPU 651 50 and 140 CPU 651 60 Min. Min. 2 Typical Typical 2.5 Max. Max. 3 1 1 2 ®™ Presentation: pages 3/4 and 3/5 Performances: pages 3/16 to 3/21 Selection: pages 3/2 and 3/3 References: pages 3/22 and 3/23 Connections: pages 3/24 to 3/37 3/19 Modicon® M340™ Automation Platform Performance (continued) 0 Ethernet TCP/IP network, and Transparent Ready® Services — Performance Processing capacities of Modicon® platforms Processing capacity Use the table below to compare, for each station, the total number of messages received on the Modbus® messaging service (or Uni-TE), if used (value R1, R2 or Ri), with the station processor capacity. Processing Modbus requests for each PLC scan Modicon M340, Modicon® Premium ™ /Atrium ™ PLC platforms Messages received Communication using EFs or EFBs (PL7™ or Unity Pro™ software) Total messages received by the TSX 57 10 4 messages/cycle PLC from all the communication BMX P34 20/TSX 57 20 8 messages/cycle modules (1) TSX 57 30 12 messages/cycle TSX 57 40 16 messages/cycle 16/20 messages/cycle TSX 57 50 (2) Modicon Quantum platform Limitations of the communication modules All types of Additional communiread/write 4x cation registers requests 140 CPU 113 (3) 1message/ 4 messages/ cycle cycle 140 CPU 311 – – 1message/ 4 messages/ cycle cycle – 4 messages/ 8 messages/ 140 CPU 434/534 – cycle cycle 140 CPU 651 16 messages/ 16 messages/ 4 messages/ 8 messages/ cycle cycle cycle cycle messages/cycle: number of messages received per cycle from the PLC master task (typical cycle of 50 to 100 ms) 3 Limitations of the integrated port All types of Additional communiread/write 4x cation registers request – – Ethernet modules per PLC max. 2 max. 2 max. 6 max. 6 Example: Quantum 140 CPU 434 12p processor with 4 Ethernet 140 NOE 771 p1 modules: - 20 messages/cycle for all types of communication requests, and - 32 messages/cycle for the read/write 4x registers Ethernet transaction processing capacity Compare, for each station, the total number of messages received Σ [values Ri, Rj] and the total number of messages sent Σ [values Ei, Ej] (for example, for station N) with the Ethernet transaction processing capacity indicated below. Use the elements below for the Ethernet connection per PLC, rather than the number of transactions required by the application. Ethernet transaction processing capacity Modbus® messaging I/O Scanning service Publication of Global Data Modicon M340 BMX NOE 0100 P34 2020 NOE 0110 P34 2030 450 transactions/s 2,000 transactions/s 800 transactions/s 200 transactions/s Service not available Modicon Premium TSX ETY 210 ETY 4103/5103 ETY 110WS WMY 100 (4) P57 10/20/30/40 60 transactions/s 450 transactions/s Service not 2,000 available transactions/s 800 transactions/s P57 50 Modicon Quantum140 NOE 771 01/11 CPU 65 150/160 NWM 100 00 (4) CPU 67 160 500 transactions/s 2,000 transactions/s 800 transactions/s 350 transactions/s 2,000 transactions/s 800 transactions/s 350 transactions/s 2,000 transactions/s 800 transactions/s (1) A temporary overload — due, for example, to an adjustment terminal or the temporary connection of an Internet browser — on which a few PLC scans are permitted. (2) Only with Unity Pro ™ software. (3) Only with Concept™ /ProWORX™ software. (4) Module not featuring I/O Scanning and Global Data services (TSX WMY 100 and 140 NWM 100 00). Presentation: pages 3/4 and 3/5 3/20 Performances: pages 3/16 to 3/21 Selection: pages 3/2 and 3/3 References: pages 3/22 and 3/23 Connections: pages 3/24 to 3/37 Performance (continued) Modicon® M340™ Automation Platform 0 Ethernet TCP/IP network, and Transparent Ready® Services — Performance Processing capacities of Modicon® platforms (continued) Maximum number of simultaneous TCP/IP connections The maximum number of simultaneous TCP/IP connections depends on the platform as well as the type of connection to the Ethernet network: b The 10/100BASE-TX port in network modules. b The 10/100BASE-TX port integrated in processors. Number of Modicon M340 simultaneous TCP/IP BMX NOE 0100 connections BMX NOE 0110 Client Server 16 16 BMX P34 2020 BMX P34 2030 16 16 Modicon Premium TSX ETY 210 TSX ETY 110WS Modicon Quantum TSX ETY 4103/5103 140 NOE 771 01/11 140 CPU 65 150 TSX WMY 100 140 CPU 113/311 pp 140 CPU 65 160 TSX P57 10...57 50 140 CPU 434/534 14B 32 16 (1) 16 (1) 16 (1) 64 (1) 64 (1) 64 (1) (1) With 64 simultaneous TCP/IP connections maximum (clients and servers). Managing the passband of Ethernet TCP/IP modules 3 The passband management service indicates the load level of the Ethernet network module. This allows the user to monitor any drift and anticipate any problems. The Ethernet module load is indicated in 3 ways: b Expected load in the Unity Pro™ /PL7™ configuration screen. b Actual load in the Unity Pro/PL7 diagnostics/debug screen, as well as in the diagnostics pages via the Web. It is displayed in the form of a bar chart animated in real time. b In the SNMP interface for access by the SNMP network manager. The passband is indicated as a percentage for each of the following services: b Modbus® messaging (and Uni-TE) b I/O Scanning b Global Data b Other Ethernet solutions with the Modicon® M340™ platform The M340 PLC has 2 types of connection to the Ethernet network: b The 10/100BASE-TX port integrated in BMX P34 2020/2030 Performance processors, which also process the application, exchanges with other modules supported by the rack and other communication ports (CANopen bus or Modbus serial link). b The 10/100BASE-TX port in the BMX NOE 0100 and BMX NOE 0110 modules on which, unlike the Performance processor, all the resources are allocated to Ethernet TCP/IP communication. Ethernet port integrated in the BMX P34 2020/2030 Presentation: pages 3/4 and 3/5 or Ethernet module BMX NOE 0100/0110 Performances: pages 3/16 to 3/21 These fundamentally different hardware characteristics result in equally different capacities in terms of service, and performance: b The integrated port is a low-cost way of satisfying applications that have minimal demands in terms of communication (less than 500 useful messages/s) in environments little affected by interference. b Where there are a large number of exchanges, or network capacity approaches its limitation, use of a dedicated module is unavoidable. Selection: pages 3/2 and 3/3 References: pages 3/22 and 3/23 Connections: pages 3/24 to 3/37 3/21 3 Product data sheet Modicon® M340™ Automation Platform 0 Processors with integrated Ethernet port Description 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 3 BMX P34 2020 and BMX P34 2030 Modicon M340 processors with integrated Ethernet port have the following on the front panel: 1 Securing screw for locking the module in its slot (marked 0) in the rack 2 A display unit including at minimum 3 LEDs relating to the Ethernet port: v ETH ACT LED (green): Activity on the Ethernet TCP/IP network v ETH STS LED (green): Ethernet TCP/IP network status v ETH 100 LED (red): Data rate on the Ethernet TCP/IP network (10 or 100 Mbit/s) 3 A mini B USB connector for a programming terminal (or Magelis® XBT GT operator interface) 4 A slot equipped with its Flash memory card for saving the application and activating the standard Transparent Ready® Web server, class B10. 5 An RJ45 connector for connection to the 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX Ethernet TCP/IP network Also included, depending on the model: 6 BMX P34 2020 processor: An RJ45 connector for the Modbus® serial link or character mode link (RS 232C/RS 485, 2-wire, non-isolated) 7 BMX P34 2030 processor: A 9-pin SUB-D connector for the master CANopen machine and installation bus On the back panel: 2 rotary switches for assigning the IP address in one of 3 modes: v address set by the position of the two rotary switches v address set by the application parameters v address set by the Ethernet TCP/IP BOOTP server Characteristics Module type Unity Pro™ software Transparent Class Ready Standard Web server services Structure Modicon M340 processor Standard Ethernet TCP/IP communication service Ethernet TCP/IP I/O Scanning advanced Global Data communication FDR Client services SMTP E-mail notification SNMP network administrator SOAP/XML Web services Bandwidth management Physical interface Data rate Medium No. of discrete I/O No. of analog I/O No. of application-specific channels Max. no. of Ethernet TCP/IP connections Other integrated communication ports Operating temperature Relative humidity Degree of protection Power supply Conformity to standards LED indicators BMX P34 2020 BMX P34 2030 B10 Rack Viewer access to the product description and status and to the PLC diagnostics Data Editor access to the configuration functions and PLC variables Modbus TCP messaging (read/write data words) – – Automatic assignment of IP address and network parameters – Yes No Yes 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX (RJ45) 10/100 Mbit/s with automatic recognition Twisted pair 1024 256 36 2 (integrated port and BMX NOE 0100/0110 network module) Modbus serial link or character mode CANopen bus 0…+ 60 °C 10...95% non-condensing during operation IP 20 Via the power supply of the rack supporting the processor IEC/EN 61131-2, UL 508, CSA 22.2 n°142, CSA 22.2 n°213 Class 1 Division 2, e Activity on the Ethernet TCP/IP network (ETH ACT, green) Status of the Ethernet TCP/IP network (ETH STS, green) Data rate on the 10 or 100 Mbit/s Ethernet TCP/IP network, (ETH 100, red) 4 LEDs specific to processor operation (RUN, ERR, I/O, CARD ERR) 1 or 2 LEDs specific to the other communication ports (SER COM or CAN RUN and CAN ERR) (1) References Description I/O capacity Memory capacity Processors with 1024 discrete I/O 256 analog I/O integrated 36 app-sp. channels Ethernet link Other integrated Reference communication ports Modbus serial link or BMXP342020 character mode CANopen bus BMXP342030 4096 Kb integrated Transparent Ready Web server, class B10 BMX P34 2020 3/22 BMX P34 2030 (1) SER COM for serial link or CAN RUN and CAN ERR for CANopen bus. Weight kg 0.205 0.215 Product data sheet (continued) Modicon® M340™ Automation Platform 0 Ethernet network module Presentation The BMX NOE 0100 and BMX NOE 0100 modules are a standard module occupying a single slot in the rack of the Modicon M340 platform equipped with a Standard processor or associated Performance processor (maximum of 1 module per configuration) 1 2 3 4 5 Description The BMX NOE 01p0 module has the following on the front panel: 1 Securing screw for locking the module in its slot in the rack 2 A display unit consisting of 6 LEDs, including 3 relating to the Ethernet port: v ETH ACT LED (green): Activity on the Ethernet TCP/IP network v ETH STS LED (green): Ethernet TCP/IP network status v ETH 100 LED (red): Data rate on the Ethernet TCP/IP network (10 or 100 Mbit/s) 3 A slot equipped with its Flash memory card for application saving and activating the standard Web server, Transparent Ready® Web server, class B30 or C30 depending on model 4 An RJ45 connector for connection to the 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX Ethernet TCP/IP network 5 A pencil-point RESET button for a cold restart of the module On the back panel: 2 rotary switches for assigning the IP address in one of 3 modes: v address set by the position of the two rotary switches v address set by the application parameters v address set by the Ethernet TCP/IP network BOOTP server Characteristics Module type Unity Pro™ software Transparent Class Ready Standard Web server services Structure Network module Configurable Web server User Web pages (available size) Standard Ethernet TCP/IP communication service I/O Scanning Ethernet TCP/IP advanced Global Data communication FDR server services SMTP E-mail notification SNMP network administrator SOAP/XML Web services Bandwidth management Physical interface Data rate Medium Operating temperature Relative humidity Degree of protection Power supply Conformity to standards LED indicators BMX NOE 0100 BMX NOE 0110 B30 C30 Rack Viewer access to the product description and status and to the PLC diagnostics Data Editor access to PLC variable via Data Editor access to PLC variable via PC terminal PC terminal, pocket PC or PDA terminal Yes Yes – Yes (16 Mb) Modbus® TCP messaging (read/write data words) Yes Yes Automatic assignment of IP address and network parameters – Yes – Server Yes 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX (RJ45) 10/100 Mbit/s with automatic recognition Twisted pair 0…+ 60 °C 10...95% non-condensing during operation IP 20 Via the power supply of the rack supporting the processor IEC/EN 61131-2, UL 508, CSA 22.2 n°142, CSA 22.2 n°213 Class 1 Division 2, e Activity on the Ethernet TCP/IP network (ETH ACT, green) State of the Ethernet TCP/IP network (ETH STS, green) Data rate on the 10 or 100 Mbit/s Ethernet TCP/IP network, (ETH 100, red) 3 LEDs specific to module operation (RUN, ERR, CARD ERR) References Description Data rate Ethernet TCP/IP 10/100 Mbit/s network module BMX NOE 0100/0110 Transparent Ready Reference class B30 BMXNOE0100 C30 BMXNOE0110 r Weight kg 0.200 0.200 r Available 4 th quarter 2007 Before this date, please order the BMX NOE 0100 Ethernet module with BMX RWS C016M memory card, same services except Data editor service with pocket PC or PDA terminal and SOAP/XML Web services. 3/23 3 Wiring system Ethernet in Machines and Installations 0 Infrastructure Presentation The Ethernet cable provides all cable options to wire IP20 and IP67 devices using copper as well as fiber optics. Examples Combined IP20 and IP67 wiring, copper 1, 3 1, 3 3 8 8 2, 4 2, 4 1, 3 1, 3 1, 3 1, 3 For key: 1, 3: Straight cables, 2, 4: Crossed cord cables, 8: Cables with IP 67 connector, see pages 3/26 and 3/27. 3/24 Ethernet in Machines and Installations Wiring system 0 Infrastructure Examples (continued) Combined Copper and Fiber wiring Internet MES Client Firewall Server Copper link Router 3 5, 6, 7 Fiber link 2, 4 2, 4 Copper link 2, 4 Magelis 1, 3 2, 4 1, 3 1, 3 2, 4 1, 3 2, 4 1, 3 1, 3 2, 4 2, 4 Preventa safety PLC Altivar 71 Twido 1, 3 1, 3 1, 3 1, 3 Quantum Advantys STB 1, 3 Magelis 8 1, 3 Altivar 71 1, 3 Premium Ositrack Quantum FactoryCast gateway Managed switch Hub or unmanaged switch Modbus For key: 1, 3: Straight cables, 2, 4: Crossed cord cables, 5, 6, 7: Fiber optic cables, 8: Cables with IP 67 connector, see pages 3/26 and 3/27 3/25 Wiring system (continued) Ethernet in Machines and Installations 0 Ethernet TCP/IP, Transparent Ready® Services Cabling system: ConneXium™ connection components Shielded copper connection cables ConneXium shielded connection cables are available in two versions to meet the various current standards and approvals: b EIA/TIA 568 standard shielded twisted pair cables These cables conform to: v EIA/TIA-568 standard, category CAT 5E, v IEC 11801/EN 50173 standard, class D. Their fire resistance conforms to: v NFC 32070# C2 classification v IEC 322/1 standards v Low Smoke Zero Halogen (LSZH). b UL and CSA 22.1 approved shielded twisted pair cables These cables conform to: v UL and CSA 22.1 standards Their fire resistance conforms to NFPA 70. EIA/TIA 568 standard shielded twisted pair cables Description 3 Preformed at both ends Rep. Reference Straight cables 2 RJ45 connectors 1 For connection to terminal devices (DTE) Length m (ft.) 2 (6.6) 5 (16.4) 12 (39.4) 40 (131.2) 80 (262.5) 2 2 RJ45 connectors For connections between hubs, switches and transceivers 5 (16.4) 15 (49.2) 40 (131.2) 80 (262.5) 490NTC00005 490NTC00015 490NTC00040 490NTC00080 490 NTp 000 pp Crossed cord cables 490NTW00002 490NTW00005 490NTW00012 490NTW00040 490NTW00080 Weight kg – – – – – – – – – UL and CSA 22.1 approved shielded twisted pair cables Description Preformed at both ends Rep Length Reference Straight cables 2 RJ45 connectors 3 For connection to terminal devices (DTE) 2 (6.6) 5 (16.4) 12 (39.4) 40 (131.2) 80 (262.5) 490NTW00002U 490NTW00005U 490NTW00012U 490NTW00040U 490NTW00080U Weight kg – – – – – Crossed cord cables 5 (16.4) 15 (49.2) 40 (131.2) 80 (262.5) 490NTC00005U 490NTC00015U 490NTC00040U 490NTC00080U – – – – Length Reference 5 5 (16.4) 490NOC00005 Weight kg – 1 ST connector (BFOC) 1 MT-RJ connector 6 5 (16.4) 490NOT00005 – 2 MT-RJ connectors 7 3 (9.8) 490NOR00003 5 (16.4) 490NOR00005 15 (49.2) 490NOR00015 – – – 2 RJ45 connectors 4 For connections between hubs, switches and transceivers Glass fiber optic cables MT-RJ SC 490 NOC 000 05 These glass fiber optics are for making connections: b To a terminal device (DTE) b Between hubs, transceivers and switches Description Preformed at both ends Rep. Glass fiber optic 1 SC connector cables 1 MT-RJ connector MT-RJ ST 490 NOT 000 05 MT-RJ MT-RJ 490 NOR 000 05 3/26 Wiring system (continued) Ethernet in Machines and Installations 0 Ethernet TCP/IP, Transparent Ready® Services Cabling system: ConneXium™ connection components Separate parts for TCS ESM switches Description TCS EAA F1LFp 00 Optical fiber Fiber optic Multimode 50/125µm modules for or 62.5/125µm Gigabit ports with Single mode 9/125µm LC connector (1) Multimode 50/125µm or 62.5/125µm Single mode 62.5/125µm Configuration backup key Type Reference 1000BASE-SX TCSEAAF1LFU00 Weight kg 0.040 1000BASE-LH TCSEAAF1LFH00 0.040 1000BASE-LX TCSEAAF1LFS00 0.040 Via the USB port on the front of the switch, used to: - save and retrieve the switch configuration - update the internal software TCSEAM0100 – (1) Dimensions W x H X D = 20 x 18 x 50 mm. 3 Connection components for IP 67 switch Description Copper cables Preformed at both ends 1 IP 67 4-pin M12 connector and 1 RJ45 connector Rep. Length m (ft.) 8 1 (3.3) 1.5 (4.9) 3 (9,8) 5 (16.4) 10 (32.8) 25 (82) 40 (131.2) Reference 2 IP 67 4-pin M12 connectors – 1 (3.3) 1.5 (4.9) 3 (9,8) 5 (16.4) 10 (32.8) 25 (82) 40 (131.2) TCSECL1M1M1S2 TCSECL1M1M1X5S2 TCSECL1M1M3S2 TCSECL1M1M5S2 TCSECL1M1M10S2 TCSECL1M1M25S2 TCSECL1M1M40S2 – – – – – – – – TCSEC1M3M1S2 TCSECL1M3M1X5S2 TCSECL1M3M3S2 TCSECL1M3M5S2 TCSECL1M3M10S2 TCSECL1M3M25S2 TCSECL1M3M40S2 Weight kg – – – – – – M12/RJ45 adapter IP 67 female 4-pin M12 – connector and female RJ45 connector – TCSEAAF11F13F00 – Power cables Female M12 straight connector – Female M12 elbowed connector – 2 (6.6) 5 (16.4) 2.5 (8.2) 5 (16.4) XZCP1164L2 XZCP1164L5 XZCP1264L2 XZCP1264L5 – – – – Female M12 straight connector Female M12 elbowed connector – – XZCC12FDM50B – – – XZCC12FCM50B – Power connectors 3/27 Ethernet in Machines and Installations Ethernet TCP/IP, Transparent Ready® Services Cabling system: ConneXium™ hub Presentation Hubs (concentrators) are used for transmitting signals between several media (ports). Hubs are plug and play devices that require no configuration. The use of hubs makes it possible to create the following topologies: b Star topology using hubs b Tree topology using hubs Consult our catalog “Ethernet TCP/IP and Web technologies, Transparent Ready”. Hub DTE DTE Hub Hub DTE Star topology DTE Hub DTE DTE Tree topology 3 Characteristics and reference Hubs Interfaces Topology Copper cable ports Number and type Shielded connectors Medium Total length of pair Fiber optic ports Number and type 4 x 10BASE-T ports RJ45 Shielded twisted pair, category CAT 5E 100 m – Number of cascaded hubs Number of hubs in a ring max. 4 – P1 and P2 redundant power supplies Redundancy Power supply Voltage Power consumption Removable connector Operating temperature Relative humidity Degree of protection Dimensions Mounting Weight Conformity to standards LED indicators Alarm relay Reference 3/28 WxHxD 24 V c (18…32), safety extra low voltage (SELV) 80 mA (130 max. at 24 V c) 5-pin 0…+ 60 °C 10…95% non-condensing IP 30 40 x 125 x 80 mm On symmetrical DIN rail, 35 mm wide 0.530 kg cUL 60950, UL 508 and CSA 142, UL 1604 and CSA 213 Class 1 Division 2, e, GL FM 3810, FM 3611 Class 1 Division 2 Power supply, activity, link Power supply fault, Ethernet network fault or communication port fault (1 A max. voltage-free contact at 24 V c) 499 NEH 104 10 0 Product data sheet Ethernet in Machines and Installations 0 Ethernet TCP/IP, Transparent Ready® Services Cabling system: ConneXium™ transceivers Presentation The use of ConneXium transceivers makes it possible to perform the following: b Creation of linear fiber optic bus topologies, for products with twisted-pair cable Ethernet connection. b Interfacing products with twisted-pair cable Ethernet connection with a fiber optic cable. Transceivers are plug and play devices that requires no configuration. Consult our catalog “Ethernet TCP/IP and Web technologies, Transparent Ready”. ConneXium transceivers provide fiber optic connections for transmission in areas subject to interference (high levels of electromagnetic interference) and for long distance communications. DTE 3 DTE DTE Linear topology on optical fiber Characteristics and reference Transceivers Interfaces Copper cable ports Fiber optic ports Number and type Shielded connectors Medium Total length of pair Number and type Connectors Medium Length of optical fiber 50/125 µm fiber 62.2/125 µm fiber Attenuation analysis 50/125 µm fiber 62.2/125 µm fiber Redundancy Power supply Voltage Power consumption Removable connector Operating temperature Relative humidity Degree of protection Dimensions WxHxD Mounting Weight Conformity to standards LED indicators Alarm relay Reference 1 x 100BASE-TX port RJ45 Shielded twisted pair, category CAT 5E 100 m 1 x 100BASE-FX port SC Multimode optical fiber 3000 m (1) 3000 m (1) 8 dB 11 dB P1 and P2 redundant power supplies 24 V c (18…32), safety extra low voltage (SELV) 160 mA (190 max. at 24 V c) 5-pin 0…+ 60 °C 10…95% non-condensing IP 20 47 x 135 x 111 mm On symmetrical DIN rail, 35 mm wide 0.230 kg cUL 60950, UL 508 and CSA 142, UL 1604 and CSA 213 Class 1 Division 2, e, GL P1 and P2 power supplies, Ethernet link/port status Power supply fault, Ethernet network fault or communication port fault (1 A max. voltage-free contact at 24 V c) 499 NTR 101 00 (1) Length depends on the attenuation analysis and attenuation of the optical fiber (typical value: 2000 m). 3/29 Ethernet in Machines and Installations Product data sheet Ethernet TCP/IP, Transparent Ready® Services Cabling system: ConneXium™ unmanaged switches Presentation DTE DTE DTE DTE DTE DTE DTE DTE DTE Collision domain 1 DTE Collision domain 2 DTE DTE DTE DTE 100 Mbps optical ring Switches are used to increase the limits of architectures based on hubs or transceivers, by separating collision domains. Higher layer communication is provided between the ports, and collisions at link layer are not propagated (filtering). They therefore improve performance by better allocation of the pass band due to the reduction of collisions and the network load. Certain ConneXium switch models also enable redundant architectures to be created on twisted pair copper ring or fiber optic. DTE Collision domain 3 3 DTE DTE DTE DTE DTE DTE Switches are plug and play devices that requires no configuration. They can also be managed remotely via the SNMP or HTTP protocols for monitoring and diagnostics purposes. Characteristics and references: twisted pair Switches Interfaces Copper cable ports Fiber optic ports Topology Number of switches Number and type Shielded connectors Medium Total length of pair Number and type Connectors Medium Length of optical fiber 50/125 µm fiber 62.2/125 µm fiber 9/125 µm fiber Attenuation analysis 50/125 µm fiber 62.2/125 µm fiber 9/125 µm fiber Cascaded Redundant in a ring Redundancy Optimized, copper twisted Copper twisted pair, unmanaged pair, unmanaged 5 x 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX ports 8 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX ports RJ45 Shielded twisted pair, category CAT 5E 100 m – – – – – – – Unlimited – – P1 and P2 redundant power supplies Voltage Power consumption mA max. Removable connector Operating temperature Relative humidity Degree of protection Dimensions WxHxD Mounting Weight 24 V c (19.2…30) 120 3-pin 0…+ 60 °C 10…95% non-condensing IP 20 75.2 x 143 x 43 mm On symmetrical DIN rail, 35 mm wide 0.190 kg 24 V c (18…32) safety extra low voltage (SELV) 125 (290 max.) 5-pin Conformity to standards UL 508, CSA 1010, EN 61131-2 LED indicators Alarm relay Power supply, link status, data rate – cUL 60950, UL 508 and CSA 142, UL 1604 and CSA 213 Class 1 Division 2, e, GL P1 and P2 power supplies, Ethernet link/port status Power supply fault, Ethernet network fault or communication port fault (1 A max. voltage-free contact at 24 V c) 499 NES 251 00 499 NES 181 00 Power supply Reference 3/30 47 x 135 x 111 mm 0.230 kg 0 Product data sheet (continued) Ethernet in Machines and Installations 0 Ethernet TCP/IP, Transparent Ready® Services Cabling system: ConneXium™ unmanaged switches Characteristics and references: 5 ports, twisted pair and fiber optic Switches Interfaces Copper twisted pair and fiber optic, unmanaged Copper cable ports Fiber optic ports Topology Number of switches Number and type Shielded connectors Medium Total length of pair Number and type Connectors Medium Length of optical fiber 50/125 µm fiber 62.2/125 µm fiber 9/125 µm fiber Attenuation analysis 50/125 µm fiber 62.2/125 µm fiber 9/125 µm fiber Cascaded Redundant in a ring Redundancy 4 x 10BASE-T/ 3 x 10BASE-T/ 100BASE-TX ports 100BASE-TX ports RJ45 Shielded twisted pair, category CAT 5E 100 m 1 x 100BASE-FX port 2 x 100BASE-FX ports SC Multimode optical fiber 4 x 10BASE-T/ 100BASE-TX ports 3 x 10BASE-T/ 100BASE-TX ports 1 x 100BASE-FX port 2 x 100BASE-FX ports 5,000 m (1) 4,000 m (1) – – – 32,500 m (2) 8 dB 11 dB – Unlimited – P1 and P2 redundant power supplies – – 16 dB Single mode optical fiber Voltage Power consumption mA max. Removable connector Operating temperature Relative humidity Degree of protection Dimensions WxHxD Mounting Weight 24 V c (18…32), safety extra low voltage (SELV) 200 240 200 5-pin -40...+70 °C 10…95% non-condensing IP 20 47 x 135 x 111 mm On symmetrical DIN rail, 35 mm wide 0.330 kg 0.335 kg 0.330 kg Conformity to standards LED indicators Alarm relay cUL 60950, cUL 508 and CSA 142, UL 1604 and CSA 213 Class 1 Division 2, e, GL P1 and P2 power supplies, Ethernet link status, transmission activity Activity, power supply fault, Ethernet network fault or communication port fault (1 A max. voltage-free contact at 24 V c) Power supply Reference 240 0.335 kg 499 NMS 251 01 499 NMS 251 02 499 NSS 251 01 499 NSS 251 02 (1) Length depends on the attenuation analysis and attenuation of the fiber optic (typical value: 2,000 m). (2) Length depends on the attenuation analysis and attenuation of the fiber optic (typical value: 15,000 m). 3/31 3 Product data sheet Ethernet in Machines and Installations Ethernet TCP/IP, Transparent Ready® Services Cabling system: ConneXium™ managed switches Characteristics and references: 4 ports, twisted pair and fiber optic Switches Interfaces Copper twisted pair and fiber optic, managed Copper cable ports 3 Fiber optic ports Number and type 3 x 10/100BASE-TX ports Shielded connectors Medium Total length of pair Number and type Connectors Medium Length of optical fiber 50/125 µm fiber 62.2/125 µm fiber 9/125 µm fiber Attenuation analysis 50/125 µm fiber 62.2/125 µm fiber 9/125 µm fiber RJ45 Shielded twisted pair, category CAT 5E 100 m 1 x 100BASE-FX port 2 x 100BASE-FX ports 1 x 100BASE-FX port 2 x 100BASE-FX ports Duplex SC Multimode optical fiber Single mode optical fiber Ethernet services Topology Number of switches Cascaded Redundant in a ring Redundancy Power supply Voltage Power consumption Removable connector Operating temperature Relative humidity Degree of protection Dimensions Mounting Weight Conformity to standards LED indicators Alarm relay Reference 3/32 Operation WxHxD 2 x 10/100BASE-TX ports 5,000 m (1) 4,000 m (1) – 3 x 10/100BASE-TX ports 2 x 10/100BASE-TX ports – – 32,500 m (2) 8 dB – 11 dB – – 16 db FDR, SMTP V3, SNTP client, multicast filtering for optimization of the Global Data protocol, configuration via Web access VLAN, IGMP Snooping, RSTP (Rapid Scanning Tree Protocol), priority port, data stream control, secure port Unlimited max. 50 Redundant power supplies, redundant single ring, ring coupling 9.6...60 V c/18…30 V a, safety extra low voltage (SELV) 6.5 W 7.3 W 6.5 W 6-pin 0…+ 60 °C 10…90% non-condensing IP 20 47 x 131 x 111 mm On symmetrical DIN rail, 35 mm wide 0.400 kg 7.3 W IEC 61131-2, IEC 61850-3, UL 508, UL 1604 Class 1 Division 2, CSA C22.2 14 (cUL), CSA C22.2 213 Class 1 Division 2 (cUL), e, GL Power supply status, alarm relay status, active redundancy, redundancy management, copper port status and copper port activity Power supply fault, Ethernet network fault, communication port fault, redundancy fault (1 A max. voltage-free contact at 24 V c) TCS ESM TCS ESM 043F1CU0 043F2CU0 (1) Length depends on the attenuation analysis value: 2,000 m). (2) Length depends on the attenuation analysis value: 15,000 m). TCS ESM TCS ESM 043F1CS0 043F2CS0 and attenuation of the fiber optic (typical and attenuation of the fiber optic (typical 0 Product data sheet (continued) Ethernet in Machines and Installations 0 Ethernet TCP/IP, Transparent Ready® Services Cabling system: ConneXium™ managed switches Characteristics and references: 4 and 8 ports, twisted pair Switches Interfaces Copper twisted pair, managed Copper cable ports Fiber optic ports Number and type 4 x 10/100BASE-TX ports Shielded connectors Medium Total length of pair Number and type Connectors Medium Length of optical fiber 50/125 µm fiber 62.2/125 µm fiber 9/125 µm fiber Attenuation analysis 50/125 µm fiber 62.2/125 µm fiber 9/125 µm fiber RJ45 Shielded twisted pair, category CAT 5E 100 m – – Ethernet services Topology Number of switches Cascaded Redundant in a ring Redundancy Power supply Voltage Power consumption Removable connector Operating temperature Relative humidity Degree of protection Dimensions Mounting Weight Conformity to standards LED indicators Alarm relay Reference Operation WxHxD 8 x 10/100BASE-TX ports 3 – – – – – – FDR, SMTP V3, SNTP client, multicast filtering for optimization of the Global Data protocol, configuration via Web access VLAN, IGMP Snooping, RSTP (Rapid Scanning Tree Protocol), priority port, data stream control, secure port Unlimited max. 50 Redundant power supplies, redundant single ring, ring coupling 9.6...60 V c/18…30 V a, safety extra low voltage (SELV) 5.3 W 5.3 W 6-pin 0…+ 60 °C 10…90% non-condensing IP 20 47 x 131 x 111 mm 74 x 131 x 111 mm On symmetrical DIN rail, 35 mm wide 0.400 kg 0.410 kg IEC 61131-2, IEC 61850-3, UL 508, UL 1604 Class 1 Division 2, CSA C22.2 14 (cUL), CSA C22.2 213 Class 1 Division 2 (cUL), e, GL Power supply status, alarm relay status, active Power supply status, alarm relay status, active redundancy, redundancy management, redundancy, redundancy management, copper port status and copper port activity fiber port status and fiber port activity Power supply fault, Ethernet network fault or communication port fault (1 A max. voltage-free contact at 24 V c) TCS ESM 043F23F0 TCS ESM 083F23F0 3/33 Product data sheet (continued) Ethernet in Machines and Installations Ethernet TCP/IP, Transparent Ready® Services Cabling system: ConneXium™ managed switches Characteristics and references: 8 ports, twisted pair and fiber optic Switches Interfaces Copper twisted pair and fiber optic, managed Copper cable ports Number and type 7x 10/100BASE-TX ports Fiber optic ports Shielded connectors Medium Total length of pair Number and type RJ45 Shielded twisted pair, category CAT 5E 100 m 1 x 100BASE-FX 2 x 100BASE-FX 1 x 100BASE-FX 2x 100BASE-FX 1 + 1 x port ports port ports 100BASE-FX port Duplex SC Multimode optical fiber Single mode optical fiber Single mode optical fiber and multimode optical fiber 3 Connectors Medium Length of optical fiber 50/125 µm fiber 62.2/125 µm fiber 9/125 µm fiber Attenuation analysis 50/125 µm fiber 62.2/125 µm fiber 9/125 µm fiber Ethernet services Topology Number of switches Cascaded Redundant in a ring Redundancy Power supply Voltage Power consumption Removable connector Operating temperature Relative humidity Degree of protection Dimensions Mounting Weight Conformity to standards LED indicators Alarm relay Reference 3/34 Operation WxHxD 5,000 m (1) 4,000 m (1) – 6x 10/100BASE-TX ports 7x 10/100BASE-TX ports 6 x 10/100BASE-T ports – – 32,500 m (2) 5,000 m (1) 4,000 m (1) 32,500 m (2) 8 dB – 8 dB 11 dB – 11 dB – 16 dB 16 dB FDR, SMTP V3, SNTP client, multicast filtering for optimization of the Global Data protocol, configuration via Web access VLAN, IGMP Snooping, RSTP (Rapid Scanning Tree Protocol), priority port, data stream control, secure port Unlimited max. 50 Redundant power supplies, redundant single ring, ring coupling 9.6...60 V c/18…30 V a, safety extra low voltage (SELV) 6.5 W 7.3 W 6.5 W 7.3 W 6-pin 0…+ 60 °C 10… 90% non-condensing IP 20 74 x 131 x 111 mm On symmetrical DIN rail, 35 mm wide 0.410 kg IEC 61131-2, IEC 61850-3, UL 508, UL 1604 Class 1 Division 2, CSA C22.2 14 (cUL), CSA C22.2 213 Class 1 Division 2 (cUL), e, GL Power supply status, alarm relay status, active redundancy, redundancy management, fiber port status and fiber port activity Power supply fault, Ethernet network fault or communication port fault (1 A max. voltage-free contact at 24 V c) TCSESM TCSESM TCSESM TCSESM TCSESM 083F1CU0 083F2CU0 083F1CS0 083F2CS0 083F2CX0 (1) Length depends on the attenuation analysis and attenuation of the fiber optic (typical value: 2,000 m). (2) Length depends on the attenuation analysis and attenuation of the fiber optic (typical value: 15,000 m). 0 Product data sheet Ethernet in Machines and Installations 0 Ethernet TCP/IP, Transparent Ready® Services Cabling system: ConneXium™ IP 67 switch Characteristics and references: IP 67 unmanaged switch IP 67 switch Interfaces Copper cable ports Fiber optic ports Number and type Shielded connectors Medium Total length of pair Number and type Connectors Medium Length of optical fiber Attenuation analysis Ethernet services Topology Number of switches Redundancy Power supply Voltage Power consumption Connector Operating temperature Relative humidity Degree of protection Dimensions W x H x D Weight Conformity to standards LED indicators Alarm relay Reference IP 67 cord sets Ethernet cord sets Power supply cables Length Reference Spare power connectors Reference Cascaded Redundant in a ring Twisted pair, unmanaged 5 x 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX ports M12 (type D) Shielded twisted pair, category CAT 5E 100 m – – – – – Storage and re-routing of received data, auto MDI/MDX (automatic switching depending on whether cables are straight or crossed), automatic negotiation of 10/100 Mbps and duplex mode (on all ports), automatic change of polarity Unlimited – – 24 V c (18…32 V c), safety extra low voltage (SELV) 100 mA 5-pin M12 (type A, male) 0…+ 60 °C – IP 67 60 x 126 x 31 mm 0.210 kg cUL 508 and CSA 22.2 14 Power supply, line status, line activity – TCS ESU 051 F0 Preformed at each end, see page 3/27 Preformed at each end with M12 female straight connectors 2m 5m Preformed at each end with female M12 angled connectors 2.5 m 5m XZC P1164L2 XZC P1264L2 XZC P1164L5 Female M12 straight connector XZC C12 FDM 50B XZC P1264L5 Female M12 angled connector XZC C12 FCM 50B 3/35 3 Product data sheet (continued) Ethernet in Machines and Installations Ethernet TCP/IP, Transparent Ready® Services Cabling system: ConneXium™ managed switches Characteristics and references: 16 and 24 ports, twisted pair, fiber optic Switches Interfaces 3 Copper cable ports Fiber optic ports Number and type Shielded connectors Medium Total length of pair Number and type Connectors Medium Length of optical fiber 50/125 µm fiber 62.2/125 µm fiber 9/125 µm fiber Attenuation analysis 50/125 µm fiber 62.2/125 µm fiber 9/125 µm fiber Ethernet services Topology Number of switches Cascaded Redundant in a ring Redundancy Power supply Voltage Power consumption Removable connector Operating temperature Relative humidity Degree of protection Dimensions Mounting Weight Conformity to standards LED indicators Alarm relay Reference 3/36 Operation WxHxD Copper twisted pair and Copper twisted pair, fiber optic, managed managed 16 x 10/100BASE-TX ports 14 x 10/100BASE-TX ports RJ45 Shielded twisted pair, category CAT 5E 100 m – 2 x 100BASE-FX ports – Duplex SC – Multimode optical fiber – – – Copper twisted pair and fiber optic, managed 22 x 10/100BASE-TX ports 5,000 m (1) 4,000 m (1) – – 8 dB – 11 dB – – FDR, SMTP V3, SNTP client, multicast filtering for optimization of the Global Data protocol, configuration via Web access VLAN, IGMP Snooping, RSTP (Rapid Scanning Tree Protocol), priority port, data stream control, secure port Unlimited max. 50 Redundant power supplies, redundant single ring, ring coupling 9.6...60 V c/18…30 V a, safety extra low voltage (SELV) 9.4 W 11.8 W 6-pin 0…+ 60 °C 10… 90% non-condensing IP 20 111 x 131 x 111 mm On symmetrical DIN rail, 35 mm wide 0.600 kg 15.5 W 0.650 kg cUL 60950, UL 508 and CSA 142, UL 1604 and CSA 213 Class 1 Division 2, e, GL Redundant power supplies, Redundant power supplies, single ring, double ring single ring Power supply fault, Ethernet network fault or communication port fault (1 A max. voltage-free contact at 24 V c) TCSESM 163F2CU0 TCSESM 163F23F0 TCSESM 243F2CU0 (1) Length depends on the attenuation analysis and attenuation of the fiber optic (typical value: 2,000 m). 0 Product data sheet (continued) Ethernet in Machines and Installations 0 Ethernet TCP/IP, Transparent Ready® Services Cabling system: ConneXium™ managed switches Characteristics and references: 8 ports and 2 Gigabit ports, twisted pair, fiber optic Switches Interfaces Copper cable ports Number and type Shielded connectors Medium Total length of pair Number and type Gigabit ports fiber optic (with SFP fiber module to be mounted on SFP Connectors connector) Medium Length of optical fiber 50/125 µm fiber 62.2/125 µm fiber 9/125 µm fiber Attenuation analysis 50/125 µm fiber 62.2/125 µm fiber 9/125 µm fiber Ethernet services Topology Number of switches Cascaded Redundant in a ring Redundancy Power supply Voltage Power consumption Removable connector Operating temperature Relative humidity Degree of protection Dimensions Mounting Weight Conformity to standards LED indicators Alarm relay Reference Operation WxHxD Copper twisted pair and fiber optic, managed 8 x 10/100BASE-TX ports RJ45 Shielded twisted pair, category CAT 5E 100 m 2x 2x 2x 1000BASE-SX 1000BASE-LH 1000BASE-LX ports (1) ports (2) ports (3) LC Multimode Single mode Single mode optical fiber optical fiber and multimode optical fiber 550 m 275 m – – – 8 -72,000 m 550 m 550 m 20,000 m Copper twisted pair, managed 8 x 10/100BASE-TX ports and 2 x 10/100/1000BASE-TX ports (Gigabit) 3 – – – – – – 7.5 dB – 11 dB – 7.5 dB – 11 dB – – 6 - 22 dB 11 dB – FDR, SMTP V3, SNTP client, multicast filtering for optimization of the Global Data protocol, configuration via Web access VLAN, IGMP Snooping, RSTP (Rapid Scanning Tree Protocol), priority port, data stream control, secure port Unlimited max. 50 Redundant power supplies, redundant single ring, ring coupling 9.6...60 V c/18…30 V a, safety extra low voltage (SELV) 8.9 W + 1 W per SFP fiber module 8.3 W 6-pin 0…+ 60 °C 10… 90% non-condensing IP 20 111 x 131 x 111 mm On symmetrical DIN rail, 35 mm wide 0.410 kg cUL 60950, UL 508 and CSA 142, UL 1604 and CSA 213 Class 1 Division 2, e, GL Power supply status, alarm relay status, active redundancy, redundancy management, fiber port status and fiber port activity Power supply fault, Ethernet network fault or communication port fault (1 A max. voltage-free contact at 24 V c) TCS ESM 103F2LG0 TCS ESM 103F23G0 (1) With TCS EAA F1LFU00 fiber optic module to be ordered separately, see page 3/27. (2) With TCS EAA F1LFH00 fiber optic module to be ordered separately, see page 3/27. (3) With TCS EAA F1LFS00 fiber optic module to be ordered separately, see page 3/27. 3/37 Presentation Modicon® M340™ Automation Platform 0 CANopen machine and installation bus Presentation Schneider Electric has selected CANopen for its machines and installations because of its wealth of functions and its resulting benefits in the automation world. This decision was based on the general acceptance of CANopen, and the fact that CANopen products are increasingly used in control system architectures. CANopen is an open network supported by more than 400 companies worldwide, and promoted by CAN in Automation (CiA). CANopen conforms to standards EN 50325-4 and ISO 15745-2. Schneider Electric is heavily involved in working groups, which are important for machine and installation architectures, systems, and products. CANopen brings transparency to Ethernet CAN in Automation and Modbus-IDA have worked together to create a standard that ensures total transparency between CANopen and Modbus TCP/IP. The result of this collaboration has been the CiA DSP309-2 specification, defining communication standards between a Modbus TCP/IP network and a CANopen bus. The specification defines mapping services enabling CANopen devices to communicate with a Modbus TCP/IP network through a gateway. The data in a CANopen device can be accessed in both read and write mode. 3 This specification is the first standard available for developing an open standard communication between Modbus TCP/IP and CANopen. It is driving Schneider Electric network solutions toward better integration, diagnostics and configuration of distributed applications. It allows machines and installations to be connected to an Ethernet network continuously, while combining the advantages of each network in its specific area. Lexium 15 Modicon M340 Advantys STB Lexium 05, ATV 31 CANopen bus Premium 1 to 127 slaves Osicoder ATV 71 FTB 1CN FTB 1CN TeSys Quickfit with TeSys D The CANopen bus is a multi-master bus ensuring reliable, deterministic access to real-time data in control system devices. The CSMA/CA protocol is based on broadcast exchanges, sent cyclically or on an event, to ensure optimum use of the passband. A message handling channel can also be used to define slave parameters. The bus uses a double twisted pair on which, with the Modicon M340 platform, 63 devices maximum are connected by daisy-chaining or by tap junctions. The variable data rate between 20 Kbit/s and 1 Mbit/s depends on the length of the bus (between 20 m and 2,500 m). Each end of the bus must be fitted with a line terminator. The CANopen bus is a set of profiles on CAN systems, possessing the following characteristics: b Open bus system b Data exchanges in real time without overloading the protocol b Modular design allowing modification of size b Interconnection and interchangeability of devices b Standardized configuration of networks b Access to all device parameters b Synchronization and circulation of data from cyclic and/or event-controlled processes (short system response time) 3/38 Connectable devices Modicon® M340™ Automation Platform 0 CANopen machine and installation bus Connectable devices Advantys FTB TeSys Quickfit Advantys OTB Altivar 31 Example of devices that can be connected on CANopen The Modicon M340 automation platform, via its BMX P34 2010/2030 processors with integrated CANopen link, performs the role of master on the machine bus. The following Telemecanique® devices can be connected to the CANopen bus: v Ø 58 mm Osicoder multi-turn absolute encoders: - XCC 3510P/3515C S84CB, version u 1.0 v TeSys® U starter-controllers: - with LUL C08 communication module, version u 1.2 v TeSys® D motor-starters, using the TeSys® Quickfit installation help system: - with APP 1CCO0/O2 communication module, version u 1.0 v Advantys™ OTB IP 20 Optimum distributed I/O system (I/O extension modules not permitted): - with OTB 1C0 DM9LP interface module, version u 2.0 v Advantys™ STB IP 20 modular distributed I/O system: - with NIM module STB NCO 1010, version u 1.0 or STB NCO 2212, version u 2.02 v Advantys™ FTB IP 67 monobloc I/O splitter boxes: - FTB 1CNppppp, version u 1.7 v Preventa™ configurable safety controllers: - XPS MC16ZC/32ZC, version u 1.10 v Altivar® 31 adjustable speed drives for asynchronous motors 0.18…15 kW: - ATV 31H ppppp, version u 1.1 (1) v Altivar® 71/61 adjustable speed drives for asynchronous motors 0.75…630 kW: - ATV 61H /71H ppppp, version u 1.1 (1) v Lexium® 05 servo drives (0.4...6 kW) for BSH servo motors: - LXM 05ApDpppp, version u 1.120 (2) v Lexium® 15 servo drives (0.9...42.5 kW) for BDH or BSH servo motors: - LXM 15Lp, version u 1.45 (3) - LXM 15MD/15HC, version u 6.64 (4) v IcLA® intelligent compact motor-drives from Berger Lahr® (a company of Schneider Electric® ): - IFA 6p, version u 1.105 (5) - IFE 71, version u 1.104 (5) - IFS 6p/9p, version u 1.107 (5) (1) Requires the PowerSuite ™ software workshop VW3 A8 104, version u 2.00. (2) Requires the PowerSuite ™ software workshop for Lexium 05 servo drive VW3 A8 104, version 2.2.0 patch V2.2.0B. (3) Requires the Unilink® software, version u 1.5. (4) Requires the Unilink® software, version u 4.0. (5) Requires the IclA ® Easy software, version u 1.104. Setup via Unity Pro™ Software Configuration of the CANopen bus on the Modicon M340 platform is fully integrated in the Unity Pro software. From the Unity Pro graphic editor, simply select the devices available in the catalog and assign them their CANopen slave address. Exchanges between the CANopen bus and the Modicon M340 processor can be assigned by configuration to the fast or master task. Predefined profiles or functions are used to create the user interface automatically using process variables (PDO), in such a way that any subsequent modification to the mapping of these variables will have no impact on their topological addressing. Depending on the devices, dedicated configuration screens are used to assign the initial parameters. The dedicated screens are available for CANopen specialists who wish to optimize the performance of the CANopen bus or re-assign the Process Data Objects (PDO) differently. Example of Unity Pro configuration screen for Lexium® 05 servo drive and Advantys FTB IP 67 I/O splitter box Acyclical access to the Service Data Object (SDO) corresponding to any CANopen object of a particular device is possible from the application using the standard communication functions READ_VAR and WRITE_VAR, or even from the Unity Pro diagnostic screens. These screens can be used to display the bus status graphically, as well as to access the diagnostics sent by a faulty device with a single click of the mouse. Presentation: page 3/38 Characteristics: page 3/40 References: page 3/41 3/39 3 Modicon® M340™ Automation Platform Description, characteristics CANopen machine and installation bus Description Both of the Performance processors on the Modicon M340 platform, BMX P34 2010 and BMX P34 2030, have an integrated CANopen communication port. They have the following on the front panel: 1 Securing screw for locking the module in its slot (marked 0) in the rack 2 A display block comprising at least: v CAN RUN LED (green): Integrated machine/installation bus operational v CAN ERR LED (red): Integrated machine/installation bus faulty 3 A mini B USB connector for a programming terminal 4 A slot equipped with Flash memory card for backing up the application 5 An RJ45 connector for serial link (with BMX P34 2010 model) or Ethernet TCP/IP port (with BMX P34 2030 model) 6 A 9-pin SUB-D connector for the CANopen Master machine and installation bus 1 2 3 4 5 6 BMX P34 2010 3 BMX P34 2030 Characteristics (1) Type of bus CANopen services Structure m m CANopen M20 DS 301 V 04.02, 303-2 DS 405 – 9-pin male SUB-D Devices connected by daisy-chaining and/or tap junctions CSMA/CA, carrier sense consumer/producer principle, collision detection and arbitration of message priorities Messages carrying objects: process data (PDO), service data (SDO), network management (NMT), special functions (SYNC, EMCY, TIME) 20 Kbit/s…1 Mbit/s depending on bus length Double shielded twisted pair 63 maximum 1 Mbit/s 800 Kbit/s 500 Kbit/s 250 Kbit/s 125 Kbit/s 50 Kbit/s 20 Kbit/s 20 40 100 250 500 1000 2500 0.6 6 10 10 10 120 300 m 64 160 Kb BMX P34 2010 BMX P34 2030 1 (4, 6, 8 or 12 slots) 12 for processor and modules (excluding power supply module) 1,024; 704 in single-rack configuration (64 I/O x 11) 256; 66 in single-rack configuration (4I/2Q x 11) Programmable loops (via CONT-CTL process control EFB library) 36 channels Independent axes on CANopen bus (via MFB library) – 1 RJ45 port, 10/100 Mbit/s 1 master (9-pin SUB-D) 1 RJ45 port, Modbus® master/slave or character – mode 1 port, 12 Mbit/s 1 RJ45 port, 10/100 Mbit/s with Transparent Ready: - class B30 standard Web server with BMX NOE 0100 module - class C30 configurable Web server with BMX NOE 0110 module 4,096 including 3,584 for the program, constants and symbols and 256 for data Conformity class Standard Device profile Special Physical interface Topology Access method Application layer Transmission CANopen physical configuration (1) Data rate Medium No. of slave devices Data rate Maximum length of bus (2) Maximum length of tap-offs on one tap junction (3) Limitation per segment Modicon M340 processor No. of devices Maximum length of segment (4) No. of racks Maximum no. of slots Maximum no. in Discrete I/O rack Analog I/O Integrated connections Communication module Process control Counting Motion Ethernet TCP/IP CANopen bus Serial link USB port Ethernet TCP/IP Internal RAM capacity 32 185 16 205 (1) For more information, please refer to the “Machines & Installations with industrial communications” catalog. (2) Deduct 15 m per repeater from the length of the bus. (3) For other restrictions, please refer to the CANopen hardware setup manual available on our website (www.telemecanique.com). (4) With the use of TSX CAN C p50/100/300 CANopen cables and TSX CAN CpDD03/1/3/5 preformed cord sets. 3/40 0 Modicon® M340™ Automation Platform References 0 CANopen machine and installation bus Modicon® M340™ Performance processors with integrated CANopen bus link Modicon M340 processor modules are supplied with the BMX RMS 008MP Flash memory card. This card performs the following actions transparently: v Backing up the application (program, symbols and constants) supported in the processor internal RAM that is not backed up v Activation of the Transparent Ready® standard web server, class B10 (with BMX P34 2030 processor) This card can be replaced by another card featuring a file storage option (see page 1/9). I/O capacity (1) Memory capacity Max. no. of network Integrated modules communication ports Reference (3) Weight kg 1 Ethernet TCP/IP network CANopen bus Modbus® serial link BMXP342010 – CANopen bus Ethernet TCP/IP network BMXP342030 – Performance BMX P340 20, 1 rack 1,024 discrete I/O 256 analog I/O 36 app-sp. channels BMX P34 2010 4,096 Kb integrated 3 (1) For I/O capacity in single-rack configuration, see characteristics, page 1/8 BMX P34 2030 CANopen bus wiring system Modicon M340 with BMX P34 2010/2030 processor Magelis XBT GT 12 Advantys FTB Advantys STB Advantys FTB 13 PC or monitoring tool 16 2 4 Osicoder 16 5 24 V c 1 9 17 6a 5 10 14 5 2 7 6a 6b ATV 31 Advantys OTB IcLA ATV 71 Lexium 05 Preventa safety controller Lexium 15 TeSys Quickfit Note : For numbers and references 1, 2, ..., 17, see pages 3/42 and 3/43. Different types of cable are available making it possible to create any type of application, including for harsh environments (for a definition of standard and harsh environments, see page 3/42). Several connectors are available to meet any requirement: straight or 90° angled connectors, or angled connectors with the option of connecting a PC or diagnostic pocket PC. Power can be supplied to the equipment by means of cables, cord sets and tap junctions: one 24 AWG pair for the CAN signals, one 22 AWG pair for the power supply and the ground. In addition to the offering for IP 20 wiring, there is also an offering for IP 67 wiring. Presentation: page 3/38 Description: page 3/40 Characteristics: page 3/40 3/41 Modicon® M340™ Automation Platform References 0 CANopen machine and installation bus Wiring system Standard tap junctions and connectors Designation Description IP 20 CANopen tap junction TSX CAN TDM4 VW3 CAN TAP2 4 SUB-D ports. Screw terminal block for connection of trunk cables Line termination IP 20 connectors 90° angled 2 CANopen female 9-pin Straight (2) – SUB-D. 90° angled with 9-pin SUB-D for connecting a PC 4 Switch for line or diagnostic tool termination IP 67 M12 connectors Male – Female – 2 RJ45 ports 9 IP 20 CANopen tap junctions for Altivar and Lexium 05 drives CANopen cables (24 AWG) Description No. (1) Standard, e marking: low smoke. Halogen-free. 5 Flame-retardant (IEC 60332-1) Standard, UL certification, e marking: flame-retardant (IEC 60332-2) TSX CAN KCD F90T TSX CAN KCD F180T TSX CAN KCD F90TP Length Reference Weight kg 0.196 – TSXCANTDM4 – – – TSXCANKCDF90T TSXCANKCDF180T TSXCANKCDF90TP 0.046 0.049 0.051 – – – FTXCN12M5 FTXCN12F5 VW3CANTAP2 0.050 0.050 – Length 50 m 100 m 300 m 50 m 100 m 300 m 50 m 100 m 300 m Unit reference TSXCANCA50 TSXCANCA100 TSXCANCA300 TSXCANCB50 TSXCANCB100 TSXCANCB300 TSXCANCD50 TSXCANCD100 TSXCANCD300 0.3 m 1m 3m 5m 0.3 m 1m 3m 5m 0.5 m 1m 0.5 m 1m TSXCANCADD03 TSXCANCADD1 TSXCANCADD3 TSXCANCADD5 TSXCANCBDD03 TSXCANCBDD1 TSXCANCBDD3 TSXCANCBDD5 TCSCCE4F3M05 TCSCCE4F3M1 TCSCCU4F3M05 TCSCCU4F3M1 IP 20 standard cables and preformed cord sets Designation 3 No. (1) 1 5 For harsh environments (3) or mobile installation, 5 e marking: low smoke. Halogen-free. Flame-retardant (IEC 60332-1). Resistance to oils CANopen preformed Standard, e marking: low smoke. Halogen-free. 6a Flame-retardant (IEC 60332-1) cord sets One 9-pin female SUB-D connector at each end Standard, UL certification, e marking: 6a (24 AWG ) flame-retardant (IEC 60332-2) CANopen preformed cord sets One 9-pin SUB-D connector, One RJ45 connector (24 AWG ) CANopen preformed cord sets Standard, e marking: low smoke. Halogen-free. 6b Flame-retardant (IEC 60332-1) Standard, UL certification, e marking: flame-retardant (IEC 60332-2) 6b Two 9-pin SUB-D connectors, one male and one female – 0.5 m 1.5 m 3m 5m TLACDCBA005 TLACDCBA015 TLACDCBA030 TLACDCBA050 No. (1) 12 Length Unit reference FTXCN3203 FTXCN3206 FTXCN3210 FTXCN3220 FTXCN3230 FTXCN3250 FTXCN3130 FTXCN3150 Weight kg 4.930 8.800 24.560 3.580 7.840 21.870 3.510 7.770 21.700 0.091 0.143 0.295 0.440 0.086 0.131 0.268 0.400 – – – – – – – – IP 67 standard preformed cord sets Designation Description CANopen preformed Preformed cord sets of two 5-pin M12 A-coded cord sets angled connectors (one male connector and one female connector) 0.3 m 0.6 m 1m 2m 3m 5m 3m 5m Preformed cord sets with one 5-pin female M12 7 A-coded connector at one end and wires at the other end (1) For numbers, see page 3/41 (2) For connection to the Controller Inside programmable card, the VW3 CAN KCDF 180T connector can also be used. (3) Standard environment: -- Without any particular environmental constraints -- Operating temperature between +5 °C and +60 °C -- Fixed installation Harsh environment: -- Resistance to hydrocarbons, industrial oils, detergents, solder splashes -- Relative humidity up to 100% -- Saline atmosphere -- Significant temperature variations -- Operating temperature between -10 °C and +70 °C -- Mobile installation 3/42 Weight kg 0.40 0.70 0.100 0.160 0.220 0.430 – – References (continued) Modicon® M340™ Automation Platform 0 CANopen machine and installation bus Wiring system IP 20 connection accessories Designation No. (1) CANopen connector 9-pin female SUB-D. Switch for line termination. – for Altivar 71 drive (2) Cables exit at 180° VW3 CAN A71 Description Length – Unit reference VW3CANKCDF180T Weight kg – Adapter for Altivar 71 CANopen adapter SUB-D to RJ45 drive – – VW3CANA71 – Preformed CANopen One RJ45 connector at each end cord sets for Altivar and Lexium 05 drives 10 0.3 m 1m VW3CANCARR03 VW3CANCARR1 – – CANopen bus Hardware interface for a link conforming to the adapter for Lexium 15 CANopen standard + one connector for a PC servo drive terminal 14 – AM02CA001V000 0.110 Y-connector – – TCSCTN011M11F – CANopen/Modbus 3 AM0 2CA 001V000 IP 67 connection accessories For Advantys™ FTB monobloc I/O splitter boxes Designation Composition IP 67 line terminator Equipped with one M12 connector (for end of bus) 24 V c power supply Equipped with two 5-pin 7/8 connectors connection cables No. (1) 13 Length m – FTXCNTL12 Weight kg 0.010 16 0.6 1 2 5 1.5 3 5 – FTXDP2206 FTXDP2210 FTXDP2220 FTXDP2250 FTXDP2115 FTXDP2130 FTXDP2150 FTXCNCT1 0.150 0.190 0.310 0.750 0.240 0.430 0.700 0,100 Sold in Reference – – – – – – – – FTXC78M5 FTXC78F5 XZCC12MDM50B XZCC12FDM50B XZCC12MCM50B XZCC12FCM50B FTXCM08B FTXCM12B – – FTXC78B FTXCY1208 0.020 0.020 – FTXCY1212 0.030 Equipped with one 5-pin 7/8 connector at one end 17 and wires at the other end FTX DP21pp T-junction box for power supply Equipped with two 5-pin 7/8 connectors – Reference Separate parts Designation Connectors Composition 7/8 type, 5-pin Straight, M12 type, 5 screw terminals XZ CC12pDM50B Angled, M12 type, 5 screw terminals Sealing plugs Y-connector XZ CC12pCM50B Diagnostics adapter Marker labels FTX CY1208 Male Female Male Female Male Female For M8 connector (sold in packs of 10) For M12 connector (sold in packs of 10) For 7/8 connector Connection of two M8 connectors to M12 connector on splitter box Connection of two M12 connectors to M12 connector on splitter box Equipped with two M12 connectors For plastic splitter boxes For metal splitter boxes – FTXDG12 Packs of 10 FTXBLA10 Packs of 10 FTXMLA10 Weigh t kg 0.050 0.050 0.020 0.020 0.020 0.020 0.100 0.100 0.020 0.010 0.010 (1) For numbers, see page 3/41. (2) For ATV 71HpppM3, ATV 71HD11M3X, HD15M3X, ATV 71H075N4... HD18N4 drives, this connector can be replaced by the TSXCANKCDF180T connector. 3/43 Modicon® M340™ Automation Platform Presentation, description Modbus® serial link and character mode Presentation Magelis XBT Modicon M340 Modbus serial link 3 Preventa XPS MC Modbus 3rd party product Twido Lexium 05 Altivar 71 The Modbus bus is used for master/slave architectures (it is necessary, however, to check that the Modbus services used by the application are implemented on the devices concerned). The bus comprises one master station and several slave stations. Only the master station can initiate the exchange (direct communication between slave stations is not possible). Two exchange mechanisms are possible: b Question/answer, where the requests from the master are addressed to a given slave. The master then waits for the response from the slave. b Broadcasting, where the master broadcasts a message to all the slave stations on the bus. These stations execute the order without transmitting a response. Description The BMX P34 1000 / 2010 / 2020 processors in the Modicon M340 automation platform range integrate a serial link that can operate under Modbus master/slave RTU/ASCII protocol or under character mode protocol. 1 For this serial port, these processors have the following on the front panel : 1 A display block comprising among other LEDs: v SER COM LED (yellow): Activity on the Modbus serial link (lit) or failure on an equipment present on the link (flashing). 3 2 2 An RJ45 connector for the Modbus serial link or character mode link (RS 232C/RS 485, non-isolated) and its black indicator 3. BMX P34 1000 Note : For complete processors descriptions, see page 1/5 1 3 2 BMX P34 2010 Characteristics: page 3/45 3/44 BMX P34 2000 References: page 3/45 0 Modicon® M340™ Automation Platform Characteristics, references 0 Modbus® serial link and character mode Characteristics Protocol Structure Transmission Configuration Modbus Non-isolated serial link (1) Master/slave type RS 232, 2 wires RS 485, 2 wires Asynchronous in baseband RTU/ASCII, Half duplex 0.3...19.2 Kbit/s (default 19.2 Kbit/s) Shielded twisted pair Type Method of access Physical Interface Mode Frame Data rate Medium Number of devices Maximum number of link addresses Maximum length of bus Maximum length of tap links Services Requests Security, control parameters Monitoring Character mode – RS 232, 4 wires RS 485, 2 wires Asynchronous in baseband Full duplex Half duplex 0.3...19.2 Kbit/s (default 19.2 Kbit/s) Simple or double Shielded twisted pair shielded twisted pair 2 (point-to-point) 32 max. per segment 2 (point-to-point) 32 max. per segment 248 248 15 m 10 m non-isolated link 15 m 10 m non-isolated link 1000 m isolated link 1000 m isolated link – 15 m non-isolated link – 15 m non-isolated link 40 m isolated link 40 m isolated link 252 data bytes per RTU request 1 K data bytes per request 504 data bytes per ASCII request One CRC on each frame (RTU) One LRC on each frame (ASCII) One LRC on each frame (ASCII) Diagnostic counters, event counters – (1) For an isolated link, you must use the TWD XCA ISO terminal port cable connector. Modbus® system functions Modbus functions available on serial ports integrated to Modicon M340 processors Code 01 02 03 04 15 16 Modbus slave (server) Read n output bits Read n input bits Read n output words Read n input words Write n output bits Write n output words Modbus master (client) Read output bits Read input bits Read words Read input words Write n output bits Write n output words References I/O capacity (1) Memory capacity Integrated communication ports Reference (3) Weight kg Standard processor with integrated serial link BMX P340 10 512 discrete I/O 128 E/S analog I/O 20 applicationspecific channels 2,048 Kb integrated Modbus serial link BMXP341000 0.200 Modbus serial link CANopen bus BMXP342010 0.210 Modbus serial link Ethernet TCP/IP network BMXP342020 0.205 Performance processors with integrated serial link BMX P340 20 1024 discrete I/O 256 E/S analog I/O 36 applicationspecific channels BMX P34 1000 BMX P34 2020 4,096 Kb integrated Serial link cabling system, see pages 3/46 and 3/47. Description: pages 3/45 3/45 3 Modicon® M340™ Automation Platform Connections 0 Modbus® serial link and character mode Cabling system Cabling system Modicon Premium Magelis XBT Modicon Quantum Modbus RS 232C 10 11 1 RS 232C RS 485 12 3 7 9 7 8 Advantys OTB Preventa XPS MC 5 c 24 V Modbus serial link 3rd party Modbus product 3 ATV 31 4 6 9 7 Twido Lexium 05 2 12 Modicon M340 ATV 71 Extension and adaptation elements for RS 485 serial link Designation Description Reference Length - 10 x RJ45 connectors 1 - 1 x screw terminal block T-junction boxes - 2 x RJ45 connectors 2 - 1 x integrated cable with RJ45 connector Dedicated for Altivar and Lexium drives Passive T-junction box - Tap-off point, extension of trunk cable – - Line termination adapter – Unit reference LU9GC3 0.3 m 1m VW3A8306TF03 VW3A8306TF10 0.190 0.210 – TSXSCA50 0.520 - 2-channel tap-off point and extension 3 of trunk cable - Address coding - Line termination adapter – TSXSCA62 0.570 4 - Insulation of the RS 485 serial line - Line termination adaptation (R = 120 Ω, C = 1 nF) - Line pre-polarized (2 x R = 620 Ω) (1) 24 Vc power (2) Mounting on 7 35 mm - Line termination adaptation – (R = 120 Ω, C = 1 nF) - Line pre-polarized (2 x R = 620 Ω) (1) Mounting on 7 35 mm – TWDXCAISO 0.100 – TWDXCAT3RJ 0.080 - 1 x Bluetooth ® adapter (10 m range, – class 2) with 1 x RJ45 connector, - 1 x 0.1 m long cord set for PowerSuite ™ software with 2 x RJ45 connectors, - 1 x 0.1 m long cord set for TwidoSuite ™ software with 1 x RJ45 connector and 1 x mini-DIN connector, - 1 x RJ45/SUB-D male 9-pin adapter for ATV speed drives 5 RS 232C/RS 485 line 24 Vc /20 mA power supply, adapter without modem 19.2 kbit/s Mounting on 7 35 mm signals – VW3 A8114 0.155 – XGSZ24 0.100 Modbus splitter box TSX SCA 50 LU9 GC3 TSX SCA 62 Passive 2-channel subscriber socket, 2 x 15-pin female SUB-D connectors and 2 x screw terminals T-junction box Screw terminals for main cable. 1 x RJ45 connector for derivation T-junction box 3 x RJ45 connectors Weight kg 0.500 VW3 A8 306 TFpp Modbus / Bluetooth® adapter TWD XCA ISO TWD XCA T3RJ Line terminator VW3 A8 114 3/46 XGS Z24 For RJ45 connector (R = 120 Ω, C = 1 nF) 12 Sold in lots VW3A8306RC of 2 (1) Polarized termination requires connection to Twido ® controller master. (2) 24 Vc power supply, external, or through the serial port integrated in Modicon M340 processors. 0.200 Modicon® M340™ Automation Platform References 0 Modbus® serial link and character mode Cables and connecting cord sets for RS 485 serial link Designation RS 485 double shielded twisted pair trunk cables Description Reference Length Modbus serial link, supplied without connector 6 100 m 200 m 500 m Unit reference TSXCSA100 TSXCSA200 TSXCSA500 7 0.3 m 1m 3m VW3A8306R03 VW3A8306R10 VW3A8306R30 0.030 0.050 0.150 – 3m VW3A8306 0.150 4 0.3 m 1m 3m TWDXCARJ003 TWDXCARJ010 TWDXCARJ030 0.040 0.090 0.16 5 3m VW3A8306D30 0.150 9 3m TSXSCPCM4530 0.180 11 2.5 m XBTZ938 0.210 11 3m VW3A8306R30 0.150 Modbus RS 485 cables 2 x RJ45 connectors 1 x RJ45 connector and 1 x 15-pin SUB-D connector 1 x mini-DIN connector for Twido® controller and 1 x RJ45 connector 1 x RJ45 connector and 1 end with wires 1 x miniature connector and 1 x 15-pin SUB-D connector Cord sets for Magelis XBT display and terminal 1 x RJ45 connector and 1 x 25-pin SUB-D connector for: - XBT N200/N400/NU400 - XBT R410/411 - XBT GT2...GT7 (COM1 port) (1) 2 x RJ45 connectors for : - XBT GT1 (COM1 port) - XBT GT2...GT7 (COM2 port) Weight kg 5.680 10.920 30.000 Connecting cord sets for RS 232 serial link Designation Cord set for Data Terminal Equipment (DTE: printer…) Cord set for Data Communication Equipment (DCE: modem, converter…) Description Reference Length Serial link for Data Terminal Equipment – (DTE) (2) 1 x RJ45 connector and 1 x 9-pin SUB-D female connector Serial link for point-to-point equipment – (DCE) 1 x RJ45 connector and 1 x 9-pin SUB-D male connector 3m Unit reference TCSMCN3M4F3C2 Weight kg 0.150 3m TCSMCN3M4M3S2 0.150 (1) Must be associated with an XBT ZG909 adapter. (2) If the DTE is equipped with a 25-pin SUB-D connector, additionally order the 25-pin female / 9-pin male SUB-D TSX CTC 07 adapter. 3/47 3 4 4/0 0 Contents 4 - Unity™ software 1 Unity™ software b Unity Pro™ programming software v Presentation, setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4/4 v Software structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4/9 v 5 IEC languages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4/12 v Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4/18 v References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4/29 b Unity EFB Toolkit software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4/32 b Unity SFC View software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4/34 b Unity Loader software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4/36 b Unity Application Generator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4/40 4 4/1 Selection guide Modicon® M340™ Automation Platform Unity™ software Unity Pro™ programming software for: - Modicon M340 M - Premium ™ PLC P, Atrium™ PLC A - Quantum ™ PLC Q IEC 61131-3 languages Programming services 4 Instruction List (IL) Ladder (LD) Structured Text (ST) Function Block Diagram (FBD) Sequential Function Chart (SFC)/Grafcet Multitask programming (Master, fast and event-triggered) Multitask programming (Master, fast, auxiliary and event-triggered) Functional view and function modules DFB editor and DFB instances DDT compound data editor Data structure instances and tables EF function block libraries & EFB function blocks User-definable control loops M M M M M M Programmable control loops (FB library) Motion Function Blocks Hot Standby PLC redundancy system M M M M M M M M-A-P M-A-P M-A-P M-A-P M-A-P M-A-P M-A-P-Q M-A-P-Q M-A-P-Q M-A-P-Q M-A-P-Q M-A-P-Q M-A-P-Q M-A-P-Q M-A-P-Q M-A-P-Q M-A-P-Q M-A-P-Q M-A-P M-A-P M-A-P M-A-P M-A-P M-A-P-Q M-A-P-Q M-A-P-Q M-A-P-Q M-A-P-Q P (TSX P57 5p) Q (140 CPU 651/671) M-A-P-Q M-A-P-Q M-A-P-Q M-A-P-Q M-A-P-Q A (TSX PCI 2p) P (TSX P57 2p) M-A-P M-A-P P (TSX H57 24M) A (TSX PCI 20p) P (TSX P57 2p/3p/4p) M-A-P-Q M-A-P P (TSX H57 24/44M) System diagnostics Application diagnostics Diagnostics with location of error source Debugging and PLC simulator display Hypertext link animations in graphic services languages Step by step execution, breakpoint Watchpoint Operator screens Diagnostic viewer Other services Creation of hyperlinks XML import/export Application converters (Concept™ , and PL7 ™ software) Utilities for updating PLC operating systems Communication drivers for Windows® 2000/XP Unity Pro™ Servers - openness UDE support Dynamic exchange with 3rd party tools, OFS OFS exchanges Static exchange thru XML/XVM export files M M M M M M-A-P M-A-P M-A-P M-A-P M-A-P M-A-P-Q M-A-P-Q M-A-P-Q M-A-P-Q M-A-P-Q P (TSX P57 2p/3p/4p/5p) M-A-P-Q M-A-P P (TSX H57 24/44M) Q (140 CPU 67 160) M-A-P-Q M-A-P-Q M-A-P-Q M-A-P-Q M-A-P-Q M M M M M M M-A-P M-A-P M-A-P M-A-P M-A-P M-A-P M-A-P M-A-P-Q M-A-P-Q M-A-P-Q M-A-P-Q M-A-P-Q M-A-P-Q M-A-P-Q M-A-P-Q M-A-P-Q M-A-P-Q M-A-P-Q M-A-P-Q M-A-P-Q M-A-P-Q M M M-A-P M-A-P M-A-P-Q M-A-P-Q M-A-P-Q M-A-P-Q M M-A-P Compatible Modicon platforms Atrium™ slot-PLCs A BMX P34 1000 BMX P34 20p0 – BMX P34 1000 BMX P34 20p0 TSX PCI 204M Premium™ CPUs P – BMX P34 1000 BMX P34 20p0 TSX PCI 204M TSX PCI 354M TSX P57 Cp 0244/0244M TSX P57 Cp 0244/0244M TSX P57 104/1634/154M TSX P57 104/1634/154M TSX P57 204/2634/254M TSX P57 204/2634/254M TSX H57 24M TSX P57 304/3634/354M TSX P57 4634/454M TSX H57 24/44M Quantum™ CPUs Q – – Software name Unity Pro™ software type Unity Pro Small UNY SPU SFp CD30 Unity Pro Medium Unity Pro Large UNY SPU MFp CD30 UNY SPU LFp CD30 Pages 4/27 4/2 Modicon M340 PLCs M M-A-P-Q M-A-P-Q M-A-P-Q 140 CPU 311 10 140 CPU 434 12U BMX P34 1000 BMX P34 20p0 TSX PCI 204M TSX PCI 354M TSX P57 Cp 0244/0244M TSX P57 104/1634/154M TSX P57 204/2634/254M TSX P57 304/3634/354M TSX P57 4634/454M TSX P57 5634/554M TSX H57 24/44M 140 CPU 311 10 140 CPU 434 12U 140 CPU 651 50/60 140 CPU 671 60 Unity Pro Extra Large UNY SPU EFp CD30 0 0 EF/EFB function development software in C language Software for firmware and application loading Software for designing and generating batch/process applications SFC View application diagnostic and monitoring software Pack for developing specific solutions Enhancement of EF and EFB function block libraries: v Creation of families v Development of functions in C language v Access to all data and variable types v Debugging functions (step by step, breakpoint) v Use of functions created in all languages Simple and easy to use software to upgrade a Modicon M340 PLC when the user doesn’t need to display/modify the program. Upload/download: v CPU and Ethernet module firmware v PLC project, including: - Program - Located and unlocated data - User files and user web pages UAG specialist software for designing and generating batch/process applications in a “Collaborative Automation” environment. It provides the unique project database: v process and control (PLCs) v Magelis ® HMI user interface v SCADA supervision (Monitor Pro V7.2) ActiveX® control component for monitoring and diagnostics of chart status (SFC or Grafcet) in sequential applications: v Overview of charts and detailed views v Can be integrated in human/machine interface (HMI) applications v Access to PLC data via OFS (OPC Factory Server) Specialist software for developing made-to-order solutions (for example interfaces with an electrical CAD system, automatic application generator, etc): v Access to Unity Pro™ object servers v Reserved for IT development engineers using Visual Basic or C++ Supplied with: v Microsoft® Visual C++ v GNU source code and compiler Based around re-usable objects (PID, valves, etc) and complying with standard ISA S88, UAG generates the PLC code and the elements required for the HMI system. Complies with the GAMP standard (Good Automation Manufacturing Practice) Includes EFB function block library for Unity Pro™ software (for Premium™, Atrium™ and Quantum™ CPUs) 4 Compatible with: v Unity Pro™ Small, Medium, Large and Extra Large programming software v All Modicon M340 PLCs v All Atrium™ slot-PLCs v All Premium™ Unity™ CPUs v All Quantum™ Unity™ CPUs Compatible with: v Unity Pro ™ Small, Medium, Large and Extra Large programming software v All Modicon M340 PLCs Compatible with: v Unity Pro ™ Extra Large programming software v TSX P57 4634/454M and TSX P57 5634/554M Premium™ Unity™ CPUs v All Quantum™ Unity™ CPUs Compatible with: v Unity Pro ™ Extra Large programming software v All Modicon M340 PLCs v All Atrium ™ slot-PLCs v All Premium ™ Unity™ CPUs v All Quantum ™ Unity™ CPUs Compatible with: v Unity Pro™ Extra Large programming software v All Modicon M340 PLCs v All Atrium™ slot-PLCs v All Premium™ Unity™ CPUs v All Quantum™ Unity ™ CPUs Unity EFB Toolkit UNY SPU ZFU CD30E Unity Loader UNY SMU ZU CD30 Unity Application Generator UNY SEW LFp CD23 Unity SFC View UNY SDU MFp CD20 Unity Developer’s Edition UNY UDE VFU CD21E 4/32 4/38 4/40 4/34 4/28 4/3 Modicon® Automation Platform Presentation Unity Pro™ 0 software User interface Unity Pro’s main screen provides access to all available tools in a user-friendly format that has been redesigned on the basis of feedback received from users of Concept™ and PL7™ application design software. 1 2 3 4 4 5 6 7 This main screen consists of a general view made up of a number of windows and toolbars, which can be arranged as required on the screen: 1 Menu bar from which all functions can be accessed 2 Toolbar consisting of icons from which the most frequently used functions can be accessed 3 Application browser, which can be used to browse the application based on a conventional and/or a functional view 4 Editor windows area, which can be used to view a number of editors at the same time (configuration editor, Structured Text/Ladder etc. language editors, data editor) 5 Tabs for direct access to editor windows 6 Information window with tabs (User Errors, Import/Export, Search/Replace, etc.) 7 Status bar File/Edit toolbar FBD language editor contextual toolbar The three groups are classified according to the category of functions available: b File management (New Project, Open, Save, Print) b Edit (Undo, Redo, Confirm, Go To) b Application services (Analyze Project, Build Project, Browse, Find, Access Library) b Automation platform operating mode (Upload/Download Project, Online/Offline, Run/Stop, Animate, PLC/Simulation Mode) b Debug mode (Set/Remove Breakpoint, etc.) b Window display (Cascade, Horizontal, Vertical) b Online help (non-contextual or contextual) PLC toolbar for debug mode Toolbar with zoom (in and out) Setup: pages 4/5 and 4/8 4/4 Accessing functions All functions can be accessed via drop-down menus from the menu bar. The toolbar, which consists of icons, provides more rapid access to the most frequently used functions. This toolbar, which is displayed by default, can be customized, and is divided into three groups: b Main toolbars, which are visible at all times b Contextual toolbar, which is displayed when the corresponding editor is selected b Toolbar with zoom functions (in and out), full-screen view for editor window Structure: pages 4/9to 4/11 IEC language: pages 4/12 to 4/17 Functions: pages 4/18 to 4/28 References: pages 4/29 and 4/31 Modicon® Automation Platform Setup Unity Pro™ 0 software Project browser The project browser can be used: b To display the contents of a Modicon® M340™ , Atrium ™ , Premium™ or Quantum™ PLC project b To move between the different components of the application (configuration, program, variables, communication, DFB user function blocks, DDT derived function blocks) created by the user The project can be displayed using two types of view: b The structural view, which provides an overall view of the various components of the application. This representation provides a view of the order in which the program sections are processed in the PLC. b The functional view, which provides a view of the project based on specific function modules. This representation provides a breakdown according to consistent functions in relation to the process to be controlled. These two types of view, which are available at any time, can be displayed separately or at the same time (horizontal or vertical windows) by clicking the icons in the toolbar. 1 Structural view This conventional view allows you to access all the different components of the application (configuration, programming, function blocks, debugging, etc.) via the application browser. 2 The browser gives an overall view of the program and offers fast access to all application components. 1 Configuration editor 2 DFB (user function block) and DDT (Derived Data Type) editors 3 Communication networks editor 4 Program editor 5 Variables editor 6 Animation tables editor 7 Operator screens editor 8 Documentation editor 5 3 9 4 From any level in the tree structure, you can: 9 Create a hyperlink to a comment or description 10Create a directory for storing hyperlinks used to access a set of user folders From this level, it is also possible to zoom in and only view the detailed levels for a component on this level. 10 6 7 8 Structural view Functional view Unity Pro software applications support the creation of an application structure for Modicon® M340™, Atrium ™ , Premium™ and Quantum™ platforms based on function modules comprising: b Sections (program code) b Animation tables b Runtime screens The designer can define a multi-level tree structure for the application, independently of the multitask structure of the PLC. Program sections written in Ladder (LD), Structured Text (ST), Instruction List (IL), Function Block Diagram (FBD) or Sequential Function Chart (SFC) language can be associated with each level, along with animation tables and runtime screens. Exporting/Importing function modules All or part of the tree structure can be exported as function modules. In this case, all program sections on the various module levels are exported. Functional view Utilities make it easy to reuse these modules in new applications by means of data and module name reassignment services. Presentation: page 4/4 Structure: pages 4/9 to 4/11 IEC language: pages 4/12 to 4/17 Functions: pages 4/18 to 4/28 References: pages 4/29 and 4/31 4/5 4 Setup (continued) Modicon® Automation Platform Unity Pro™ software Configuration editor Hardware configuration The first step when creating an automation project based on a Modicon® M340™ , Atrium ™ , Premium™ or Quantum™ platform is to select the processor for which a rack and power supply are defined by default. The configuration editor supports the intuitive and graphics-based modification and extension of this configuration with the following elements: b Racks, power supply b PCMCIA memory or communication cards (Atrium/Premium) on the processor b Discrete I/O, analog I/O or application-specific modules b Etc Hardware configuration Configuration and parameter settings for I/O and application-specific modules From the configuration screen for Modicon M340, Atrium, Premium or Quantum racks, the parameters screen displayed for the module concerned can be used to define the operating characteristics and parameters for the selected application, e.g.: b Filter values for discrete I/O b Voltage or current range for analog I/O b Threshold counter values b Trajectory of axes for position control b Weigher calibration for weighing b Transmission speed for communication b Presymbolization for variables associated with modules b Etc 4 I/O modules parameter setting Configuration and parameter settings for communication networks The “Communication” folder in the structural view can be used to define the list of networks connected to the PLC station. Then, the parameters for all elements required for networks to function correctly can be set by: b Creating a logical network to which comments can be associated b Configuring a logical network defining the various associated network services. Once the network module has been created in the configuration, it must then be associated with one of the logical networks. Ethernet TCP/IP, Modbus Plus™ and Fipway® network modules are all configured in this way. Communication folder with 2 networks declared Presentation: page 4/4 4/6 Structure: pages 4/9 to 4/11 IEC language: pages 4/12 to 4/17 Functions: pages 4/18to 4/28 References: pages 4/29 and 4/31 0 Setup (continued) Modicon® Automation Platform Unity Pro™ 0 software Configuration editor (continued) Configuration check The following information can be accessed at any time during configuration: b The power consumption statistics for the power supply in each of the racks in the PLC configuration, for all the different voltages provided by each of these power supplies b The number of inputs/outputs configured (with a Modicon M340, Atrium™ or Premium™ platform) Power supply requirements analysis Configuration of devices on CANopen In the same way as for in-rack modules, the configuration of devices on CANopen though a Modicon M340 is fully integrated in the configuration editor. 4 Graphical configuration of devices on CANopen bus Workstation and project configuration Unity Pro can be used to configure both the working environment (workstation options) and the content of the project itself. It is also possible to configure the toolbars and to run third-party applications from Unity Pro. In addition, users can choose the working language from the list of languages selected when the software was installed. Workstation options The workstation options cover all the characteristics specific to a given workstation. They are applied when Unity Pro is used to develop any project on that station. The following elements can be configured: v How the data in the project being developed is edited and presented (for example, whether or not coils are positioned in the last column of the editor, or the position of the cursor after confirmation of the data entered) v The application conversion strategy from PL7™ , and Concept™ software , IEC and LL984 language v The function library path v The opening mode for Unity Pro: either programming or run mode “Data & Languages” tab in the workstation options Presentation: page 4/4 Structure: pages 4/9 to 4/11 IEC language: pages 4/12 to 4/17 Functions: pages 4/18 to 4/28 References: pages 4/29 and 4/31 4/7 Setup (continued) Modicon® Automation Platform Unity Pro™ software Workstation and project configuration (continued) Project options Unlike the workstation options, the project options cover characteristics that have a direct impact on the programming and operating capabilities offered by the program in the PLC. They are saved in the application, and, consequently, are attached to the project. They can be modified during the course of the project. Project option configuration covers the following elements: v Building the project with all or part of the data it contains so that it can be retrieved on a new terminal v Use of diagnostic functions, and language for messages v Warnings generated during project analysis: overlapping of addresses, unused variables etc. v Language extension: If none of the boxes are checked, the program is strictly compliant with standard IEC 61131-3. Extensions are possible in all five of Unity Pro's languages. v Access management to runtime screens in online mode “Build” tab in the workstation options 4 Other possible options Users can create their own toolbars by reusing the default icons provided in the toolbars. User-created toolbar containing all the debugging tools It is also possible to enhance Unity Pro's main menu bar by adding direct links to other software tools. A utility in the Unity Pro program group can be used to change the working language. This is then applied the next time the program is launched. Six languages are available: English, French, German, Italian, Spanish and Chinese. Menu for adding and deleting tool access from Unity Pro Presentation: page 4/4 4/8 Structure: pages 4/9 to 4/11 IEC language: pages 4/12 to 4/17 Functions: pages 4/18 to 4/28 References: pages 4/29 and 4/31 0 Modicon® Automation Platform Software structure 0 Unity Pro™ software Software structure The Modicon M340, Atrium™ , Premium™ and Quantum™ platforms set up by Unity Pro software support two types of application structure: b Single-task: This is the more simple default structure, in which only the master task is executed. b Multitask: This structure, which is more suitable for high-performance real-time events, consists of a master task, a fast task, periodic tasks, and high-priority event-triggered tasks. The master, fast and periodic tasks are made up of sections and subroutines. The sections and subroutines can be programmed in any of the following languages: Structured Text (ST), Instruction List (IL), Ladder (LD) or Function Block Diagram (FBD). The event-triggered tasks use the same languages. Sequential Function Chart (SFC) or Grafcet language is reserved for master task sections. The table below lists the possible program tasks for Modicon M340, Atrium, Premium and Quantum PLCs respectively. Platform Atrium Quantum BMX P34 1000 BMX P34 20p0 TSX P 57 Cp 244M TSX P 57 2p(3)4M TSX P 57 0244M TSX P 57 3p(3)4M TSX P 57 1p4M TSX P 57 4p(3)4M TSX P 57 554M TSX P 57 5634M TSX PCI 57 204 M TSX PCI 57 454 M 140 CPU 31110 140 CPU 434 12U 140 CPU 651 p0 140 CPU 671 60 Cyclic or periodic master task Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Periodic fast task Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Periodic auxiliary tasks – – – – 4 – – 4 32 32 32 64 64 64 32 – 32 64 – 64 128 32 128 64 – 64 64 16 64 128 32 128 Event-triggered tasks From modules From timers Total Modicon M340 Premium 4 Structure, modular and portable programming Airlock (LD) Airlock_Alarm (LD) Oven_1 (SFC) Mon_Sec (LD) Tunnel_1 (SFC) Oven_Alarm (ST) Extractor (FBD) SR0 Cleaning_Alarm (ST) Cleaning (ST) Master task The tasks of a Unity Pro program for Modicon M340, Atrium, Premium™ or Quantum™ platforms are composed of several parts known as sections and subroutines. Each of these sections can be programmed in the most appropriate language for the process to be executed. Such division into sections enables a structured program to be created and program modules to be generated or added with ease. SR0 Subroutines can be called from any section of the task to which they belong or from other subroutines in the same task. Fast task Compatibility of languages compliant with IEC standard 61131-3: Unity Pro software can be configured (Tools/Project Settings/Language Extensions menu) to ensure that applications generated are compliant with IEC standard 61131-3. Furthermore, as long as you use only the standard instruction libraries, you will be able to reuse programs created in this way on any Modicon M340, Atrium, Premium, or Quantum platform. Presentation: page 4/4 Setup: pages 4/5 to 4/8 IEC language: pages 4/12 to 4/17 Functions: pages 4/18 to 4/28 References: pages 4/29 and 4/31 4/9 Memory structure (continued) Modicon® Automation Platform Unity Pro™ 0 software Single-task memory structure Start of period Internal processing Input acquisition (%I) RUN STOP Program processing Updating of outputs (%O) Input acquisition (%I) RUN STOP Program processing Updating of outputs (%O) Internal processing End of period Cyclic execution Periodic execution 4 Two types of cyclic execution are supported: b Normal cyclic execution. This is the default option. b Periodic execution. This type of execution, as well as the period, are selected by the user during programming when the task parameters are set (master task). Normal execution (cyclic) At the end of each scan, the PLC system launches a new scan. The execution time of each scan is monitored by a software watchdog whose value is defined by the user (max. 1500 ms). In the event of overrun, a fault occurs causing: b The scan to stop immediately (STOP) b A fault state to be displayed on the front panel of the processor b The alarm relay for the main rack power supply to be set to 0 Periodic execution A new scan is executed at the end of each period. The execution time of the scan must be less than the time of the period defined (max. 255 ms). In the event of overrun, the latter is stored in a system bit (%S19), which can be reset to 0 by the user (via the program or terminal). A software watchdog, which can be configured by the user (max. 1500 ms), monitors the scan time. In the event of overrun, an execution fault is indicated (see normal execution). The scan execution times (the last scan, the longest scan and the shortest scan) are stored in system words %SW 30/31/32. Multitask software structure Modicon® M340™, Atrium™ , Premium ™ and Quantum™ platforms support a multitask structure comprising: b 1 master task (divided into several sections programmed in ST, IL, LD, FBD, and SFC languages) b 1 fast task (divided into sections) b 0 to 4 auxiliary tasks (divided into sections) (1) b 1 or more event-triggered tasks (only one section per task) These tasks are independent and are executed in parallel, with the PLC processor managing their execution priority. When an event occurs, or at the start of the fast task scan: b If any lower-priority tasks are currently being executed, they are suspended. b The event-triggered task or fast task is executed. b The interrupted task resumes once execution of the priority task has been completed. Event-triggered tasks Master task Fast task Auxiliary tasks (1) Aux1 Timer_1 Fast Airlock_Alarm (IL) Airlock (LD) Mast EVT1 Aux0 Process value (FBD) Mon_Dry (LD) Oven_1 (SFC) EVT0 Outside limits Oven Diag (ST) Tunnel_1 (SFC) Oven_Alarm (ST) Temp. (FBD) Cleaning_Alarm (ST) Extractor (FBD) SR0 SR0 SR0 Drying (LD) Priority +…- This structure optimizes the way in which processing power is employed and can be used to structure the application and simplify design and debugging, as each task can be written and debugged independently of the others. (1) Tasks reserved for top-of-the-range Premium TSX P57 5 p4M and Quantum 140 CPU 651 p0/67160 processors. Presentation: page 4/4 4/10 Software structure: pages 4/9 to 4/11 IEC language: pages 4/12 to 4/17 Functions: pages 4/18 to 4/28 References: pages 4/29 and 4/31 Memory structure (continued) Modicon® Automation Platform Unity Pro™ 0 software Multitask memory structure (continued) Master task This task, which can be periodic or cyclic, executes the main program. It is activated systematically. Each of its component sections and subroutines can be programmed in Ladder (LD), Function Block Diagram (FBD), Structured Text (ST) or Instruction List (IL) language. Several sections of the master task can be programmed in Sequential Function Chart (SFC) or Grafcet language. Fast task This task, which has a higher priority than the master task, is periodic to allow time for tasks with lower priorities to be executed. It should be used when fast periodic changes in discrete inputs need to be monitored and acknowledged. The execution of the master task (lower priority) is suspended while the fast task is being executed. Processing operations in this task must be as short as possible, to avoid adversely affecting master task processing operations. Each of the component sections and subroutines of the fast task can be programmed in Instruction List, Structured Text, Ladder or Function Block Diagram language (ST, IL, LD or FBD). Auxiliary tasks These tasks, which are available on top-of-the-range Premium™ TSX P57 5p4M and Quantum™ 140 CPU 651 p0/67160 processors, are designed for use with slower types of processing operation such as measurement, process control, HMI, application diagnostics, etc. Periodic type auxiliary tasks have the lowest level of priority and are executed once the higher-priority periodic tasks (master and fast) have completed their scan. Each of the component sections and subroutines of the fast task can be programmed in Instruction List, Structured Text, Ladder or Function Block Diagram language (ST, IL, LD or FBD). Application browser Event-triggered tasks Unlike the tasks described above, these tasks are not linked to one period. The execution of these tasks is triggered asynchronously by: An event from certain application-specific modules (e.g.: overrun of a counter threshold, change of state of a discrete input) An event from the event timers These tasks are processed before all other tasks and are thus suitable for processing requiring very short reaction times in comparison to the arrival of the event. Modicon® M340™ , Atrium ™ , Premium™ or Quantum ™ platforms have 3 levels of priority (these are, in descending order, module event EVT0, module events EVTi and timer events Timeri). These tasks, each comprised of a single section, can be programmed in Instruction List, Structured Text, Ladder or Function Block Diagram language (ST, IL, LD or FBD). Input acquisition Assignment of I/O channels to tasks Each of the master, fast or event-triggered tasks reads (at the start of the scan) and writes (at the end of the scan) the inputs assigned to it. By default, they are assigned to the master task. Program processing For the Quantum™ platform, the remote inputs/outputs (RIO) are only assigned to the master task (these assignments can be made per station or for each of the component sections of the task), while the distributed inputs/outputs (DIO) are all assigned to the master task (without assignment to its component sections). For event-triggered tasks, it is possible to assign input/output channels (1) other than those relating to the event. Exchanges are then performed implicitly at the start of processing for inputs and at the end of processing for outputs. Updating of outputs (1) These channel assignments are made per I/O module for Quantum PLC and per channel for Atrium/Premium PLC inputs/outputs. Program execution Presentation: page 4/4 Setup: pages 4/5 and 4/6 IEC language: pages 4/10 to 4/15 Functions: pages 4/16 to 4/26 References: pages 4/26 and 4/27 4/11 4 Modicon® Automation Platform IEC language Unity Pro™ software The five IEC languages The five graphical or textual languages available in Unity Pro are used for programming Modicon® M340™ , Atrium™ , Premium™ and Quantum ™ automation platforms. The 3 graphical languages are: b Ladder (LD) b Function Block Diagram (FBD) b Sequential Function Chart (SFC) or Grafcet The 2 textual languages are: b Structured Text (ST) b Instruction List (IL) For these 5 languages, you can use the standard set of instructions compliant with IEC standard 61131-3 to create applications, which can be transferred from one platform to another. Unity Pro software also provides extensions to this standard set of instructions. When they are specific to Modicon M340, Atrium/Premium and Quantum ™ PLCs, these extensions support the development of more complex applications in order to maximize the potential of the specific features of each of these platforms. Functionality common to all five language editors 4 The editors for each of the 5 languages provide a number of common tools used for writing, reading and analyzing programs in a user-friendly manner: b The text editors for Instruction List (IL) and Structured Text (ST) support: v Text entry in insert or overwrite mode v The use of dialog boxes for the assisted entry of variables, functions, function blocks or assignment instructions v Checks on data entry to detect syntax or semantics errors. The user is informed of the result of this check by red wavy underlining or by a change in the color of the text concerned. v Access to a set of colors, which can be used to facilitate reading by distinguishing text (black) from operators (red), language key words (blue), and program comments (green) b The graphics editors for Ladder (LD) language, Function Block Diagram (FBD) language and Sequential Function Chart (SFC) language feature: v A set of graphic elements for direct access to the various graphic symbols in the language via the mouse or keyboard v A pop-up menu, which can be accessed by right-clicking with the mouse b Unlimited number and length of comments. These comments can be positioned as text objects in any cell (graphical languages) or at any point in expressions (textual languages). b Assisted data entry functions for: v Accessing DFB function libraries, the variables editor or the text object for entering comments v Initializing a variable reference v Initializing the animation table on selected variables v Displaying and modifying the properties of the selected variable v Creating variables in real time without having to use the data editor b Cut, Copy, Paste, Delete, Move ... b Setting bookmarks on lines of text or in the margin so that you can: v Easily locate lines in important program sections v Browse in an editor by bookmark, label, or the line and column number Presentation: page 4/4 4/12 Setup: pages 4/5 to 4/8 Structure: pages 4/9 to 4/11 Functions: pages 4/18 to 4/28 References: pages 4/29 and 4/31 0 IEC languages (continued) Modicon® Automation Platform Unity Pro™ 0 software Ladder (LD) language Each section or subroutine using Ladder language consists of a series of rungs, which are executed sequentially by the PLC. Each rung consists of graphic objects (placed in cells arranged in columns and lines) corresponding to contacts, links, coils, operation blocks, EF/EFB/DFB function blocks, jumps, SR calls, etc. 4 Program structure (section or subroutine) Each Ladder language section may contain: b Between 11 and 64 columns (number set by the user) b Up to 2000 lines (for all rungs in the section) Graphics palette in the Ladder language editor Mixed Display mode supports the unrestricted display of comments, addresses and symbols for the variables used for rungs. Presentation: page 4/4 Setup: pages 4/5 to 4/8 Structure: pages 4/9 to 4/11 Functions: pages /18 to 4/28 References: pages 4/29 and 4/31 4/13 IEC languages (continued) Modicon® Automation Platform Unity Pro™ software Function Block Diagram (FBD) language Function Block Diagram language is a graphical language based on function blocks associated with variables or parameters, which are linked together. This language is particularly suitable for process control applications. 4 Program structure (section or subroutine) The graphical language FBD supports three types of function blocks: b Elementary blocks (EFs) b Elementary Function Blocks (EFBs), sorted into different libraries depending on their type of use b Derived Function Blocks (DFBs), which have a structure identical to that of EFBs but are created by the user with the ST, IL, LD or FBD programming languages Within the same section, subroutines can be called using a specific block. Program jumps to a block instance can also be programmed. A section programmed in FBD language contains the equivalent of a default grid with 30 columns and 23 rows. This can be extended to a wider page. Function Block Assistant Presentation: page 4/4 4/14 Setup: pages 4/5 to 4/8 Structure: pages 4/9 to 4/11 Functions: pages 4/18 to 4/28 References: pages 4/29 and 4/31 0 IEC languages (continued) Modicon® Automation Platform Unity Pro™ 0 software Sequential Function Chart (SFC) and Grafcet language Sequential Function Chart (and Grafcet) language can be used to describe the sequential part of an automation system in simple graphical format using steps and transitions. SFC language does not process charts in the same way as Grafcet language: b SFC only authorizes one token in one chart. b Grafcet language authorizes several tokens in one chart. Unity Pro software has one editor for these two languages with the option of defining behavior in the application settings (Tools/Project Settings/Language Extensions menu). Program structure (master task section) SFC language is only used in sections belonging to the master task. Each SFC section consists of a main chart sub-section CHART and sub-sections for each of the macro-steps. The component parts of the charts are: b Macro-steps, which are the sole representation of a set of steps and transitions (used to set up a hierarchical chart structure) b Steps b Transitions and directed links between steps and transitions Associated with steps and transitions respectively, the actions and transition conditions can be: b Integrated into the CHART or macro-step charts, in which case the actions or transition conditions are defined by a single variable b Processed in specific sections, in which case dedicated processing (to be programmed in Ladder, Function Block Diagram, Structured Text or Instruction List language) is necessary In order to check that machine scans have been completed successfully, activity times (minimum, maximum) can be associated with each step. These times are set by the user. SFC structure in the browser SFC chart Program structure (section in master task) For each SFC section, the graphics editor provides a maximum of: b One grid containing 32 columns and 200 rows, or 6400 cells. Steps, transitions or jumps all need one cell respectively. b 1024 steps (macro-steps and steps in macro-steps) b 20 actions assigned to the same step b 100 steps activated at the same time b 100 actions activated at the same time To help you to create basic charts, graphic screens can be used to create “n” steps in series and “m” steps in parallel in a single operation. Dialog boxes can be used to assign associated properties to steps (activity time, actions), transitions (variable linked to transition condition), etc. Step properties Presentation: page 4/4 Setup: pages 4/5 to 4/8 Structure: pages 4/9 to 4/11 Functions: pages 4/18 to 4/28 References: pages 4/29 and 4/31 4/15 4 IEC languages (continued) Modicon® Automation Platform Unity Pro™ software Structured Text (ST) language Structured Text language is a sophisticated algorithmic type language, which is particularly suitable for programming complex arithmetic functions, table operations, message handling, etc. 4 Program structure (section or subroutine) Structured Text language, which can be used to directly transcribe an analysis based on an organization chart, is structured into expressions composed of a series of instructions organized in lines. There is no limit to the number of characters an instruction line may contain. The only limit is the program memory available for the Modicon M340, Premium ™ and Quantum ™ platforms, except on TSX P57 10…40 processors, where the limit is 64 Kb. Four preformatted expression structures can be called up directly from the toolbar: b Conditional action : IF…THEN…ELSIF…THEN…ELSE…END-IF; b Iterative conditional action: WHILE…DO…END_WHILE; REPEAT…UNTIL…END_REPEAT; b Repetitive action: FOR…TO…BY…DO…END_FOR; b Selective action: CASE…OF…ELSE…END_CASE; The operands used in the expressions are bit variables, word variables or variables linked to function blocks. To make the expressions easier to read, different colors are used to identify objects, language key words and program comments. Presentation: page 4/4 4/16 Setup: pages 4/5 to 4/8 Structure: pages 4/9 to 4/11 Functions: pages 4/18 to 4/28 References: pages 4/29 and 4/31 0 IEC languages (continued) Modicon® Automation Platform Unity Pro™ 0 software Instruction List (IL) language Instruction List language is a language representing the equivalent of a Ladder diagram in text form. It can be used to write Boolean and arithmetic equations using all the functions available in the Unity Pro language (calling of functions and function blocks, assignment of variables, creation of program jumps, branching to subroutines within a program section, etc.). 4 Program structure (section or subroutine) A program in Instruction List language comprises a sequence of instructions classified into the following different families: b Bit instructions, e.g. read input: LD overspeed b Function block instructions, e.g. call timer: CAL MOTOR_TIMER b Numerical instructions using single, double and floating point integers, e.g.: LD Result ADD Surplus ST Archive b Word table or character string instructions, e.g. make assignment: LD Result:10:= Setpoint:10 b Program instructions, e.g. SR call: CALL SR10 The operands used in the expressions are bit variables, word variables or variables linked to function blocks. Presentation: page 4/4 Setup: pages 4/5 to 4/8 Structure: pages 4/9 to 4/11 Functions: pages 4/18 to 4/28 References: pages 4/29 and 4/31 4/17 Modicon® Automation Platform Functions Unity Pro™ software Data editor The data editor, which can be accessed from the structural view of the project, provides a single tool for performing the following editing tasks: b Declaration of data including variables and function blocks (declaration of their type, instants and attributes) b Use and archiving of function block data types in different libraries b Hierarchical view of data structures b Searching, sorting and filtering of data b Creation of a hyperlink to access a description from any variable comment The data is displayed under four tabs: b “Variables” tab for the creation and management of the following data instances: bits, words, double words, inputs/outputs, tables, and structures b “DDT Types” tab for the creation of derived data types (tables and structures) b “Function Blocks” tabs for the declaration of EFB and DFB function blocks b “DFB Types” for the creation of DFB user function block data types Data editor Each data instance has several attributes, of which: b The name and type of the variable are mandatory b The comment, physical address in the memory or initial values are optional The data editor columns can be configured (number of columns, order). All the attributes associated with a variable can be displayed in a properties window. 4 This editor can be accessed at any time during programming by selecting variables for data modification or creation. Variable attributes Presentation: page 4/4 4/18 Setup: pages 4/5 to 4/8 Structure: pages 4/9 to 4/11 IEC language: pages 4/12 to 4/17 References: pages 4/29 and 4/31 0 Functions (continued) Modicon® Automation Platform Unity Pro™ 0 software DFB user function blocks Users can create their own function blocks for specific application requirements on Modicon® M340™ , Atrium ™ , Premium™ and Quantum ™ platforms using Unity Pro software. Once created and saved in the library, these user function blocks can be reused as easily as EFBs (Elementary Function Blocks). DFB user function blocks can structure an application, such as when a program sequence is repeated several times in the application or for correcting a standard programming routine. They can be read-only protected or read/write-protected. They can be exported to all other Unity Pro applications. Using a DFB function block in one or more applications: b Simplifies program design and entry b Improves program readability and comprehension b Facilitates program debugging (all variables handled by the DFB block function are identified in the data editor) b Enables the use of private variables specific to the DFBs, which are independent of the application A DFB is set up in several phases: b The DFB is designed by assigning a name, a set of parameters (inputs, outputs, and public and private internal variables), and a comment via the data editor. b The code is created in one or more sections of the program, with the following languages selected according to requirements: Structured Text, Instruction List, Ladder or Function Block Diagram (ST, IL, LD or FBD). b The DFB may be stored in a library with an associated version number. b A DFB instance is created in the data editor or when the function is called in the program editor. b This instance is used in the program in the same way as an EFB (Elementary Function Block). (The instance can be created from within the program.) Main characteristics Inputs Outputs Inputs/outputs Public internal variables Private internal variables Comment Program sections 32 max. (1) 32 max. (2) 32 max. (1) (2) Unlimited (3), can be accessed via the application program Unlimited (3), cannot be accessed via the application program 1024 characters max. Unlimited, each section can be programmed independently in one of the 4 languages (IL, ST, LD, and FBD). (1) The maximum cumulative total of inputs and inputs/outputs is 32. (2) The maximum cumulative total of outputs and inputs/outputs is 32. (3) For Premium processors, see page 1/9: characteristics of memories, maximal sizes of objects zones, internal unlocated data, DFB & EFB function blocks. Presentation: page 4/4 Setup: pages 4/5 to 4/8 Structure: pages 4/9 to 4/11 IEC language: pages /12 to 4/17 References: pages 4/29 and 4/31 4/19 4 Functions (continued) Modicon® Automation Platform Unity Pro™ software Function block libraries The function and function block libraries manager contains all the elements provided with Unity Pro software. The functions and function blocks are organized into libraries, which themselves consist of families. Depending on the type of PLC selected and the model of processor, the users will have a sub-set of these libraries available to write their applications. However, the “Base Lib” library contains a set of functions and function blocks, the majority of which are compatible with all platforms. In particular, it contains the blocks compliant with IEC 61131-3. The “Base Lib” library is structured into families: b Timers and counters b Internal process control b Array management b Comparison b Date and time management b Logic processing b Mathematical processing b Statistical processing b Character string processing b Type-to-type data conversion The “Base Lib” library, which covers standard automation functions, is supplemented by other, more application-specific libraries, and some platform-specific functions: b Communication library, providing an easy means of integrating communication programs from PLCs with those used by HMIs from the PLC application program. Like other function blocks, these EFBs can be used in all languages to exchange data between PLCs or to deliver data to be displayed on an HMI. b Process control library. The CONT_CTL library can be used to set up process-specific control loops. In particular, it offers controller, derivative and integral control functions. CONT_CTL comes with other families, providing additional algorithms, e.g.: EFBs for calculating mean values, selecting a maximum value, detecting edges or assigning a hysteresis to process variables. b Diagnostics library, which can be used to monitor actuators. Also, it contains EFBs for active diagnostics, reactive diagnostics, interlocking diagnostics, permanent process condition diagnostics, dynamic diagnostics, monitoring of signal groups, etc. b I/O management library, providing services to handle information exchanged with hardware modules (formatting data, scaling…) b Motion Function Blocks library containing a set of predefined functions and data structures to manage motion on drives and servo drives connected on CANopen. b Motion library for motion control and fast counting b “System” library, which provides EFBs for the execution of system functions (such as evaluation of scan time, availability of several different system clocks, SFC section monitoring, and display of system state) as well as management of files inside the Modicon M340 memory cartridge. b Obsolete library containing all function blocks used by legacy programming software that are needed to perform application conversions 4 Type library manager Management of user standards Users may create libraries and families for storing their own DFB function blocks and DDT data structures. This enhancement allows users to take advantage of programming standards adapted to their needs, along with version management. This means that it is possible to: b Check the version of the elements used in an application program against those stored in the library b Perform an upgrade, if necessary User-defined library manager Presentation: page 4/4 4/20 Setup: pages 4/5 to 4/8 Structure: pages 4/9 to 4/11 IEC language: pages 4/12 to 4/17 References: pages 4/29 and 4/31 0 Functions (continued) Modicon® Automation Platform Unity Pro™ 0 software Debugging tools Insertion/removal of watchpoint Execution: step-by-step command Unity Pro software offers a complete set of tools for debugging Modicon® M340™ , Atrium™ , Premium ™ or Quantum™ applications. A tool palette provides direct access to the main functions: b Dynamic program animation b Setting of watchdogs or breakpoints (not authorized in event-triggered tasks) b Step-by-step program execution. A function in this mode enables section-by-section execution. Instruction-by-instruction execution can be launched from the previous breakpoint. Three execution commands are therefore possible when the element to be processed is a subroutine (SR) or DFB user block: v Detailed step-by-step or “Step Into”. This command is used to move to the first element of the SR or DFB. v Overall step-by-step or “Step Over”. This command is used to process the entire SR or DFB. v Outgoing step-by-step or “Step Out”. This command is used to move to the next instruction after the SR or DFB element. b Independent execution of the master (MAST), fast (FAST), auxiliary (AUX), and event-triggered (EVTi) tasks. Animation of program elements Dynamic animation is managed section by section. A button in the toolbar is used to activate or deactivate animation for each section. When the PLC is in RUN, this mode can be used to view, simultaneously: b The animation of a program section, regardless of the language used b The variables window containing the application objects created automatically from the section viewed Several windows can be displayed and animated simultaneously. The “Tool tip” function, which uses help balloons, can be used to view a variable and its content simultaneously when the object is selected with the mouse (or other pointing device). The user can add inspect windows to display variables inside the program. Animation of ST program Two types of animation are supported: b Standard: The variables of the active section are refreshed at the end of the master task (MAST). b Synchronized: The watchpoint can be used to synchronize the display of animated variables with a program element, to determine their value at this precise point in the program. Animation table Tables containing the variables of the application to be monitored or modified can be created by data entry or initialized automatically from the selected program section. In addition to data animation it is possible to: b Modify bit variables or force them to 0 or 1 b Change the display format b Copy or move variables b Search by cross-reference b Display the list of forced bits These tables can be stored in the application. Animation table Debugging of DFB user function blocks The parameters and public variables of these blocks are displayed and animated in real time using animation tables, with the possibility of modifying and forcing the required objects. In the same way as with other program elements, the watchpoint, breakpoint, step-by-step execution, and program code diagnostics functions can be used to analyze the behavior of DFBs. Setting a breakpoint in a DFB user function block instance stops the execution of the task containing this block. Animation of a DFB program Presentation: page 4/4 Setup: pages 4/5 to 4/8 Structure: pages 4/9 to 4/11 IEC language: pages 4/12 to 4/17 References: pages 4/29 and 4/31 4/21 4 Functions (continued) Modicon® Automation Platform Unity Pro™ software Debugging in Sequential Function Chart (SFC) language The various debugging tools are also available in SFC language. However, unlike other sections (IL, ST, LD or FBD) an SFC section executed step by step does not stop execution of the task but instead freezes the SFC chart. Several breakpoints can be declared simultaneously within a single SFC section. Numerous commands are available in this debugging mode via the control panel: b Deactivate active step(s) b Activate initial step(s) b Disable step execution times b Freeze chart regardless of transition conditions b Stop processing steps b Move to the next step taking account of the transition conditions b Enable transition and move to next step(s) (detailed step-by-step command, “Step Into”) b Enable transition in order to execute the end of the macro-step (outgoing step-by-step command, “Step Out”) b Chart the steps for which markers have been set. SFC control panel PLC simulator The simulator integrated in Unity Pro can be used to test the application program for Modicon® M340™ , Atrium ™, Premium™ or Quantum™ PLCs from the PC terminal without having to connect to the PLC processor. The functions provided by the debugging tools are available for debugging the master, fast and auxiliary tasks. As the simulator does not manage the PLC I/O, animation tables can be used to simulate the state of inputs by forcing them to 0 or 1. The simulator can be connected to third-party applications via an OPC server with OFS (OPC Factory Server) software. 4 Simulator control panel Documentation editor The documentation editor is built around the Documentation Browser, which shows the file structure in tree form. It allows all or part of the application file to be printed in A4 or U.S. letter format on any graphics printer accessible under Windows ® that uses True Type technology. The documentation editor supports the creation of user-specific documentation files using the following headings: b Title page b Contents b General information b Title block b Configuration b EF, EFB and DFB type function blocks b User variables b Communication b Project structure b Program b Animation tables and cross-references b Runtime screens Access to documentation editor The documentation editor can generate the documentation file based on two different structures: b Structural view: All the objects in the project are associated with their corresponding headings. b Functional view: The objects in the project are associated with the function modules to which they belong. The documentation file can be created and saved as the project progresses, from one Unity Pro session to another. Presentation: page 4/4 4/22 Setup: pages 4/5 to 4/8 Structure: pages 4/9 to 4/11 IEC language: pages 4/12 to 4/17 References: pages 4/29 and 4/31 0 Modicon® Automation Platform Functions (continued) Unity Pro™ 0 software Integrated diagnostics Presentation Diagnostics integrated into Modicon® M340™ , Atrium™ , Premium™ and Quantum ™ automation platforms System diagnostics Diagnostics viewers Vijeo Designer Monitor Pro Thin client Magelis iPC Processor for system bits and words In-rack I/O modules Remote I/O modules on Fipio® bus or CANopen Higher-level M.E.S. Ethernet TCP/IP Cell level Application diagnostics Magelis XBT GT Quantum, Premium, Modicon M340 Machine level Unity Pro PC The diagnostics offer for Modicon M340, Atrium, Premium, and Quantum platforms is based on three components: b System diagnostics b DFB and EFB diagnostic function blocks (for system and application diagnostics) b Error message display system or viewers supplied as standard with Magelis® XBT GT and iPC® terminals, Vijeo™ Designer/Monitor Pro™ supervisory software and Unity Pro setup software. Functions System diagnostics The system diagnostics for the Modicon M340, Atrium, Premium, and Quantum platforms supports the monitoring of system bits/words, and I/O modules, and the activity times (minimum/maximum) of SFC steps. After the user chooses the relevant option in the application configuration, any event will result in time-stamped messages logged inside the diagnostic buffer in the PLC. These events are displayed on a diagnostics viewer (1) automatically without the need of any additional programming. With the assistance of Unity Pro's integrated diagnostics, this function can be used to perform 1st level diagnostics of the elements in the configuration, up to and including each I/O module channel. Configuration level Viewer window (example with Unity Pro software) Module level Channel level (1) Diagnostics viewers are tools used to display and acknowledge error messages relating to diagnostics. They are supplied as standard with Unity Pro, Vijeo Designer and Monitor Pro software, with Magelis terminals, and with the PLC web server which is accessible through a thin client Magelis iPC terminal. 4/23 4 Modicon® Automation Platform Functions (continued) Unity Pro™ software Integrated diagnostics Application diagnostics Unity Pro software also has a library of function blocks for monitoring, called diagnostic DFBs and EFBs. The library of diagnostic function blocks contains: b Manufacturer blocks for system diagnostics v IO_DIA input/output fault, which is used to monitor the state of inputs/outputs. v ASI_DIA, which monitors whether an error has occurred on the AS-Interface bus (module or bus fault, no slave, slave not configured or faulty). b Manufacturer blocks for application diagnostics, for example: v EV_DIA, which monitors whether an event (bit status) has the correct value at a given time (no notion of timing). v MV_DIA, D_GRP, D_REA, which monitor whether an event (the change in the status of a bit) occurs within the specified time conditions. v ALRM_DIA, which monitors the combination of the status of 2 bits. v NEPO_DIA and TEPO_DIA, which can be used to check, control and perform diagnostics for elements in the working part of the system made up of the combination of 2 actuators and 2 sensors. Usrst_dia Inputs ED ERROR COND 4 Outputs STATUS AREA_NR OP_CTRL b Open diagnostics blocks These enable users to create their own diagnostic function blocks to meet the specific requirements of their applications and therefore to supplement the manufacturer DFBs and EFBs described above. They can be created from 2 model blocks, which must be written in Ladder (LD), Structured Text (ST), Function Block Diagram (FBD) or Instruction List (IL) language. Diagnostics with fault cause analysis When a fault occurs, Unity Pro analyzes the program sections concerned and opens a second window displaying the causes and probable sources of the fault. The user or process operator is guided though the fault-finding process, enabling machine downtimes to be reduced. The configuration module or instruction which is the source of the fault can also be accessed via the diagnostics viewer integrated into Unity Pro, directly from the alarm in the viewer output window (see page 4/22). Fault cause analysis Presentation: page 4/4 4/24 Setup: pages 4/5 to 4/8 Structure: pages 4/9 to 4/11 IEC language: pages 4/12 to 4/17 References: pages 4/29 and 4/31 0 Functions (continued) Modicon® Automation Platform Unity Pro™ 0 software Integrated diagnostics Diagnostics viewers Diagnostic viewers in Modicon® M340™ , Atrium ™ , Premium ™ , and Quantum™ platforms automatically display diagnostic events for management of faults and alarms. The viewer function is supplied as standard with: b Vijeo™ Look and Monitor Pro™ V7 supervisory software b Unity Pro programming software b Magelis® XBT GT and Magelis® iPC HMI terminals The viewer integrated in Unity Pro can also access the instruction or module which is the source of the fault. See “Diagnostics with fault cause analysis”, page 4/21. Modicon M340, Atrium, Premium and Quantum platforms have multiviewer capability (can be used with a maximum of 15 viewers). A PC-compatible station with the viewer function can be multi-PLC (can be used with a maximum of 15 Modicon M340, Atrium, Premium, and/or Quantum platforms). The viewer structure supports: b A single point for fault management in each application b Time-stamping of the occurrence of faults at the source b Storage of intermittent faults in memory b Viewer functioning that is independent of the viewer used. The frame is identical for all viewers. b Automatic archiving of all error messages Output window The diagnostics viewer takes the form of an output window divided into 2 sections: b A message list indicating, for each alarm: state, DFB type, geographical zone, dates and times of occurrence/correction associated message and status b An area for additional information about the selected message: type, comment, date of occurrence, specific data, variables in error state, etc. Viewer Operator screens The operator screen tool is integrated into Unity Pro. The operator screens are designed to facilitate the operation of automated processes during debugging, startup and maintenance. The operator screens provide a set of information (explanatory texts, display of dynamic values, push buttons, and synoptics), enabling users to act quickly and easily to modify and dynamically monitor PLC variables. The operator screens editor provides all the HMI elements needed for the animated design and viewing of processes. It enables these screens to be designed using specific tools: b Screen: Create runtime screens, which can be classified according to family. b Message: Create messages to be displayed. b Objects: Create a graphic objects library using: v Geometrical elements (line, rectangle, ellipse, images, such as controller front panels.) v Control elements (buttons, data entry fields, screen browsing controls, etc.) v Animation elements (colors, flashing elements, bar graphs, etc.) When the station on which Unity Pro has been installed is connected to the PLC, the user can obtain a dynamic display of the screens according to the state of the process. Screen sequencing is possible, depending on the priority attributed, either via the keyboard or a PLC request. When online, the Unity Pro application program can be accessed directly from the operator screens by clicking the selected object in a synoptic screen view. It is also possible to activate the animation table or cross-reference functions by selecting one or more variables on the screen. To make the display easier to read, the synoptic views can be displayed in full-screen view. Since it is possible to build or modify an operator screen while the PLC is running, this service increases the productivity during the commissioning and maintenance phases. Presentation: page 4/4 Setup: pages 4/5 to 4/8 Structure: pages 4/9 to 4/11 IEC language: pages 4/12 to 4/17 References: pages 4/29 and 4/31 4/25 4 Functions (continued) Modicon® Automation Platform Unity Pro™ 0 software Modifying the program with the PLC in RUN Unity Pro enables changes to be made to the program when the PLC connected to the programming terminal is in RUN. These modifications are made by performing the following operations: b When necessary, transferring the application from the PLC to the PC terminal running Unity Pro. b Preparing the program changes. These program modifications can be of any type and in any language (IL, ST, LD, FBD, and SFC), for example adding/deleting SFC steps or actions. Furthermore, modifications can be made to the code of a DFB user function block (although its interface cannot be modified). b Updating the program in the PLC (in RUN) to reflect these program changes. This function allows program code and data in different parts of the application to be added or modified in a single modification session (thus making modification unified and consistent with regard to the controlled process). This increased flexibility comes at a cost in terms of the program memory volume required. Cross-References functions The Unity Pro Cross-References function, which is available in standalone mode (offline) and when connected to the PLC (online), allows users to view all the elements of a PLC application by searching for variables of any type. This view indicates where the declared variable is used as well as the mode in which it is used (write, read, etc.). This function also provides access to the Search/Replace function for variable names. The variables search can be initialized from any editor (language, data, runtime screen, animation table, etc.). 4 Import/export function The import/export function available in Unity Pro supports the following operations from the structural and functional project views: b Via the import function, to reuse all or part of a project created previously in the current project b Via the export function, to copy all or part of the current project to a file for subsequent reuse The files generated on export are generally in XML format (1). However, variables can also be exported or imported in the following formats: b .xvm format compatible with OFS data server software b Source format, in a .scy file compatible with PL7™ design software b Text format with separator (TAB), in a .txt file for compatibility with any other system On import, data can be assigned to new instances of the following elements via an assistant: b DFB function blocks b DDT data structures b Simple data Furthermore, when importing a function module, the data associated with animation tables and operator screens is also reassigned. The XML import function also supports the transfer of a Modicon® M340™ , Atrium™ , Premium™ or Quantum™ PLC configuration prepared in the SIS Pro costing and configuration tool for use in the creation of a project in Unity Pro. This import function means that the user does not have to repeat the PLC configuration process when this has already been completed in the SIS Pro tool. (1) XML language: Open text-based language providing structural and semantic information. Presentation: page 4/4 4/26 Setup: pages 4/5 to 4/8 Structure: pages 4/9 to 4/11 IEC language: pages 4/12 to 4/17 References: pages 4/29 and 4/31 Functions (continued) Modicon® Automation Platform Unity Pro™ 0 software Application converters Unity Pro's integrated conversion tools can be used to convert PLC applications created with Concept™ and PL7™ programming and setup software in Unity Pro applications. Concept™ /Unity Pro™ software converter (Quantum™ PLC) The conversion can be performed from a Concept V2.5 application (possible in V2.11 or later but only once it has been updated to version V2.5). In order to perform the conversion, the application must be exported to an ASCII file in Concept. The export file is converted into Unity Pro source files automatically. This source file is then analyzed by Unity Pro. At the end of the procedure, a conversion report is generated and an output window displays any conversion errors from which the part of the program to be modified can be accessed directly. The Concept application converter converts the application into Unity Pro but does not guarantee that it will operate correctly in real time. It is therefore essential to test or debug any converted application. PL7™ /Unity Pro ™ software converter (Premium™ and Atrium™ slot PLC) The conversion can be performed from a PL7 application V4 or later (Premium PLC or Atrium slot PLC). In order to perform the conversion, the source file (complete application) or source file (user function block) must be exported in PL7. The conversion procedure is similar to that of the Concept conversion described above. Note : Conversion of PLC applications created with Concept, Modsoft®, and ProWORX™ software, in LL984 is possible. Please consult your local sales office. Operating system update utilities OS-Loader software is designed for updating operating systems on Atrium, Premium and Quantum platforms and is supplied with Unity Pro software. It can be used to upgrade the processor and modules from PL7 or Concept software for compatibility with Unity Pro: b Premium™ TSX P57 2p3M/2623M and TSX P57 3p3M/3623M processors b Quantum™ 140 CPU 434 12A and 140 CPU 534 14A processors (requires PV 04 or later) b Ethernet TSX ETY p102 and 140 NOE 771 p1 communication modules These operating system updates are performed as follows for the various types of processor: b Uni-Telway RS 485 terminal link for Premium™ processors b Modbus® or Modbus Plus™ terminal link for Quantum processors b Ethernet TCP/IP network for integrated Ethernet port on Premium processors and Ethernet Premium and Quantum processors (1) Note: For Modicon M340 this service is supplied by Unity Loader (see page 4/38) (1) Updating the OS on a Quantum 140 CPU 671 60 processor is performed through an Ethernet network on its MT-RJ type optical fiber connector (and through a transceiver or a ConneXium switch for electrical/optical interfacing) Presentation: page 4/4 Setup: pages 4/5 to 4/8 Structure: pages 4/9 to 4/11 IEC language: pages 4/12 to 4/17 References: pages 4/29 and 4/31 4/27 4 Functions (continued) Modicon® Automation Platform Unity Pro™ software Communication drivers The drivers used most frequently on the Atrium™ , Premium ™ and Quantum™ platforms are installed at the same time as the Unity Pro software. Unity Pro also includes the following communication drivers, which can be installed as required (1): Windows ® XP Windows® 2000 Uni-Telway COM port V1.9 IE20 V1.2 IE05 Uni-Telway TSX SCP 114 Modbus ® COM port V1.6 IE29 V1.4 IE06 Fip ISA TSX FPC10 card Fip TSX FPC20 PCMCIA card V1.2 IE03 Ethway V1.4 IE05 ISAway PCX 57, ISA card V1.2 IE04 V1.1 IE09 PCIway Atrium, PCI card XIP X-Way on TCP/IP V1.10 IE22 V1.2 IE17 USB for USB terminal port Driver type 4 Windows® NT Windows® 98 Windows® 95 Millennium V1.9 IE17 V1.7 IE18 V7.8 IE18 V1.3 IE08 V1.1 IE08 V1.1 IE03 V1.5 IE06 – V1.4 IE06 V1.2 IE04 V2.6 IE06 (2) V1.2 IE04 V2.4 IE08 V1.2 IE09 – Unity Developer’s Edition, advanced openness Advanced openness, which is reserved for experienced IT engineers, supports the development of interfaces between Unity and expert tools as well as specific user-defined functions. This type of development requires expert IT knowledge in the following areas: b b b b C++ or Visual Basic languages Client/server architectures XML and COM/DCOM technologies Issues relating to data synchronization As a supplement to the Unity Pro Extra Large software (3), the UDE (Unity Developer's Edition) development tool UNY UDE VFU CD21E can be used to set up made-to-order solutions. In addition to a development kit, it includes the Unity servers and documentation. Unity Developer’s Edition is compatible with: b Unity Pro™ PLC configuration Extra Large. b All Modicon® M340™ processors. b All Atrium ™ slot-PLCs. b All Premium ™ Unity™ processors. b All Quantum ™ Unity™ processors. (1) Also available as separate part TLX CD DRV 20M (2) Windows® 98 only (3) Only Unity Pro Extra Large implements dynamic databases management for OFS data servers and 3 rd party software. Presentation: page 4/4 4/28 Setup: pages 4/5 to 4/8 Structure: pages 4/9 to 4/11 IEC language: pages 4/12 to 4/17 References: pages 43/29 and 4/31 0 Modicon® Automation Platform References Unity Pro™ 0 software References Unity Pro™ Small, Medium, Large and Extra Large software packages The software is available in 4 versions: b Unity Pro Small for programming and setting up Unity automation platforms: v Modicon® M340™ PLC — BMX P34 1000 and BMX P34 20p0 b v v v Unity Pro Medium for programming and setting up Unity automation platforms: Modicon M340 PLC — BMX P34 1000 and BMX P34 20p0 Atrium™ PLC — TSX PCI 57 20 Premium™ PLC — TSX 57 0p, 57 10 and 57 20 ®™ b v v v v Unity Pro Large for programming and setting up automation platforms: Modicon M340 PLC — BMX P34 1000 and BMX P34 20p0 Atrium PLC — TSX PCI 57 20 and 57 30 Premium PLC — TSX 57 0p, 57 10, 57 20, 57 30 and 57 40 Quantum™ PLC — with 140 CPU 311 10, 434 12U and 534 14U processors b Unity Pro Extra Large for programming and setting up all Unity automation platforms: v Modicon M340 PLC — BMX P34 1000, and BMX P34 20p0 v Atrium PLC — TSX PCI 57 20 and 57 30 v Premium PLC — TSX 57 0p, 57 10, 57 20, 57 30, 57 40 and 57 50 v Quantum PLC — with 140 CPU 311 10, 434 12U, 534 14U, 651 50, 651 60 and Hot Standby 140 CPU 671 60 processors Upgrade kits for Concept™ , PL7 Pro™ and ProWORX™ software Users who have already purchased these installed base software programs and have a current subscription may purchase Unity Pro version V3.0 software at reduced prices. These upgrades are only possible for licenses of the same type (from Concept XL group license to Unity Pro Extra Large group license). OS Windows® composition and compatibility Unity Pro multilingual software is compatible with Windows® 2000 Professional and Windows® XP operating systems. It comprises: b Documentation in electronic format in 6 languages (English, Spanish, French, German, Italian and Chinese) b Converters for converting applications created with Concept and PL7 Pro programming software b PLC simulator Cables for connecting the processor to the programming PC must be ordered separately. Presentation: page 4/4 Setup: pages 4/5 to 4/8 Structure: pages 4/9 to 4/11 IEC language: pages 4/12 to 4/17 Functions: pages 4/18 and 4/28 4/29 4 References (continued) Modicon® Automation Platform Unity Pro™ 0 software References (continued) Unity Pro Small version 3.0 software packages For PLCs BMX P34 1000 BMX P34 20p0 Description Type of license Reference Unity Pro Small software packages Single-station Group (3 stations) Team (10 stations) Single-station Group (3 stations) Team (10 stations) UNYSPUSFUCD30 UNYSPUSFGCD30 UNYSPUSFTCD30 UNYSPUSZUCD30 UNYSPUSZGCD30 UNYSPUSZTCD30 Software upgrades from: - Concept S - PL7 Micro - ProWORX ™ software NxT/32 Lite Weight kg – – – – – – Unity Pro Medium version 3.0 software packages For PLCs BMX P34 1000 BMX P34 20p0 TSX 57 0p…57 20 TSX PCI 57 20 Description Type of license Reference Unity Pro Medium software packages Single-station Group (3 stations) Team (10 stations) Single-station Group (3 stations) Team (10 stations) UNYSPUMFUCD30 UNYSPUMFGCD30 UNYSPUMFTCD30 UNYSPUMZUCD30 UNYSPUMZGCD30 UNYSPUMZTCD30 Description Type of license Reference Unity Pro Large software packages Single-station Group (3 stations) Team (10 stations) Site (> 10 stations) Single-station Group (3 stations) Team (10 stations) Site (> 10 stations) UNYSPULFUCD30 UNYSPULFGCD30 UNYSPULFTCD30 UNYSPULFFCD30 UNYSPULZUCD30 UNYSPULZGCD30 UNYSPULZTCD30 UNYSPULZFCD30 Software upgrades from: - Concept S, M - PL7 Micro, Junior - ProWORX ™ softwart NxT/32 Lite Weight kg – – – – – – Unity Pro Large version 3.0 software packages 4 For PLCs BMX P34 1000 BMX P34 20p0 TSX 57 0p…57 40 TSX PCI 57 20/30 140 CPU 311 10 140 CPU 434 12U 140 CPU 534 14U Software upgrades from: - Concept S, M - PL7 Micro, Junior, Pro - ProWORX ™ software NxT/32 Lite Weight kg – – – – – – – – Unity Pro Extra Large version 3.0 software packages For PLCs BMX P34 1000 BMX P34 20p0 TSX 57 0p…57 50 TSX PCI 57 20/30 140 CPU 311 10 140 CPU 434 12U 140 CPU 534 14U 140 CPU 651 50/60 140 CPU 671 60 Description Type of license Unity Pro Extra Large software Single-station packages Group (3 stations) Team (10 stations) Site (> 10 stations) Software upgrades from: Single-station - Concept S, M, XL Group (3 stations) - PL7 Micro, Junior, Pro Team (10 stations) - ProWORX ™ software Site (> 10 stations) NxT Lite, Full - ProWORX ™ software 32 Lite, Full Reference UNYSPUEFUCD30 UNYSPUEFGCD30 UNYSPUEFTCD30 UNYSPUEFFCD30 UNYSPUEZUCD30 UNYSPUEZGCD30 UNYSPUEZTCD30 UNYSPUEZFCD30 Weight kg – – – – – – – – Unity Developer’s Edition For PLCs BMX P34 1000 BMX P34 20p0 TSX 57 0p…57 50 TSX PCI 57 20/30 140 CPU 311 10 140 CPU 434 12U 140 CPU 534 14U 140 CPU 651 50/60 140 CPU 671 60 Presentation: page 4/4 4/30 Setup: pages 4/5 and 4/6 Description Type of licence UDE Unity Developer’s Edition Single-station Requires Unity Pro Extra Large Software structure: pages 4/7 to 4/9 IEC language: pages 4/10 to 4/15 Reference UNYUDEVFUCD21E Functions: pages 4/16 to 4/26 Weight kg – References (continued) Modicon® Automation Platform Unity Pro™ 0 software References (continued) Documentation for Unity Pro version 3.0 For PLCs Hardware and software manuals (on DVD) Description Type of license Reference Platform setup for: - Modicon M340 - Atrium/Premium - Quantum - Momentum Multilingual: English, Spanish, UNYUSE909CDM French, German, Italian and Chinese Weight kg – Electromagnetic compatibility of networks and fieldbuses Software setup for: - Unity Pro - EF/EFB/DFB function blocks library Separate parts Description PC terminal connection cables BMX XCA USB H0pp TSX PCX 1031 Use from processor To PC port Length Reference USB Mini B port Modicon M340 BMX P34 1000/20p0 USB port 1.8 m 4.5 m BMXXCAUSBH018 BMXXCAUSBH045 Mini-DIN port for RS 232D (15-pin 2.5 m Premium TSX 57 1p/2p/3p/4p SUB-D connector) Atrium TSX PCI 57 0,4 m USB port (USB/RS 485 converter) 2.5 m USB port (Mini-DIN/RJ45 cordset) Modbus port 15-pin SUB-D Quantum 140 CPU 311 10 140 CPU 434 12A 140 CPU 534 14A RS 232D (15-pin 3.7 m SUB-D connector) 15 m Weight kg 0.065 0.110 TSXPCX1031 0.170 TSXCUSB485 (1) 0,144 TSXCRJMD25 0.150 990NAA26320 990NAA26350 0.300 0.180 USB port Premium TSX 57 5p USB port Quantum 140 CPU 6p1 3.3 m UNYXCAUSB033 – RJ45 connector for Modbus port Quantum 140 CPU 6p1 1m 3m 6m 110XCA28201 110XCA28202 110XCA28203 – – – RJ45 connector TSX CUSB 485 (1) With TSX CUSB 485 converter, use the TSX CRJMD 25 cord set (equipped with 1 x mini-DIN and 1 x RJ45 connectors. 4/31 4 Presentation, setup Modicon® M340™ Automation Platform 0 Unity™ EFB Toolkit software Presentation Unity EFB Toolkit is the software for developing EF functions and EFB function blocks in C language and is optional software for Unity Pro. It can be used to develop new functions (whose internal code is written in C language) to extend and complete the set of functions proposed as standard in Unity Pro. This software comes with Microsoft® Visual C++ @.Net which can be used to debug the functions used on the Unity Pro PLC simulator. Unity EFB Toolkit also includes a service for creating and managing families of functions, with a view to their integration in the Unity Pro function libraries. Setup C language development software is a tool for managing the whole function while it is being performed. It provides: b A user-friendly creation interface, integrated in Unity Pro, with automatic file organization b Powerful tools for testing and debugging b Management of compatibilities and software versions of created functions b Generation of files for subsequent installation of functions on other development stations Managing function families The software can be used to define different function families. Functions, known as EFs/EFBs are stored in families, making it possible to create an organized library of functions written in C language. Once created, these families can be distributed and integrated in the Unity Pro libraries. They are: b Arranged in families/functions b Used in all languages with the same flexibility as standard functions (data entry wizard) b Managed by the Unity Pro library tool (version management) 4 Editing functions The various tabs in the EFB Toolkit software editor allow the user to create the function by: b Declaring the interface; all data types are possible (elementary, structures, tables) b Supporting public and private variables Writing the source code file in C language A function written in C language can access numerous internal PLC services such as the real-time clock, PLC variables, system words, and math functions. In particular, it is possible to perform numerical processing in floating point format. 4/32 Setup (continued), reference Modicon® M340™ Automation Platform 0 Unity™ EFB Toolkit software Setup (continued) Debugging functions The function created can be tested after insertion in an application and loading into the Unity Pro PLC simulator. The Microsoft® Visual C++ tool is used to debug the function. It is used to: b Insert breakpoints b Perform step by step execution b Display the code with the breakpoints visible b Display manipulated data Note: To generate the code for a Modicon M340 platform, a specific GNU compiler is used. It is supplied with the Unity EFB Toolkit. Enhancing the function library Once the function has been debugged, it can be generated and distributed, and the updating tool supplied with Unity Pro can be used to enhance the libraries on a user station. Version management means that at any time the user knows the level of functions installed on a station and can update the application with the latest existing versions. 4 Compatibility Unity EFB Toolkit is compatible with Unity Pro Small, Medium, Large, and Extra Large. Developing EF functions and EFB functions is possible for the Modicon® M340™, Premium™, Atrium ™ , and Quantum™ platforms. References The companion software for Unity Pro, Unity EFB Toolkit can be used to create EF elementary blocks and EFB elementary function blocks. These are developed in Visual C++ language and are integrated in Unity Pro function block libraries. The Unity EFB Toolkit software and its documentation are supplied in electronic form on CD-ROM in English. Description Type of Language Reference license UNYSPUZFUCD30E English Unity EFB Toolkit, kit for Single developing EF and EFB (1 station) (software and electronic blocks documentation) Weight kg – 4/33 Presentation Modicon® M340™ Automation Platform 0 Unity™ SFC View software Presentation Unity SFC View is integrated in human/machine interface (HMI) applications for monitoring Unity Pro sequential applications written in sequential function chart language (SFC or Grafcet) executed by a PLC. Set up in the same way as an ActiveX® control component, Unity SFC View is used to display status information relating to SFC charts executed by a Modicon® M340™ , Premium™ or Quantum ™ PLC. Installed on an HMI station, Unity SFC View monitors and controls the status of SFC charts in real time, supplying detailed diagnostic data. Unity SFC View reads the necessary data from the Unity project database in offline mode. The PLC data is accessed online via the OFS (OPC Factory Server). Without needing to recreate SFC charts in the HMI environment, Unity SFC View reads the structure of the SFC charts directly from the Unity project database. Modifications made to the SFC application are detected and updated at any time. In online mode, Unity SFC View accesses the PLC diagnostic data, thus enabling awareness and tracking of the occurrence of the first fault and subsequent faults. System downtime is much reduced since Unity SFC View enables maintenance staff to locate the source of the problem much more quickly. Unity SFC View is designed for end users and system designers who wish to integrate this control into their HMI system. Unity SFC View is compatible with most HMI platforms handling ActiveX ® Control components, such as Vijeo™ Look control software or Monitor Pro™ supervisory software, or in a programming environment such as Visual Basic. 4 4/34 Presentation (continued) Modicon® M340™ Automation Platform 0 Unity™ SFC View software The 3 Unity SFC View views Unity SFC View offers 3 views: b An overview for managing selection of SFC charts b Two detailed views presenting the status and diagnostic data of the selected SFC chart The overview provides a general view of all the SFC charts in a Unity project. It contains real-time data such as current step, simultaneous steps, chart error with indication of the SFC chart status. The overview makes it easy to browse through SFC charts and switch quickly to the detailed view of the desired SFC chart in the Unity Pro application. Overview The simple detailed view shows the elementary data on the active step (or selected step) of the SFC chart in real time. The data displayed may include the name, comment, chart and step status, as well as the activity times (min, max, actual). You can also enable the chart navigation option. Simple detailed view Because of the compact size of the simple detailed view, it is possible to place several instances of it on a single HMI screen relating to a certain part of the process. From this simple detailed mode, you can navigate between HMI screens with SFC View controls and display the detailed view of SFC charts. The detailed view illustrates the details of an SFC chart in real time. The display indicates the current step, the transition awaiting activation and the next step. The actions associated with the steps are displayed along with sequence selections or parallel branches. The detailed diagnostic data includes analysis of the causes of the fault at transition level. Depending on the diagnostic mode, the error grid contains the causes of errors or all the variables assigned to the transition logic. The current state of the various variables and selected errors are identified by different colors. Diagnostic mode Transition logic diagnostics is a key function of Unity SFC View. It minimizes system downtimes in the event of a fault. Two different diagnostic modes are available: Detailed view b Unity SFC View reads the data in the Unity PLC diagnostic buffer. It provides information about faulty or missing events that are preventing the transition from being enabled. This mode does not require any configuration or additional programming in the PLC program. b Unity SFC View monitors the internal logic of the transition conditions back-to-front. This mode provides diagnostic data concerning all the inputs connected to the transition (not limited to faulty inputs). In this mode, for Premium™ , Atrium™ and- Quantum ™ platforms, Unity SFC View uses specific EFB function blocks linked to the transition conditions. The library for these blocks is supplied with the Unity SFC View software. Customization Unity SFC View offers a programming interface which can be used to integrate the ActiveX® Control component in an HMI application and customize its functions and its operator interface. The ActiveX® Control component in Unity SFC View can be customized. It accepts properties, methods and events (all the properties have a default value). The properties pages simplify configuration. Unity SFC View accepts scripts with functions such as browsing through charts, and status control of charts, and also events such as error notification or chart selection. This data can be used to launch programs or operator screens. SFC View properties page 4/35 4 Presentation (continued) Modicon® M340™ Automation Platform Unity™ SFC View software Possible architectures Basic architecture Unity SFC View is used in a configuration where the OFS and Unity Pro software reside on the same PC platform as the HMI application. Operator station with HMI application and Unity Pro, OFS and SFC View programs and projects Modicon M340, Premium, Atrium or Quantum with Unity SFC program Distributed architecture In a distributed configuration, the OFS and Unity Pro software can be installed on different servers. 4 Operator station with HMI application and SFC View projects Unity projects Ethernet TCP/IP COM or DCOM OFS server P Server (Unity) PLC network Modicon M340, Premium, Atrium or Quantum with Unity SFC program 4/36 0 Presentation (continued) Modicon® M340™ Automation Platform 0 Unity™ SFC View software References When integrated in an HMI application, Unity SFC View can be used to monitor and control charts in applications developed in Sequential Function Chart (SFC) language running on Premium™ /Quantum™ Unity PLCs. The HMI station, compatible with Windows® 2000 or Windows® XP Professional operating systems, must support ActiveX® Control components. Unity SFC View V2.0 requires: b Unity Pro V3.p XL, to be ordered separately b OFS V3.3 data server software, to be ordered separately Unity SFC View multilingual software, supplied on a CD-ROM, includes: b The SFC View ActiveX® Control component b The EFB function block library for Unity Pro V3.p b An example of how to integrate SFC View in Unity Pro projects b The electronic documentation (English, French and German) The Unity SFC View integration example illustrates the main possibilities offered by Unity SFC View. This is an executable program which does not need HMI software in order to run. It helps the user understand how to configure and use the Unity SFC View ActiveX® Control component. Description Unity SFC View software packages (version V2.0) Type of license Reference Single (1 station) UNYSDUMFUCD20 Weight kg – Team (10 stations) UNYSDUMFTCD20 – Site (100 stations) UNYSDUMFFCD20 – 4/37 4 Presentation, setup Modicon® M340™ Automation Platform Unity™ Dif application comparison software Presentation Unity Dif application comparison software for Modicon M340/Premium/Atrium/ Quantum platforms is an optional program which complements the Unity Pro Extra Large programming software. It is used to compare two Unity applications generated by Unity Pro and automatically provide an exhaustive list of all the differences between them. The Unity Dif program increases productivity in the main life phases of a control system based on a M340/Premium/Atrium/Quantum platforms: b Application development and debugging. b Starting up installations and processes. b Operation and maintenance of installations and processes. Unity Dif software is an efficient tool for handling Unity applications for: b Control system design offices. b Operation and maintenance managers. b Installers and systems integrators. v Software setup The Unity Dif software can be used in one of two modes: b Interactive mode, when the comparison is launched by an operator command (double-click on the Unity Dif software icon). b Automatic mode, when it is launched by a previously established call command. 4 These comparison commands locate all the differences between two applications in terms of: b The hardware configuration (Modicon M340/Premium/Atrium/Quantum) b The network configuration (Ethernet TCP/IP network, CANopen bus and RIO remote I/O) b The entire of variables and function block instances b The application structure and its content (regardless of the language(s) used) b The function modules. b The code for the DFB user function blocks and DDT coumpound data. b The project options. The result of the comparison between the two applications can be: b Displayed. b Printed. b Saved in .txt format in a differences list. Comparison The end of the comparison operation is signalled by the appearance of the application browser with its two tabs. 1 Identification tab for accessing the characteristics of the two applications being compared. The differences are marked by the sign #. 1 2 2 Browser tab for accessing the application multilevel tree structure. (1) RIO remote I/O for Modicon Quantum platform. 4/38 0 Modicon® M340™ Automation Platform Setup (continued), reference 0 Unity™ Dif application comparison software Setup (continued) Display of results The representation of the application multilevel tree structure, which can be accessed via the browser tab after launching a comparison, is annotated by 4 symbols in which the information associated with application 1 appear in blue and those associated with application 2 appear in red: This branch, found in this level of the tree structure, contains at least one difference This block contains at least one difference This section is only present in application 1 This section is only present in application 2 In the example opposite, a difference on the rung causing changeover to manual mode is detected: 1 This line displayed in blue belongs to application 1 [Prj1] 2 This line displayed in red belongs to application 2 [Prj2] The source code extracts of both applications can be used to locate the differences precisely. 1 Differentiation report 2 The “Report” command allows to generate the report file (.txt): Reference This software extension used to compare two PL7 applications generated by Unity Pro software version u V2.1 Function Target Type of device Reference Weight extension PLC kg target Single UNYSDUDFUCD20 – Unity Pro Unity Dif application (1 station) Extra Large comparison software Modicon M340/ extension Premium/Atrium CD-Rom containing software and electronic Quantum documentation (EnglishFrench) 4/39 4 Presentation, functions Automation platform Modicon® Unity™ M340™ 0 PLC Loader software Presentation Unity Loader is companion software to Unity Pro and is used to perform maintenance operations on automation applications. Its easy setup and the small size of its executable make it an essential tool for updating Modicon M340 PLC projects when it is not necessary to read or modify the program. It is also essential software for updating the embedded software on the M340 PLC. It performs the following two main functions: b Transfer of automation project components from the PC to the PLC or from the PLC to the PC, such as the program, data, files and user Web pages stored in the memory cartridge b Transfer of embedded software from the PC to the processor or Ethernet communication modules Software graphic interface The software is designed to be used by people with limited automation expertise. The interface consists of four tabs, and buttons within each of the tabs to perform different operations. b The first tab, Project, is used for project transfers: program, data and user files. The three exchange operations between the PC and the processor can be sequenced together in a single command. b The second tab, Operating System, is used to update the embedded software in the PLC. The screen displays the detailed content of the PLC firmware versions, and when a file is selected on the PC, the characteristics of that file are displayed. b The third tab, Options, is used to configure the working environment, including the location of files on the PLC, and selection of one of six languages (English, Spanish, French, German, Italian, and Chinese) for the interface and online help. The last tab can be used to display information about the software. 4 Unity Loader: Project tab Note: Regardless of which tab is selected, the connection status with the PLC is displayed, along with commands for connecting/disconnecting and changing the PLC operating mode. Modicon® M340™ PLC project transfer Exchanges between the PC and the PLC processor The software can be used to transfer the components of a project in either direction: b Program: binary and source, if the application has been built using the source format b Data file: located and unlocated data b Data on the processor memory cartridge: user files (if the cartridge allows this) Unity Loader: Operating System tab Unity Pro can be used to transfer the application from either the application file .stu, or the archive file .sta. The program file and data formats, along with the functions performed by Unity Loader, are identical to those built and used by Unity Pro. When the cartridge-based user files are transferred from the PLC to the PC, a private file specific to Unity Loader is created. The operation is then possible in the other direction. Unity Pro cannot be used to perform this type of transfer. In order to simplify project management, Unity Loader defaults to store the three files read in the PLC in the same directory with an identical file name (the project name by default), but with a different file extension. The default choice suggested can be modified by the user. Once connected to the PLC, Unity Loader displays the characteristics of the data read in the PLC. Similarly, when the files are selected on the PC, the corresponding characteristics are also displayed. All the data necessary to decide on the action required is displayed on a single screen. The three components of the project are selected by default, provided that they are valid for the chosen direction of transfer. Transfer of one or two of the components can be disabled. All of the transfers are performed in a single command. 4/40 Functions (continued), reference Automation platform Modicon® Unity™ M340™ 0 PLC Loader software Modicon® M340™ PLC project transfer (continued) File transfer to the Modicon M340 PLC Ethernet communication module The BMX NOE 0100/BMX NOE 0110 communication modules contain a memory cartridge that can store user web pages, depending on the model used. When Unity Loader is connected to the communication module, web pages can be transferred from the module to the PC or vice versa. The operating mode is identical to that available for exchanges with the processor. Updating embedded software in the Modicon® M340™ processor and Ethernet communication modules Firmware can be updated by following the same principle as that used for transferring projects. Once connected to the PLC, Unity Loader displays the characteristics of the firmware read in the PLC. Similarly, when a file corresponding to a valid file for the firmware is selected on the PC, the corresponding characteristics are also displayed. All the data necessary to decide on whether the update should be performed is displayed on a single screen. Communication between the PC and the PLC Unity Loader uses two communication vectors, USB and Ethernet. USB is always available for exchanges with the PLC processor. Ethernet is essential for exchanges with the Ethernet modules and can also be used for exchanges with processors which have an integrated Ethernet port. PLC BMX P34 1000 BMX P34 2010 BMX P34 2020 BMX P34 2030 BMX NOE 0100 BMX NOE 0110 Type Ethernet port CPU CPU CPU CPU Ethernet module Ethernet module USB port Supported Unity Loader: Network scanning When Unity Loader is connected to an Ethernet network, it is possible to define a range of addresses to be scanned and thus display all the devices recognized on the network. By selecting the Modicon M340 PLC, the transfer operations can then be performed. All connection and transfer operations, along with any errors, are recorded in a trace file stored in the PC. Compatibility Unity Loader is compatible with Modicon M340 PLCs. Its use is totally independent from Unity Pro. Program files and PLC data are compatible between Unity Pro and Unity Loader. Reference Unity Loader is available in two formats. It is automatically provided with all versions of Unity Pro Small, Medium, Large and Extra Large. It can also be ordered separately. The product includes a graphic interface and documentation in six languages (English, Spanish, French, German, Italian, and Chinese). Description Unity Loader Type Reference Single license UNYSMUZUCD30 Weight kg – 4/41 4 Presentation Modicon® Premium™/Quantum™ automation platform 0 Unity™ Application Generator Unity Application Generator for designing and generating process applications Unity Application Generator (UAG) is a specialized software productivity tool for modeling and generating process applications in a collaborative environment. For process type applications, UAG provides a single database containing all the project information (process model, control configuration and SCADA integration). Using an approach based on reusable control devices (PID, motor, valve,etc.), UAG which complies with the standard ISA S88 and generates the PLC code (Unity Pro & Concept), plus all the elements required by the HMI monitoring system (Magelis) or SCADA (Monitor Pro V7.2 (1) or third-party supervision system). Single entry and central information management ensure data consistency and the integration of the control (PLC) and monitoring (HMI/SCADA) systems. Process models Physical model (process view) Process components and logical structureation of the process are based on the ISA S88 standard. Adopting the ISA S88 standard provides the following benefits: ■ Considerable process flexibility. ■ Significant reduction in development and delivery timescales. ■ A standardized, uniform solution. ■ Reuse of sub-elements. UAG offers the 6 structural levels from the ISA S88 standard (site, area, process cell, unit, equipment module and control module): These levels can be found again within the applications structure (supervision and PLC) generated by UAG. Process parameters for control devices, such as motors, control loops and valves, are set at control module level. Topological model (automation view) In a Collaborative Control environment, UAG can be applied to the entire process’ control, monitoring and supervision topology. The topological view includes all devices with I/O points, as well as the communication channels between these devices. UAG supports: ■ Architectures comprising automation platforms. □ Modicon Quantum, Premium and Atrium with Unity Pro. □ Modicon Quantum and Momentum with Concept. ■ SCADA systems (Monitor Pro, iFix or generic), Magelis panels. ■ Ethernet TCP/IP and Modbus Plus communication networks. ■ Third-party devices. The process for configuration of networks, PLC applications with their I/O and other devices of the topological model , takes place directly in UAG. Complet model (project view) The physical and topological models are independent and can be created in parallel by independent process and automation experts. The models are integrated via simple drag & drop operations between the two views.. This integration simply involves assigning PLC I/O points to control devices (valves, motors, etc.). 4/40 Presentation (continued) Modicon® Premium™/Quantum™ automation platform 0 Unity™ Application Generator Control Loop Integrating your expertise in UAG Smart Control Devices (SCoDs) UAG software is an object-oriented tool based on these Smart Control Devices. These elements describe a part of the process, including all the aspects of the process control system: PLC Documentation PLC Logic Maintenance Locking Diagnostic ■ Links to the PLC logic. ■ Links to the graphic representation in the supervisory system. ■ Description of I/O interfaces. ■ Description of interfaces intended for HMI/SCADA supervisory. ■ Information related for handling alarms and events. ■Documentation. In UAG these multi-faceted elements are called SCoDs (Smart Control Devices). They are created using UAG’s specific SCoD editor. A SCoD is defined for each control devices, and is created with the help of the SCoD editor by: ■ Using the DFB or EFB interface of the PLC logic (Unity Pro/Concept) by importing FBD Language. Graphic representation Alarms/ events Security I/O interfaces Documentation IHM ■ Assigning a supervisory graphic reference (Monitor Pro (1) or others). ■ Defining the Smart control Device parameters and their behavior in the process control system: □ control device parameters and attributes from the process side (operating modes, threshold limits, alarm texts, etc.). □ I/O parameters and attributes for PLC logic, □ parameters and attributes for HMI/SCADA supervisory. ■ Defining configuration screens for the UAG user interface. ■ Defining default or initial parameters. This means that you can integrate your process expertise and know-how in your own SCoD libraries and reuse them again and again in all your UAG applications. Customization UAG can be used to define your own standards and apply them. It provides a uniform solution based on your standards, and prepares for validation operations. During the design phase, the risk of error is kept to a minimum, thereby reducing debugging and maintenance costs too. UAG can be used to customize: ■ ■ ■ ■ The selection of SCoD libraries. ■ ■ The user documentation. The symbols nomenclature used in UAG. The selection of PLC platforms and modules. The definition of access levels, display formats, units of measurement, etc. used for HMI/SCADA supervisory. Security. This means that you can integrate your process expertise and standards in all your UAG applications. 4/41 Presentation (continued) Modicon® Premium™/Quantum™ automation platform Unity™ Application Generator Integrating your expertise in UAG (continued) Modeling process applications Once you have created the customization based on your standards and chosen your SCoD libraries, UAG offers you a simple, user-friendly, application-specific method of working. The process is defined using the physical model (process view), exploiting the expertise provided at customization and SCoD library creation stages. This means that the process behavior and the process configuration screens match exactly your requirements. The process control is defined using the topological model (automation view), again, in accordance with your customization. ■ Process design using UAG is made easy through functional analyses. It allows the user to reliably track the exact project status. In order to be able to detect any error or oversight as soon as possible, UAG analyzes the project and flags any bugs at the various levels of the project, for instance: ■ □ □ ■ □ □ ■ □ At physical model level: □ □ the SCoD data is not assigned to any PLC I/O variable, SCoD instance attributes that are missing or over limit, invalid or missing interlock parameters. At topological model level: Communication channels between devices that are not defined, invalid or missing communication parameters. At project level: SCoD data is being transmitted from another PLC, but communication with this device has not been configured, behavior on response time for I/O variables that is not defined. This means that your process expertise and know-how is made available to be used in UAG, ensuring consistent process application modeling. Generating process applications UAG provides at a single point all the process information intended for the project’s multiple applications (PLCs, HMI/SCADA), along with the communication parameters. When applications are generated this information is used to create the configuration and part of the control logic in using IEC 61131-3 FBD functional language. The following items are generated: ■ □ □ □ □ At PLC level: □ □ ■ □ □ DFB/EFB block data (information from SCoDs), □ ■ □ □ user access rights. Hardware configuration, localized and non-localized data with its initial value and symbol, initialization, inter-PLC communication and distributed I/O (I/O Scanning on Ethernet or Peer Coop on Modbus Plus), interlocks. At HMI/SCADA level: Data for graphic animations, localized data with its corresponding symbol (display, alarm, archiving information.), At communication level: Communication driver configuration (Monitor Pro (1) and iFIX), configuration data for third-party devices (via an XML interface). The generation process in UAG is incremental, which makes it possible to supplement the various applications with their dedicated tools outside UAG without any risk. Incremental generation in UAG only impacts changed elements within the applications, which ensures that any additions made using the dedicated tools are stored permanently. This means that your process expertise and know-how is quickly operational in your process without any errors or oversights. 4/42 0 Presentation (continued) Modicon® Premium™/Quantum™ automation platform 0 Unity™ Application Generator Validation Validation UAG is a specialized functional tool for process experts and has been developed to comply with the following process standards: ■ ■ ISA S88. GAMP (Good Automation Manufacturing Practice). Validation procedures User feedback report (UFR) Functional specifications Modeling software Performance qualification (PQ) Associated Operational qualification (OQ) Associated Process applications, Documentation Validation Qualification (IQ, OQ) Associated PLC/IHM application software Installation qualification Detailed system requirements Good Automation Manufacturing Practice System build UAG uses ISA S88 standard terminology for batch control and adopts the GAMP methodology for creating an automated system. The inclusion of these two standards provides major support in the task of approving and validating processes. Validation according to FDA 21CFR Part 11 regulations is simplified by UAG, as it provides: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ All process information at a single point, based on functional analysis. Automatic generation of process applications by UAG. Archiving in compliance with FDA regulations. A log of all interactions by UAG. Electronic documentation. UAG tracks and documents every modification made. The version control system, in compliance with regulation FDA 21 CFR Part 11, ensures simple, straightforward validation. Active collaboration Compatible with third-party tools UAG arranges existing information according to your operating objectives and constraints. Open import/export interfaces are available at every level, facilitating the connection of third-party tools at any time. This means that you can share your expertise by reusing, for example, data from your CAD tools. Total user accessibility With its multi-user environment and common language, UAG facilitates sharing among process and PLC developers, as well as maintenance engineers and operating staff. UAG ensures optimum productivity throughout your application’s entire life cycle. 4/43 Presentation (continued) Modicon® Premium™/Quantum™ automation platform 0 Unity™ Application Generator Interfacing with SCADA applications UAG can openly interface with many of the SCADA systems currently available on the market. Direct integration Direct integration by UAG automatically generates the Monitor Pro V7.2 supervisory application elements, which are: ■ Variables with symbol and attributes. ■ Alarm server configuration. ■ Trend server configuration (real time and historical). ■ Mimics (graphic objects) of the devices. ■ Configuration of the Modbus TCP/IP communication driver. In addition, for each modification by UAG, the Monitor Pro V7.2 application is automatically updated without any conflicts or risk of disruption of added or changed elements. UAG therefore ensures data consistency between the automation control and the supervory level. This type of direct integration is also available with the iFix supervisory and control system (GE Fanuc). Open integration Open integration is based on all the UAG application information made available via XML file format. This XML file is generated by UAG and can be imported into many third-party SCADA systems, once it has been customized using the XLS style sheets specific to the third-party system. Regardless of whether direct or open integration is involved, UAG provides you with total consistency within your control, monitoring and supervision system throughout the application’s entire life. 4/44 References Modicon® Premium™/Quantum™ automation platform 0 Unity™ Application Generator References This specialized software program UAG (Unity Application Generator) is multilingual (available in English, French and German) and is compatible with the Windows 2000 Professional and Windows XP operating systems. UAG can be used to model and generate process applications in a collaborative environment. It generates the PLC code (Unity Pro & Concept) and the elements required by the HMI monitoring system (Magelis), SCADA (Monitor Pro V7.2 or third-party supervision systems). There are two types of software license available for UAG: Medium (M) and Large (L). They are determined by the functional level of the HMI integration: ■ The Medium version generates HMI information using customizable XML files (XSL style sheets). ■ The Large version also provides customizable XML files, direct integration for Monitor Pro and iFix supervision systems featuring the generation of SCADA applications with variables and attributes, mimics (graphic objects), alarm tables and communication driver configuration. Documentation is supplied in electronic format. UAG software suites Description UAG software suites (Unity Application Generator) Type License type Code generated Medium Single (1 machine) Large Reference UAGSEWMFUCD21 Weight kg – Site UAGSEWMFFCD21 – Single (1 machine) UAGSEWLFUCD21 – Site UAGSEWLFFCD21 – Coming soon! 4/45 5 5/0 0 Contents 5 - Connection interfaces 1 Advantys™ Telefast® ABE7 pre-wired I/O system b Presentation, combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5/8 b References v Passive connection sub-base for discrete inputs/outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5/10 v Adaptation sub-bases with soldered relays and removable terminal blocks 5/12 v Adaptation sub-bases for or with plug-in relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5/13 v Plug-in relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5/15 v Connection sub-bases for counter and analog channels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5/16 v Accessories for connection sub-bases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5/17 b Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5/18 Phaseo® power supplies b Phaseo Universal range of regulated switch mode power supplies . . . . . . . . 5/20 Human/machine Interfaces 5 5/1 Selection guide 0 Connection interfaces Advantys™ Telefast® 0 ABE7 pre-wired system Discrete input and/or output sub-bases 817438 817437 Discrete inputs or outputs Optimum “Low cost” Optimum “Miniature” Universal 817436 Applications Relay amplification – Equipped with relay – Control voltage 24V c Output voltage 24V c Output current per channel 0.5 A Modularity 16 No. of terminals per channel 1 1 to 3 Type of connection terminals Signal Signal, common Signal (configurable 24 V c or 0 V) Connectors 20-pin HE10 connector 8 -12 -16 5 Terminal block Removable Terminal type No Screw 1 2 Signal, common (configurable 24 V c or 0 V) No Screw or spring Additional or optional* function Low cost version fitted with cable Miniature sub-bases Compact size * Type 2 input * (1) Isolator * Device type ABE7H20Eppp ABE7H32Eppp ABE7H16Cpp ABE7HppR1p ABE7HppR50 ABE7HppR2p ABE7HppS21 Pages 5/10 (1) For TSX Micro and Premium PLCs 5/2 5/11 0 0 Discrete inputs and outputs Optimum “Miniature” 817432 521500 Optimum – Plug-in electromechanical or solid state – No Yes 24V c 24V c 0.5 A 24V c (solid state) 5... 24V c 230 V a (electromechanical) 0.5 A 16 5 A (E.M.), 2 A (solid state) 5 A (th) 16 8 passive inputs 8 relay outputs 5 1 2 1 Signal, 2 common connections between the inputs and the outputs. Signal, common, 2 common connections between the inputs and the outputs. 1 N/O contact and common, 4 output channels 2 input connection points 20-pin HE10 connectors No Screw Miniature sub-base Synergy with Tego ® Power and Micro PLC Miniature sub-base - Common per 4 channels Synergy with Tego ® Power and Micro PLC ABE7H16CM11 ABE7P16M111 ABE7R16M111 5/14 5/13 5/10 ABE7H16CM21 5/3 Selection guide (continued) 0 Connection interfaces Advantys™ Telefast® 0 ABE7 pre-wired system Discrete input and output sub-bases Discrete output “Optimum” “Universal” “Optimum” “Universal” 817440 Applications 5 Relay amplification Electromechanical, fixed Electromechanical or solid state Equipped with relay Yes Yes Control voltage 24 V c Output voltage 5 V c ... 30 V 230 V a Output current per channel 2 A (th) 3 A (th) Modularity 8 8 - 16 No. of terminals per channel 2 1 Type of connection terminals 1 N/O contact and common Voltage-free 1 N/O contact Connectors 20-pin HE 10 connector Terminal block Removable Terminal type Yes Screw or spring Yes No No 5 V c ... 150 V 230 V a 24 V c (solid state) 5 V c ... 24 V, a 230 V (E.M.) 5 V c ... 150 V 230 V a 5 A (th) 2 A (solid state), 6 A (electromechanical) Depends on relay mounted 0.5 to 10 A 16 8 or 16 2 1 2 to 3 1 N/O contact and common 1 N/O contact Signal, Polarities Yes No Screw No Screw or spring Additional or optional* function Miniature sub-base voltage-free Latching relay or common per 8 channels Miniature sub-bases Common per 4 channels Isolator and fuse Device type ABE7R08S216p ABE7RppS1pp ABE7R16T111 ABE7P16T111 ABE7P16T2ppp ABE7P08T3ppp Pages 5/12 5/13 5/14 5/4 ABE7RppS2pp 0 0 Discrete inputs “Universal” 817439 Discrete outputs “Universal” Electromechanical, plug-in Solid state, fixed – – Solid state, fixed Solid state, plug-in Yes Yes – – Yes No From 24 V c to 230 V a From 5 V TTL to 230 V a 24 V c 5 V c ... 150 V 230 V a 5A (th) 24 V c 8 A (th) from 0.5 to 2 A 125 mA 0.5 A 125 mA 12 mA 5 16 2 to 3 2 to 6 2 3 2 1 C/O contact or 1 N/O contact and common 1 C/O contact or 2 C/O contacts and common Signal and 0 V Signal 24 V c and 0 V Signal can be Signal isolated, Protected common Signal and common 20-pin HE 10 connector No Screw Yes Screw or spring No No Screw Voltage-free or common: Fault signal Isolator and fuse (indicator) 3-wire proximity sensor Isolator and fuse (indicator) – ABE7SppS2Bp ABE7H16F43 ABE7H16R3p ABE7H16S43 ABE7S16E2pp ABE7P16F31p 5/12 5/15 8 channels 4 channels ABE7R16T2pp ABE7R16T3pp 5/13 5/12 5/11 Yes Screw or spring No 5/5 Selection guide (continued) 0 Connection interfaces Advantys™ Telefast® 0 ABE7 pre-wired system Analog and application-specific sub-bases Analog signals and special functions 817431 Applications 5 Compatibility TSX Micro ™ PLC Premium™ PLC Type of signal Counter inputs and analog I/O Counter inputs Axis control Position control Functions Passive connection, point-to-point with shield continuity Modularity 1 counter channel or 8 analog inputs + 2 8 channels analog outputs Control voltage 24 V c – Output voltage 24 V c – Output current per channel 25 mA – No. of terminals per channel 2 2 or 4 Connector type 15-pin SUB-D + 9-pin SUB-D 25-pin SUB-D 25-pin SUB-D Terminal block No Screw No Screw No Screw Device type ABE7CPA01 ABE7CPA02 Pages 5/16 5/6 Removable Terminal type Analog inputs Current Voltage Pt 100 Standard Modicon ® M340 ™ PLC BMX ART 0414 / 0814 BMX AMI 0410 Analog outputs Current Voltage Analog inputs Direct connection Cold-junction compensation or distributed 4 protected isolated power supplies 4 channels 2 or 4 ABE7CPA21 4 channels 2 or 4 ABE7CPA412/410 0 0 817434 817435 817435 Analog signals and special functions Standard Premium TSX AEY810 Premium TSX CAYp1 TSX CTY2C Premium TSX AEY1614 Premium TSX PAY2p2 Analog inputs Current Voltage Pt 100 Isolated analog inputs Inputs Counter Inputs for thermocouples Inputs/outputs Distribution of sensor power supplies per limiter (25 mA) Distribution of isolated sensor power supplies per converter Acquisition of value from an absolute encoder Connection of 16 thermocouples with cold junction compensation Safety module (BG) 8 channels 8 channels 1 channel 16 channels 12 Emergency stops 5 24 V c 24 V c 25 mA – 2 or 4 – 2 or 4 1 25-pin SUB-D 25-pin SUB-D 15-pin SUB-D 25-pin SUB-D 50-pin SUB-D No Screw No Screw or spring No Screw No Screw No Screw ABE7CPA03 ABE7CPA31p ABE7CPA11 ABE7CPA12 ABE7CPA13 5/16 5/7 Connection interfaces Presentation Advantys™ 0 Telefast® ABE7 pre-wired system Interface with Modicon® M340™ I/O modules 1 2 2 2 2 4 6 5 7 5 tputs ays Ou 16 Rel 6T214 Q9 Q10 Q11 Q12 Q13 Q14 Q15 200 100 201 101 202 102 203 103 204 104 205 105 206 106 207 107 3 1 4 2 208 108 209 109 210 110 211 111 212 112 213 113 214 114 215 115 7 5 8 6 P1 ABE7 0Vdc +24Vdc LC Fus I Q0 = 1A max Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q5 Q8 Q6 Q7 3 3 1 Discrete BMX DDI pp02K input modules, BMX DDO pp02K output modules and BMX DDM 3202K mixed I/O modules equipped with one or two 40-pin connectors. The module modularity (pp) is 32 or 64 channels. 2 Cord set equipped with connectors (one 40-pin connector with one or two 20-pin HE 10s). 2 models are available: cord sets with one or two 20-wire sheaths (22 AWG) equipped with an HE 10 moulded connector, BMX FCC pp1/pp3. These cord sets are available in 0.5, 1, 2, 3, 5 or 10 m lengths. 3 16-channel Optimum or Universal Advantys Telefast ABE7 passive connection sub-bases or adapter sub-bases. 4 Cord set equipped with connectors (including one 25-pin SUB-D type on the sub-base end). 2 models are available, depending on the type of connections on the analog module side: v 20-pin screw terminal block, BMX FCApp0 cord set for ABE7CPA410 sub-bases v 40-pin connector, BMX FCApp2 cord set for ABE7CPA412 analog input module These cord sets are available in 1.5, 3 or 5 m lengths. 5 Sub-bases for analog input modules: v ABE7CPA410 for connection on a screw terminal block of 4 current/voltage inputs of the BMX AMI 0410 analog module, with supply of 4 isolated protected power supplies for the current loop inputs. v ABE7CPA412 for connection on a screw terminal block of 4 thermocouple inputs for the BMX ART 0414/0814 analog module, with supply of cold-junction compensation for these inputs. 6 ABE7ACC02 sub-base for splitting 16 into 2 x 8 channels, allows connection to an 8-channel sub-base. 7 8-channel Optimum or Universal Advantys Telefast ABE7 passive connection sub-bases or adapter sub-bases. (1) Connection of the 24 V c power supply is only possible using Advantys Telefast ABE7 sub-bases. Equipotentiality of the 0 V c supplies is required. References: pages 5/10 to 5/16 5/8 Dimensions: pages 5/18 and 15/19 Connection interfaces Combinations Advantys™ 0 Telefast® ABE7 pre-wired system Interface with Modicon® M340™ I/O modules I/O modules on the Modicon M340 platform Discrete 24 V c Inputs 2 x 16 I With Modicon M340 modules Preformed cord sets (at both ends) 4 x 16 I BMX DDI DDI 3202K 6402K BMX FCCpp1/FCCpp3 Outputs Inputs/ Outputs 2 x 16 Q 4 x 16 Q 1 x 16 I 1 x 16 Q DDO DDO DDM 3202K 6402K 3202K FCCpp3 Analog Inputs Outputs 4I 4I 2x4I 2Q AMI 0410 FCApp0 ART 0414 FCApp2 ART 0814 AMO 0210 FCApp0 Passive connection sub-bases Optimum ABE7H20Epp0 low-cost 16 channels ABE7H16Cpp miniature Universal ABE7H08Rpp 8 channels ABE7H08S21 (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) Universal ABE7H16R1pp 16 channels ABE7H16R50p ABE7H16R2pp ABE7H16S21p ABE7H16R3p ABE7H16R23 ABE7H16S43 ABE7H16F43 Input adapter sub-bases with solid state relays Universal ABE7S16E2ppp 16 channels Welded solid state relays, removable terminal blocks ABE7P16F31p Removable solid state relays Output adapter sub-bases with welded relays, removable terminal blocks Optimum & ABE7S08S2Bpp Universal Solid state relays 8 channels ABE7R08S111p/7R08S21pp Electromechanical relays 5 Optimum & ABE7S16SpBpp Universal Solid state relays 16 channels ABE7R16S111p/7R16S21pp Electromechanical relays Output adapter sub-bases with removable relays ABE7P08T330p Universal 8 channels Solid state relays Optimum & ABE7R16Tppp/7R16M111 Universal Electromechanical relays 16 channels ABE7P16Tppp/7P16M111 Solid state and/or electromechanical relays Sub-bases for analog I/O 4 channels ABE7CPA410 ABE7CPA412 ABE7CPA21 Preformed cord sets (1) Via the ABE7ACC02 splitter sub-base used to separate 16 channels into 2 x 8 channels References: pages 5/10 to 5/16 Dimensions: pages 5/18 and 5/19 5/9 Connection interfaces References Advantys™ Telefast® 0 ABE7 pre-wired system Passive connection sub-bases Passive connection sub-base for discrete inputs/outputs 81 Optimum Low Cost sub-bases Function Type of Reference connection 16 Screw Screw Screw ABE7H20E100 ABE7H20E200 ABE7H20E300 kg 0.330 0.410 0.480 Screw Screw ABE7H32E150 ABE7H32E300 0.360 0.460 1 2 8 Input or output No. No. of terminals For PLCs of chan- per on row nels channel number Length of PLC connection cable m Modicon M340 1 Modicon TSX Micro 2 Modicon Premium 3 Siemens S7 ABE7H20Eppp 1.5 3 Weight Optimum Miniature sub-bases Function 16 81 Input or output No. of channels Polarity Type of Reference distribution connection Weight No No Screw Screw ABE7H16C10 ABE7H16C11 0.160 0.160 2 2 Yes 0 or 24 V Screw ABE7H16C21 0.205 3 3 Yes 0 or 24 V Screw ABE7H16C31 0.260 1 1 Yes No Screw ABE7H16CM11 0.160 2 2 Yes 0 or 24 V Screw ABE7H16CM21 0.200 kg 81 ABE7H16C21 No. of terminals LED per on row per channel channel number 1 1 No Yes Input and output 16 (1) 5 ABE7H16CM21 (1) 8 I + 8 O: these products have 2 common connections which enable inputs and outputs to be connected to the same sub-base at the same time. Presentation, compatibility: pages 5/8 to 5/9 5/10 Dimensions: pages 5/18 to 5/19 Connection interfaces References (continued) Advantys™ Telefast® 0 ABE7 pre-wired system Passive connection sub-bases Passive connection sub-base for discrete signals (continued) Universal sub-bases Function No. of channels 81 Input or output 8 No. of terminals LED per Polarity Isolator (I) Type of Reference connection per on row channel distribution Fuse (F) per channel number channel 1 1 No No – Screw ABE7H08R10 2 2 Weight kg 0.187 Yes No – Screw ABE7H08R11 0.187 Yes 0 or 24 V – Screw ABE7H08R21 0.218 I Screw ABE7H08S21 0.245 ABE7H16R50 12 1 No No – Screw ABE7H12R10 0.274 Yes No – Screw ABE7H12R11 0.274 2 No No – Screw ABE7H12R50 0.196 2 No 0 or 24 V – Screw ABE7H12R20 0.300 Yes 0 or 24 V – Screw ABE7H12R21 0.300 I Screw ABE7H12S21 0.375 81 2 1 16 1 1 No No – Screw ABE7H16R10 0.274 Yes No – Screw Spring ABE7H16R11 ABE7H16R11E 0.274 0.274 2 No No – Screw Spring ABE7H16R50 ABE7H16R50E 0.196 0.196 2 No 0 or 24 V – Screw ABE7H16R20 0.300 Yes 0 or 24 V – Screw Spring ABE7H16R21 ABE7H16R21E 0.300 0.300 I Screw Spring ABE7H16S21 ABE7H16S21E 0.375 0.375 ABE7H16R31 2 3 3 No 0 or 24 V – Screw ABE7H16R30 0.346 Yes 0 or 24 V – Screw ABE7H16R31 0.346 Type 2 input (1) 16 2 2 Yes 0 or 24 V – Screw ABE7H16R23 0.320 Input 16 2 1 Yes 24 V I, F (2) Screw ABE7H16S43 0.640 Output 16 2 1 Yes 0V I, F (2) Screw ABE7H16F43 0.640 (1) For Modicon Premium. (2) With LED to indicate blown fuse. Presentation, compatibility: pages 5/8 to 5/9 Dimensions: pages 5/18 to 5/19 5/11 5 Connection interfaces References (continued) Advantys™ Telefast® 0 ABE7 pre-wired system Discrete input/output adaptation sub-bases with soldered relays and removable terminal blocks Adaptation sub-bases with soldered relays, removable terminal blocks Input Universal sub-bases with solid state relays No. of channels 16 No. of Isolation PLC/ terminals Operative part per channel 2 Yes Voltage Type of connection Reference Weight 24 V c Screw Spring ABE7S16E2B1 ABE7S16E2B1E kg 0.370 0.370 48 V c Screw Spring ABE7S16E2E1 ABE7S16E2E1E 0.370 0.370 48 V a Screw Spring ABE7S16E2E0 ABE7S16E2E0E 0.386 0.386 110 V a Screw Spring ABE7S16E2F0 ABE7S16E2F0E 0.397 0.397 230 V a Screw Spring ABE7S16E2M0 ABE7S16E2M0E 0.407 0.407 Type of connection Reference Screw Spring ABE7S08S2B0 ABE7S08S2B0E kg 0.252 0.252 Output Universal sub-bases with solid state relays No. of channels 8 16 Isolation PLC/Operative part No No Output voltage Output current 24 V c 0.5 A Fault detection signal (1) Yes (2) 2A Yes (2) Screw Spring ABE7S08S2B1 ABE7S08S2B1E 0.448 0.448 0.5 A Yes (2) Screw Spring ABE7S16S2B0 ABE7S16S2B0E 0.405 0.405 Non Screw Spring ABE7S16S1B2 ABE7S16S1B2E 0.400 0.400 24 V c 5 Weight Output Optimum & Universal sub-bases with electromechanical relays No. of channels Number Output of contacts current 5 mm 1 N/O 2A Latching 2A 10 mm 1 N/O 5 mm 10 mm Polarity distribution/ operative part Contact common per group of 4 channels Type of connection Reference Screw Spring ABE7R08S111 ABE7R08S111E kg 0.252 0.252 Voltage-free Screw Spring ABE7R08S216 ABE7R08S216E 0.448 0.448 5A Voltage-free Screw Spring ABE7R08S210 ABE7R08S210E 0.448 0.448 1 N/O 2A Contact common Screw per group of Spring 8 channels ABE7R16S111 ABE7R16S111E 0.405 0.405 1 N/O 5A Voltage-free Screw Spring ABE7R16S210 ABE7R16S210E 0.405 0.405 Common per group of 8 channels on both poles Screw Spring ABE7R16S212 ABE7R16S212E 0.400 0.400 81 8 Relay width Weight ABE7R08S216 16 (1) A fault on a sub-base output Qn will set PLC output Qn to special mode, which will be detected by the PLC. (2) Can only be used with modules with protected outputs. Presentation, compatibility: pages 5/8 to 5/9 5/12 Dimensions: pages 5/18 to 5/19 Connection interfaces References (continued) Advantys™ Telefast® 0 ABE7 pre-wired system Discrete input/output adaptation sub-bases for or with plug-in relays Adaptation sub-bases, for plug-in relays Input Universal sub-bases for solid state relays (1) No. of channels 16 No. of For terminals relay type per channel 2 ABS7E ABR7 ABS7S33E Isolation PLC/Operative part Yes Input connection Type of connection Reference Weight Voltage-free Screw Spring ABE7P16F310 ABE7P16F310E kg 0.850 0.850 Polarity distribution Screw ABE7P16F312 0.850 Output Optimum & Universal sub-bases with electromechanical relays (2) 81 No. of channels 16 Relay width 5 mm For relay type ABR7S11 No. and type of contacts 1 N/O Polarity distribution/operative part Reference Contact common per group of 4 channels Contact common per group of 4 output channels + 2 input common terminals ABE7R16T111 Weight kg 0.600 ABE7R16M111 (3) 0.600 ABE7R16M111 ABR7S21 1 N/O Voltage-free Common on both poles (4) ABE7R16T210 ABE7R16T212 0.735 0.730 ABR7S23 1 C/O Voltage-free Contact common (4) ABE7R16T230 ABE7R16T231 0.775 0.730 ABR7S33 1 C/O Voltage-free Common on both poles (5) ABE7R16T330 ABE7R16T332 1.300 1.200 ABR7S37 2 C/O Voltage-free ABE7R16T370 1.300 52 10 mm 12 mm ABE7R16T210 (1) Not equipped with relays. (2) Both technologies (electromechanical and solid state) may be combined on the same sub-base. (3) 2 connection methods are available, enabling inputs and outputs to be connected to the same sub-base at the same time. (4) Per group of 8 channels. (5) Per group of 4 channels. Presentation, compatibility: pages 5/8 to 5/9 Dimensions: pages 5/18 to 5/19 5/13 5 Connection interfaces References (continued) Advantys™ Telefast® 0 ABE7 pre-wired system Discrete output adaptation sub-bases for plug-in relays Adaptation sub-bases for plug-in relays (1) Output Optimum & Universal sub-bases for solid state and/or electromechanical relays (2) No. of Relay chan- width nels 16 5 mm Isolator Fuse per Polarity Type of Reference Weight per channel distribution/operative part connection channel kg ABR7S11 No No Contact common per group ABE7P16T111 0.550 ABS7SC1B of 4 channels Contact common per group ABE7P16M111 (2) 0.550 of 4 output channels and 2 common input terminals ABR7S2p No ABS7SA2p ABS7SC2p ABE7ACC20 No Voltage-free Screw Spring ABE7P16T210 (3) ABE7P16T230 (3) ABE7P16T230E (3) 0.615 0.655 0.655 52 10 mm For relay type Yes Voltage-free Screw ABE7P16T214 0.675 No Common on both poles (4) Screw ABE7P16T212 0.615 Yes Common on both poles (4) Screw ABE7P16T215 0.670 ABE7P16T2pp 5 8 12 mm No ABR7S33 ABS7A3p ABS7SC3pp ABE7ACC21 No Voltage-free Screw Spring ABE7P08T330 ABE7P08T330E 0.450 0.450 16 12 mm No ABR7S33 ABS7A3p ABS7SC3pp ABE7ACC21 No Voltage-free Screw Spring ABE7P16T330 ABE7P16T330E 0.900 0.900 Common on both poles (5) Screw ABE7P16T332 0.900 Yes Voltage-free Screw ABE7P16T334 0.900 Yes Common on both poles (5) Screw Spring ABE7P16T318 ABE7P16T318E 1.000 1.000 No ABR7S33 ABS7A3M ABS7SC3E ABE7ACC21 Yes (1) Not equipped with relays. (2) 2 connection methods are available, enabling inputs and outputs to be connected to the same sub-base at the same time. (3) With relay ABR7S21 for sub-base ABE7P16T210, with relay ABR7S23 for sub-base ABE7P16T230p. (4) Per group of 8 channels. (5) Per group of 4 channels. Presentation, compatibility: pages 5/8 to 5/9 5/14 Dimensions: pages 5/18 to 5/19 Connection interfaces References (continued) Advantys™ Telefast® 0 ABE7 pre-wired system Plug-in relays Plug-in solid state relays Functions 5 mm Output Input circuit Current Nominal voltage c 24 V Output circuit Current (1) Nominal voltage 2A 24 V c 10 mm Output c 24 V 0.5 A 12 mm Input c 5 V TTL 24 V Type 2 48 V Type 2 a 50 Hz a 60 Hz a 50 Hz c Unit reference Sold in lots of 4 Weight kg ABS7SC1B 0.010 5…48 V c 24…240 V a ABS7SC2E ABS7SA2M 0.016 0.016 – – 24 V c 24 V c ABS7EC3AL ABS7EC3B2 0.014 0.014 – 24 V c ABS7EC3E2 0.014 48 V 110…130 V 230…240 V – – – 24 V c 24 V c 24 V c ABS7EA3E5 ABS7EA3F5 ABS7EA3M5 0.014 0.014 0.014 24 V 2A Self-protected 1.5 A 24 V c ABS7SC3BA 0.016 5…48 V c 24…240 V a ABS7SC3E ABS7SA3MA 0.016 0.016 57 Relay width ABS7SC1B Output Plug-in electromechanical relays 5 mm Control voltage 24 V c Output current (1) 5 A (Ith) Number of contacts 1 N/O Sold in lots of 4 Unit reference ABR7S11 10 mm 24 V c 5 A (Ith) 1 N/O 1 C/O 4 4 ABR7S21 ABR7S23 0.008 0.008 12 mm 24 V c 10 A (Ith) 8 A (Ith) 8 A (Ith) 1 C/O 2 C/O 1 C/O 4 4 4 ABR7S33 ABR7S37 ABR7S33E 0.017 0.017 0.017 81 Relay width 81 ABR7S2p 48 V c Weight 0.005 Accessory Description Reference Extractor for 5 mm miniature relays ABE7ACC12 Weight kg 0.010 ABR7S3p (1) See characteristics table for specifications of relays in the sub-bases. Presentation, compatibility: pages 5/8 to 5/9 Dimensions: pages 5/18 to 5/19 5/15 5 Connection interfaces References Advantys™ Telefast® 0 ABE7 pre-wired system Connection sub-bases for counter and analog channels Connection sub-bases for counter and analog channels 816478 Functions For Modicon PLCs Compatible modules Type of Type of connection connection Telefast 2 side 15-pin SUB-D Screw Reference Counting and analog TSX Micro Integrated analog and counter TSX 37 22 TSX CTZpA Counting, Axis control, Position control Premium TSX CTYpA TSX CAYp1 15-pin SUB-D Screw ABE7CPA01 ( 0.300 Parallel output absolute encoder connection Premium TSX CTYpA TSX CAYp1 15-pin SUB-D Screw ABE7CPA11 0.330 Distribution of 4 thermocouples Modicon M340 BMX ART 0414 25-pin SUB-D BMX ART 0814 Screw ABE7CPA412 0.180 Distribution of 16 thermocouples Premium TSX AEY1614 25-pin SUB-D Screw ABE7CPA12 0.300 Passive distribution of 8 channels on screw terminal block with shielding continuity Premium TSX ASY810 25-pin SUB-D TSX AEY1600 TSX ApY800 Screw ABE7CPA02 0.290 Distribution and supply of Modicon M340 BMX AMI 0410 25-pin SUB-D 4 analog channels protected isolated Screw ABE7CPA410 0.180 Distribution of 4 analog output channels 25-pin SUB-D Screw ABE7CPA21 0.180 Distribution and supply Premium of 8 analog channels with limitation of each current loop TSX AEY800 25-pin SUB-D TSX AEY1600 Screw ABE7CPA03 0.330 Premium Distribution and supply of 8 analog input channels isolated from each other with 25 mA/ channel limiter TSX AEY810 25-pin SUB-D Screw Spring ABE7CPA31 ABE7CPA31E 0.410 0.410 Safety TSX PAY2p2 25-pin SUB-D Screw ABE7CPA13 0.290 ABE7CPA01 Weight kg 0.300 ABE7CPA01 816477 ABE7CPA412/410/21 5 ABE7CPA02 Presentation, compatibility: pages 5/8 and 5/9 5/16 Dimensions: pages 5/18 and 5/19 Premium Premium TSX ASY410 TSX AEY420 References (continued) Connection interfaces Advantys™ Telefast® 0 ABE7 pre-wired system 816483 Accessories for connection sub-bases Software Description ABE7ACC02 Operating system Reference Software for marking customer labels Under version 3.1 or 95 ABE7LOGV10 Weight kg 0.350 Pack of 25 pre-cut label sheets (160 labels) – ABE7LOGF25 0.200 Windows® 816480 Accessories Description 816481 ABE7ACC80 + ABE7ACC81 580700 ABE7BV20 2 01 2 01 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 7 Characteristics Sold in lots of 10 Unit reference ABE7ACC01 Weight kg 0.008 Kit for mounting on solid plate Splitter sub-base – – – 16 as 2 x 8 channels 16 as 2 x 16 channels 16 as 2 x 16 channels Width 10 mm Width 12 mm 1 ABE7ACC02 0.075 Redundant output sub-base Redundant input sub-base Plug-in continuity blocks – 1 ABE7ACC10 0.075 1 ABE7ACC11 0.075 4 4 ABE7ACC20 ABE7ACC21 0.007 0.010 Locating device for removable terminal block Enclosure feedthrough with industrial connector Plug-in 40-pin male connector Enclosure feedthrough with CNOMO M23 connector (1 x 20-pin HE 10 connector, PLC end) Impedance adapter for Type 2 compatibility – – 100 ABE7ACC30 0.100 32 40-pin 1 ABE7ACC80 0.300 32 1 ABE7ACC81 0.370 16 For mounting on ABE7ACC80 19-pin 1 ABE7ACC82 0.150 8 and 12 19-pin 1 ABE7ACC83 0.150 – Used with ABE7ACC82 and ABE7ACC83 For 3 cables 10 screw terminals 10 spring terminals 1 ABE7ACC85 0.012 IP 65 cable gland Additional snap-on terminal blocks (shunted terminals) – 8 5 5 5 ABE7ACC84 ABE7BV10 ABE7BV10E 0.300 0.030 0.030 16 20 screw terminals 20 spring terminals 5 5 ABE7BV20 ABE7BV20E 0.060 0.060 I/O simulator sub-base 16 1 ABE7TES160 0.350 Self-adhesive marker tag holder Quick-blow fuses 5 x 20, 250 V, UL – Display, forcing inhibition, continuity For 6 characters 50 AR1SB3 0.001 0.125 A 0.5 A 1A 2A 4A 6.3 A 10 10 10 10 10 10 ABE7FU012 ABE7FU050 ABE7FU100 ABE7FU200 ABE7FU400 ABE7FU630 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 For common Color Reference Coil White Distance between cable ends cm 12 2 ABFC08R12W ABFC08R02W kg 0.020 0.010 a Red 12 2 ABFC08R12R ABFC08R02R 0.020 0.010 c Blue 12 2 ABFC08R12B ABFC08R02B 0.020 0.010 – – – 816479 ABE7TES160 No. of channels Jumper accessories AR1SB3 Description 816484 Jumper Modularity 8 x 1 mm 2 Weight ABFC08Rppp Presentation, compatibility: pages 5/8 and 5/9 Dimensions: pages 5/18 and 5/19 5/17 5 Connection interfaces Dimensions Advantys™ ABE7H20Eppp ABE7H32Eppp ABE7H16Cpp/ABE7H16CMpp, ABE7p16M111/ABE7p16T111 0 ABE7 pre-wired system ABE7H16R50, ABE7H12R50, ABE7H08R1p, ABE7H08R21, ABE7R08S111/S111E, ABE7H08S21, ABE7CPA21/40/412 b b 35 b b1 b Common side view Telefast® 1 1 1 1 55 15 84 a c c+9 ABE 7H20E/7H32Eppp b b1 c ABE 7H16Cpp, 7H16CMpp a 106 b 49 b1 41.5 c 60 67 56 59 7p16M111, 7p16T111 110 89 58 54 ABE 7H16/12/08ppp 7R08S111p 7CPA21/410/412 70 77 58 58 58 58 b b1 c 1 Additional shunt terminal block ABE7BV10/7BV20 70 ABE7H16p43 77 b 35 5 ABE7R16S21p, ABE7S16S2B0/S2B02E, ABE7S16E2pp/S16E2ppE, ABE7S08S2B1/S08S2B1E ABE7CPA31 b + 12 ABE7H16R2p, ABE7H12R2p, ABE7H16R3p, ABE7H16R1p, ABE7H12R1p, ABE7H12S21, ABE7H16S2p, ABE7R16S11p, ABE7R08S210, ABE7S08S2B0, ABE7CPA02, ABE7CPA03 ABE7S16S1B2, ABE7R08S216 b1 Common side view 1 206 15 125 c c1 ABE b b1 c 7pppppp 70 58 58 7pR08S210p, 7S16S1B2p, 7R08S216 77 58 58 All sub-bases b1 c 58 1 Additional shunt terminal block ABE7BV10/7BV20 ABE7CPA01, ABE7CPA11/CPA12/CPA13 15 70 35 89 35 58 ABE7R16T2pp, ABE7P16T2pp 58 67 211 143 64 73 Note : details of the front view are the same as for the ABE7CPA01. ABE7P08T330 15 74 83 5/18 89 89 35 58 ABE7R16T3pp, ABE7P16T3pp, ABE7P16F31p Common side view 272 150 Connection interfaces Dimensions (continued) Advantys™ ABE7ACC02 Telefast® 0 ABE7 pre-wired system ABE7ACC03 ABE7ACC04, ABE7ACC05 ABE7ACC10, ABE7ACC11 A C B D C D 89 35 58 58 B 89 70 35 15 A C 35 B 58 A 50 15 88 15 48 57 66 48 48 57 57 Note : Drawing representing ABE7ACC04 and ABE7ACC05 ABE7ACC82, ABE7ACC83 ABE7ACC80 50 112 130 140 88 54 25 42 43 74 65 34 52 5 32 64,5 35 ABE7TES160 35 89 80 103 120 58 ABE7ACC84 170 15 72 43 30 54 32 50 59 Mounting hole dimensions for sub-bases using mounting kit ABE7ACC01 b G = a-12 Presentation, compatibility: pages 5/8 and 5/9 H = b+12 a 6 ABE7 ACC02 ACC03 ACC04 ACC05 ACC10/11 H08Rpp H08S21 H12R50 H16R50 R08S111 CPA01 CPA02 CPA1p CPA03 G 38 53 53 53 53 72 72 72 72 72 131 113 131 113 H 82 101 101 101 101 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 ABE7 H12R1p H12R2p H16R1p H16R2p H16R3p H12S21 H16S21 R08S210 R16S111 R16S21p S08S2B0 S08S2B1 G 113 113 113 113 113 113 113 113 113 194 113 194 H 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 ABE7 H16F43 H16S43 S16E2pp S16S1B2 S16S2pp R16T2pp P16T2pp R16T3pp P08T330 P16T3pp P16F3pp G 194 194 194 113 194 199 199 260 150 260 260 H 82 82 82 82 82 101 101 101 101 101 101 References: pages 5/18 to 5/19 5/19 Selection guide 0 Power supplies and transformers Power supplies for DC control circuits Phaseo® power supplies Power supplies Regulated switch mode Phaseo Modular range and Optimum range industrial power supplies Input voltage 100...240 V a 120...250 V c (see pages 13 and 14) Single-phase (N-L1) or 2-phase (L1-L2) connection Connection to United States world-wide line supplies - 120 V (in phase-to-neutral) - 240 V (in phase-to-phase) Europe - 230 V (in phase-to-neutral) - 400 V (in phase-to-phase) United States - 277 V (in phase-to-neutral) - 480 V (in phase-to-phase) 5 Single-phase (N-L1) connection – IEC 61000-3-2 conformity Yes for ABL 7RP, not for ABL 8REM and not applicable for ABL 8MEM and ABL 7RM Protection against undervoltage (U > 19 V) Protection against overloads and short-circuits Yes Yes, voltage detection. Automatic restart on elimination on the fault Diagnostic relay – Compatibility with function modules – Power reserve (Boost) 1,25 to 1,4 In during 1 minute, depending on model (with ABL 8MEM) No Output voltage 5Vc Output current 12 V c 0.3 A 1.2 A 2A ABL 8MEM12020 (Modular) 2.5 A ABL 7RM24025 (Modular) ABL 8REM24030 (Optimum) 3A 5A ABL 8MEM05040 (Modular) ABL 7RP1205 (Optimum) ABL 8REM24050 (Optimum) 6A 10 A 20 A 40 A Pages Consult our “Phaseo Power supplies and transformers” catalog (1) Except ABL 8RPM24200. a 100...120 V and a 200...240 V. (2) c / c converter module, requires to be associated with the Phaseo Universal range power supply. 5/ 48 V c ABL 8MEM24003 (Modular) ABL 8MEM24006 (Modular) ABL 8MEM24012 (Modular) 0.6 A 4A 24 V c ABL 7RP4803 (Optimum) 0 0 0 Regulated switch mode Phaseo Universal range industrial power supplies 100...120 V a and 200...500 V a (1) 380...500 V a 24 V c Single-phase (N-L1) or 2-phase (L1-L2) – connection – 3-phase (L1-L2-L3) connection – 3-phase (L1-L2-L3) connection – Yes – Yes Yes, current limitation or undervoltage detection – Yes, current limitation Yes, depending on model 5 Yes with buffer module, battery and battery check modules, redundancy module and discriminating downstream protection module 1,5 In during 4 secondes No 24 V c 5Vc 7...12 V c ABL 8DCC12020 (2) ABL 8RPS24030 ABL 8RPS24050 ABL 8DCC05060 (2) ABL 8RPS24100 ABL 8RPM24200 ABL 8WPS24200 ABL 8WPS24400 29 Consult our “Phaseo Power supplies and transformers” catalog 5/21 Presentation 0 Power supplies and transformers Power supplies for DC control circuits Regulated switch mode power supplies Phaseo® power supplies, Universal range a Switch mode power supplies: Universal range c ABL 8RPS24050 Modicon M340 automation platform The ABL 8RPS/RPM/WPS power supply offer is designed to provide the DC voltage necessary for the control circuits of automation system equipment. Comprising six products, this range meets the needs encountered in industrial and commercial applications. These compact electronic switch mode power supplies provide a quality of output current that is suitable for the loads supplied and compatible with the Modicon M340, Premium and Quantum ranges. When used with additional function modules, they ensure continuity of service in the event of network power outages or application malfunctions. Clear guidelines are given on selecting the function modules and upstream protection devices which are often used with them, and thus a comprehensive solution is provided that can be used in total safety. The Universal range of Phaseo power supplies must be connected in phase-to-neutral or phase-to-phase for ABL 8RPS/RPM, and in 3-phase for ABL 8WPS. They deliver a voltage that is precise to 3%, whatever the load and whatever the type of line supply, within the ranges: v 85 to 132 V a and 170 to 550 V a for ABL 8RPS v 85 to 132 V a and 170 to 264 V a for ABL 8RPM v 340 to 550 V a for ABL 8WPS Their very wide input voltage range allows a considerable reduction of parts held in stock and offers a distinct advantage in terms of machine design. Conforming to IEC standards and UL and CSA certified, they are suitable for universal use. ABL 8RPS/RPM and ABL 8WPS power supplies are all equipped with a harmonic filter, ensuring compliance with standard 61000-3-2 concerning harmonic pollution. All the Universal range of Phaseo power supplies have protection devices to ensure optimum performance of the automation system. Their operating mode can be configured as required by the user: b Manual reset protection mode: Priority is given to the voltage so as to guarantee the PLC logic states and nominal operation of the supplied actuators. b Automatic reset protection mode: Priority is given to the current to allow troubleshooting for example, or to ensure continuity of service until the arrival of the maintenance team. 5 The Universal range of Phaseo power supplies also has a power reserve, allowing them to deliver a current of 1.5 In at regular intervals. This avoids the need to oversize the power supply if the device has a high inrush current, while ensuring optimum performance of the automation system. The diagnostics for the Universal range of Phaseo power supplies are available on the front of the device via LEDs (Uout and Iout) and via a volt-free relay contact (whether or not the PLC states are guaranteed). All products are equipped with an output voltage adjustment potentiometer in order to be able to compensate for any line voltage drops in installations with long connection cable runs. These power supplies are designed for direct mounting on a 35 mm 5 rail. Description: page 23 5/22 Characteristics: pages 24 to 28 References: page 29 Dimensions: page 30 Schemes: page 31 0 Presentation (continued), description Power supplies and transformers 0 0 Power supplies for DC control circuits Regulated switch mode power supplies Phaseo® powwer supplies, Universal range Switch mode power supplies: Universal range (continued) a There are four references available in the Universal range of Phaseo power supplies for phase-to-neutral or phase-to-phase connection: b ABL 8RPS24030 72 W 3A 24 V c b ABL 8RPS24050 120 W 5A 24 V c b ABL 8RPS24100 240 W 10 A 24 V c b ABL 8RPM24200 480 W 20 A 24 V c The Universal range of Phaseo power supplies also features two references for 3-phase connection: b ABL 8WPS24200 480 W 20 A 24 V c b ABL 8WPS24400 960 W 20 A 24 V c ABL 8WPS24200 c Premium automation platform A range of function modules also allows functions to be added to the Universal range of Phaseo power supplies so as to ensure continuity of service: v A Buffer module or Battery check modules combined with their batteries to ensure continuity of service in the event of a network power outage v A Redundancy module to meet the most demanding requirements for continuity of service even if the power supply fails v Downstream electronic Protection modules to ensure that the protection in the application is discriminating v Converter modules delivering nominal voltages of 5 and 12 V c from the 24 V c output of the Universal range of Phaseo power supplies Description 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Universal range of power supplies The Universal range of Phaseo regulated switch mode power supplies, ABL 8RPS24pp0/RPM24200/WPS24p00, comprise: 1 Spring clip for 35 mm 5 rail 2 4 mm 2 enclosed screw terminals for connection of the AC voltage (single-phase, phase-to-phase or 3-phase connection) 3 Protective glass flap 4 Clip-on marker label 5 Locking catch for the glass flap (sealable) 6 Protection mode selector 7 Output voltage adjustment potentiometer 8 Output voltage status LED (green and red) 9 Output current status LED (green, red and orange) 10Screw terminals for connection of the diagnostic relay contact, except ABL 8RPS24030 114 mm 2 (10 mm2 on ABL 8WPS24p00 and ABL 8RPM24200) enclosed screw terminals for connection of the DC output voltage 10 11 Characteristics: pages 24 to 28 References: page 29 Dimensions: page 30 Schemes: page 31 5/23 5 Characteristics 0 Power supplies and transformers Power supplies for DC control circuits Regulated switch mode power supplies Phaseo® power supplies, Universal range Technical characteristics Type of power supply Certifications Conformity to standards Safety EMC ABL 8RPS24030 ABL 8RPS24050 ABL 8RPS24100 ABL 7RPM24200 CB scheme EN 60950-1, UL (pending), cCSAus IEC/EN 60950-1, EN 61204, SELV EN 61000-6-1, EN 61000-6-2, EN 61000-6-3, EN 61000-6-4, EN 61204-3 Input circuit Input values Nominal voltage phase-to-neutral (N-L1) or phase-to-phase (L1-L2) Limit voltage Permissible frequencies Maximum inrush current Power factor Efficiency at nominal load Dissipated power at nominal load V 100…120 V a/200…500 V a V 85…132 V a/170…550 V a Hz A 47…63 30 for 2 ms max. 0.59 at 120 V a/0.51 at 240 V a 0.69 at 120 V a/0.68 at 240 V a > 87 % > 88 % 7.8 15.5 31 57.6 Yes, via integrated PFC (Power Factor Correction) passive filter W Anti-harmonic filtering 100…120 V a / 200…240 V a 85…132 V a / 170…264 V a Output circuit Compatibility with function modules Diagnostics LEDs on front panel Relay Nominal output values 5 Nominal output voltage (UOut) Current Power Permissible temporary inrush current (boost) Precision Nominal output voltage (UOut) Line and load regulation Residual ripple - noise Holding time for I max. UIn = 100 V a UIn = 240 V a UIn = 400 V a Protection Against short-circuits Against overloads Against overvoltages Against undervoltages Thermal V A W A V mV ms ms ms V V Buffer, battery and battery check unit, redundancy, discriminating protection Current (green, orange and red), voltage (green, red and off) – Relay closed UOut > 21.6 V contact 230 V a, 0.5 A max; 24 V c, 5 mA min 24 c 3 5 10 20 72 120 240 480 1.5 In for 4 s maximum, see curves on page 5/27 Adjustable 24…28.8 1 %...3 % < 200 (peak-peak) u 20 u 40 u 120 – Permanent, automatic or manual restart < 1.10 In (after "boost" function) 30…32 c Tripping if UOut < 21.6 (in manual mode) Yes Operating and environmental characteristics Connections Mounting Operating position Connections Degree of protection Environment Protection class Dielectric strength 50 Hz for 1 min Input Output Diagnostic relay On 5 rail Series Parallel Operating temperature Storage temperature Maximum relative humidity Vibration acc. to EN 61131-2 According to VDE 0106 1 Input/output Input/ground Output/ground Input fuse incorporated Radiation Emissions according to EN 61000-6-3 Conducted on the power line Harmonic currents Immunity Electrostatic discharge according to EN 61000-6-2 Radiated electromagnetic fields and GL Induced electromagnetic fields Rapid transients Surges Primary outages Description: page 23 5/24 References: page 29 mm 2 mm 2 mm 2 2 x 0.5….4 screw terminals (22….12 AWG) + ground 4 x 0.5….4 screw terminals (24….10 AWG) + ground (1) – 2 x 2.5 removable screw terminal block 35 x 7.5 mm and 35 x 15 mm Vertical Possible, see page 5/28 Possible, see page5/28 IP 20 conforming to IEC 60529 °C - 25…+ 60 (derating from 50°C, see page 5/26) °C - 40…+ 70 90% during operation, 95% in storage 3...11.9 Hz amplitude 3.5 mm & 11.9 -150 Hz acceleration 2 g Class I V rms 4000 a V rms 3500 a V rms 500 a No EN 55022 Class B and GL levels EN 55022 Class B and GL levels IEC/EN 61000-3-2 IEC/EN 61000-4-2 (6 kV contact/8 kV air) IEC/EN 61000-4-3 level 3 (10 V/m) IEC/EN 61000-4-6 level 3 (10 V/m) IEC/EN 61000-4-4 (4 kV) IEC/EN 61000-4-5 (2 kV) IEC/EN 61000-4-11 (voltage dips and interruptions) (1) No ground screw on ABL 8RPM 24200 power supply Dimensions: page 30 Schemes: page 31 3000 a 2500 a 0 Characteristics (continued) 0 Power supplies and transformers 0 Power supplies for DC control circuits Regulated switch mode power supplies Phaseo® power supplies, Universal range Technical characteristics Type of power supply Certifications Conformity to standards Safety EMC ABL 8WPS24200 ABL 8WPS24400 CB scheme EN 60950-1, UL (pending), cCSAus EN 60950-1, EN 61204, SELV EN 61000-6-1, EN 61000-6-2, EN 61000-6-3, EN 61000-6-4, EN 61204-3 Input circuit LED indication Input values 3 phase (L1-L2-L3) Nominal values Permissible values Permissible frequencies Maximum inrush current Power factor Efficiency at nominal load Dissipated power at nominal load Anti-harmonic filtering Operating mode in the event of phase failure V V Hz A W V – 380-500 V a 320-550 V a 47…63 25 for 2 ms max. 0.65 0.85 > 92% 38.4 76.8 Yes, via integrated PFC (Power Factor Correction) passive filter Operation possible for a few minutes then protection trips Output circuit Compatibility with function modules Diagnostics LEDs on front panel Relay Nominal output values Output voltage (UOut) Current Power Permissible temporary inrush current (boost) Precision Output voltage (UOut) Line and load regulation Residual ripple - noise Holding time UIn = 400 V a for I max Protection Against short-circuits Against overloads Against overvoltages Against undervoltages Thermal V A W A V mV ms V V Buffer, battery and battery check unit, redundancy, discriminating protection Current (green, orange and red), voltage (green, red and off) Closed relay Uout > 21.6 V, contact 230 V a, 0.5 A max; 24 V c, 5 mA min 24 c 0...20 0...40 480 960 1.5 In for 4 s maximum, see curves on page 5/27 Adjustable 24…28.8 1 %...3 % < 200 (peak-peak) u 18 u 14 5 Permanent, automatic or manual restart < 1.10 In (after "boost" function) 30…32 c Tripping if UOut < 21.6 (in manual mode) Yes Operating and environmental characteristics Connections Mounting Operating position Connections Input Output Diagnostic relay On 5 rail Series Parallel Degree of protection Environment Operating temperature Storage temperature Maximum relative humidity Vibration acc. to EN 61131-2 Protection class according to VDE 0106 1 Dielectric strength Input/output 50 Hz for 1 min Input/ground Output/ground Input fuse incorporated Emissions Radiation according to EN 61000-6-3 Conducted on the power line Harmonic currents Immunity Electrostatic discharge according to EN 61000-6-2 Radiated electromagnetic fields and GL Induced electromagnetic fields Rapid transients Surges Primary outages Description: page 23 mm2 mm2 mm2 References: page 29 °C °C V rms V rms V rms 3 x 0.5….4 screw terminals (22….12 AWG) + ground 4 x 0.5….10 screw terminals (22….8 AWG) 2 x 2.5 removable screw terminal block 35 x 7.5 mm and 35 x 15 mm Vertical Possible, see page 5/28 Possible, see page 5/28 IP 20 conforming to IEC 60529 - 25…+ 60 (derating from 50°C, see page 5/26) - 40…+ 70 90% during operation, 95% in storage 3...11.9 Hz amplitude 3.5 mm & 11.9 -150 Hz acceleration 2 g Class I 4000 a 3500 a 500 a No EN 55022 Class B and GL levels EN 55022 Class B and GL levels IEC/EN 61000-3-2 IEC/EN 61000-4-2 (6 kV contact/8 kV air) IEC/EN 61000-4-3 level 3 (10 V/m) IEC/EN 61000-4-6 level 3 (10 V/m) IEC/EN 61000-4-4 (4 kV) IEC/EN 61000-4-5 (1 kV) IEC/EN 61000-4-11 (voltage dips and interruptions) Dimensions: page 30 Schemes: page 31 5/25 Output characteristics 0 Power supplies and transformers 0 Power supplies for DC control circuits Regulated switch mode power supplies Phaseo® power supplies, Universal range Output characteristics Derating The ambient temperature is a determining factor that limits the power an electronic power supply can deliver continuously. If the temperature around the electronic components is too high, their life will be significantly reduced. The nominal ambient temperature for the Universal range of Phaseo power supplies is 50°C. Above this temperature, derating is necessary up to a maximum temperature of 60°C. The graph below shows the power (in relation to the nominal power) that the power supply can deliver continuously, depending on the ambient temperature. P/Pn (%) 140 120 100 80 60 50 40 20 5 0 0 10 20 30 40 70 50 60 Maximum operating temperature (°C) ABL 8RPM, ABL 8RPS, ABL 8WPS mounted vertically Derating should be considered in extreme operating conditions: v Intensive operation (output current permanently close to the nominal current, combined with a high ambient temperature) v Output voltage set above 24V (to compensate for line voltage drops, for example) v Parallel connection to increase the total power General rules to be complied with Intensive operation Rise in output voltage Mounting See derating on above graph. Example for ABL 8RPS: - Without derating, from 0°C to 50°C - Derating of nominal current by 2%, per additional °C, up to 60°C The nominal power is fixed. Increasing the output voltage means that the current delivered must be reduced. To allow heat dissipation, the power supplies must not be in contact with each other. In all cases, there must be adequate convection around the products to assist cooling. There must be sufficient clearance around the Universal range of Phaseo power supplies: v 50 mm above and below v 10 mm on the sides Description: page 23 5/26 References: page 29 Dimensions: page 30 Schemes: page 31 Power supplies and transformers Output characteristics (continued) 0 0 Power supplies for DC control circuits Regulated switch mode power supplies Phaseo® power supplies, Universal range Output characteristics (continued) Behavior in the event of overloads Behavior in the event of overloads: b Automatic reset protection mode (current limiting): If the output current exceeds approximately 1.2 In, the output current is limited to this value. The value of the output voltage can then be less than 21 V but the diagnostic relay opens, allowing the anomaly to be fed back to the automation system and thus prevent feedback of any undefined logic state. On elimination of the overload, the output voltage reverts to its preset value. b Manual reset protection mode (undervoltage detection): If the output current exceeds approximately 1.2 In, the power supply stops completely before the output voltage drops below 21 V and no longer delivers any current. The fault is memorized as long as voltage is present at the power supply primary. The power supply will become operational again, if the fault has disappeared, after de-energizing the primary for a few seconds. Nota : In both these modes, any overload of less than 1.5 In and lasting less than 4 s will be absorbed by the "boost" circuit and the voltage delivered will stay within the specified limits (adjustment voltage +/- 3%). Load limit Manual reset protection mode ABL 8RPM24200/ABL 8RPS24 ppp/ABL 8WPS24 ppp Automatic reset protection mode ABL 8RPM24200/ABL 8RPS24ppp/ABL 8WPS24 ppp U out U out 28,8 28,8 24 24 Boost 4 s Boost 4 s 5 21,6 21,6 In In 1,2 In 1,5 In I out 1,2 In 1,5 In I out "Boost" repeat accuracy The ABL 8RPS/RPM/WPS Universal range of Phaseo power supplies has a power reserve, allowing them to supply the application with energy up to 1.5 times the nominal current at the intervals illustrated by the graph opposite. Pout 4s 30 s The "boost" amplitude and repeat accuracy depend on: v The overload duration v The overload intensity v The period between each consumption peak 150 % 30 s 75 % 0% t When the power supply can no longer cope (repeated overloads, overload duration > 4 seconds, power rating > 150% of nominal power) the integrated protection trips. This type of operation is described in detail in the user manual, which can be downloaded from our website, www.telemecanique.com. Behavior in the event of phase failure on three-phase power supplies The ABL 8WPS24p00 Universal range of Phaseo power supplies is capable of starting and delivering a nominal current and voltage for a few minutes in the event of failure of one phase. Their protection (thermal) then trips and they are reset automatically. Description: page 23 References: page 29 Dimensions: page 30 Schemes: page 31 5/27 Power supplies and transformers Output characteristics (continued), selection, schemes Power supplies for DC control circuits Regulated switch mode power supplies Phaseo® power supplies, Universal range 0 Output characteristics (continued) Series or parallel connection Series connection + + + (1) ABL 8RP ABL 8WP ABL 8RP ABL 8WP ABL 8RP ABL 8WP + ABL 8RP ABL 8WP Parallel connection (1) 2 x 24 V c/I out 24 V c/2 x I out Family Series Parallel ABL 8RPS/8RPM/8WPS 2 products max. (1) 2 products max. Nota : Series or parallel connection is only recommended for products with identical references. For better availability, the power supplies can also be connected in parallel using the ABL8 RED24400 Redundancy module. Selection of protection on the power supply primaries 115 V a phase-to-neutral Thermal-magnetic circuit-breaker Type of line supply Type of protection ABL 8RPS24030 Merlin Gerin C60N (IEC) C60N (UL) MG24443 ABL 8RPS24050 GB2 CD08 MG24444 ABL 8RPS24100 GB2 CD12 MG24447 ABL 8RPM24200 GB2 CD16 MG24449 ABL 8WPS24200 – ABL 8WPS24400 – 230 V a phase-to-phase Thermal-magnetic gG/gL circuit-breaker fuse Telemecanique GB2 (IEC) (2) GB2 CD07 Merlin Gerin C60N (IEC) C60N (UL) MG24443 GB2 CD07 MG24443 GB2 CD08 MG24444 GB2 CD12 MG24447 – 2A (8 x 32) 4A (8 x 32) 6A (8 x 32) 10 A (8 x 32) – – – 2A (8 x 2A (8 x 4A (8 x 6A (8 x – – – – – – 32) 32) 32) GV2 ME07 GV2 ME08 Description: page 23 5/28 References: page 29 Dimensions: page 30 Schemes: page 31 1/L1 3/L2 5/L3 4/T2 6/T3 5/L3 (1) Two Shottky diodes Imin = power supply In and Vmin = 50 V (2) UL certification pending 2/T1 3/L2 GV2 MEpp 6/T3 2/T1 1/L1 1/L1 GV2 RTpp 4/T2 3/L2 (13) 2/T1 GB2 CDpp 400 V a phase-to-phase ThermalgG/gL magnetic fuse circuitbreaker Telemecanique GV2 (IEC/UL) GV2 RT06 2A (14 x 51) GV2 RT06 2A (14 x 51) GV2 RT07 4A (14 x 51) – – 32) Schemes 4/T2 (14) 5 Telemecanique GB2 (IEC) (2) GB2 CD07 gG/gL fuse 2A (14 x 51) 4A (14 x 51) 0 References 0 Power supplies and transformers 0 Power supplies for DC control circuits Regulated switch mode power supplies Phaseo® power supplies, Universal range Regulated switch mode power supplies: Phaseo Universal range Input voltage Secondary Output Nominal voltage power Reset Nominal current Conforming Reference to standard EN 61000-3-2 Weight kg Single-phase (N-L1) or phase-to-phase (L1-L2) connection 24...28.8 V 72 W c 120 W 240 W 3A 5A 10 A Auto/man Auto/man Auto/man Yes Yes Yes ABL 8RPS24030 ABL 8RPS24050 ABL 8RPS24100 0.300 0.700 1.000 100…120 V/200.. 24...28.8 V 480 W c .240 V a - 15%,+ 10% 50/60 Hz 3-phase connection (L1-L2-L3) 380…500 V a 24...28.8 V 480 W ± 10 % c 960 W 50/60 Hz 20 A Auto/man Yes ABL 8RPM24200 1.600 20 A 40 A Auto/man Auto/man Yes Yes ABL 8WPS24200 ABL 8WPS24400 1.600 2.700 100…120 V 200...500 V a - 15%,+ 10% 50/60 Hz ABL 8RPS24050 Function modules for continuity of service Function ABL 8RPM24200 Use Continuity after Holding time 100 ms at 40 A and 2 s at a power outage 1 A Holding time 9 min at 40 A...2 hrs at 1 A (depending on use with a battery check module-battery unit and load) (1) Designation Reference Buffer module ABL 8BUF24400 Battery check module 20 A output current Battery check module 40 A output current 3.2 Ah battery module (2) Redundancy module ABL 8BBU24200 r ABL 8BBU24200 r ABL 8BPK24A03 r ABL 8BPK24A03 r ABL 8BPK24A12 r ABL 8RED24400 Protection module with single-pole breaking (3) Protection module with 2-pole breaking (4) (3) ABL 8PRE24100 r ABL 8PRP24100 r 7 Ah battery module (2) 12 Ah battery module (2) ABL 8WPS24200 Continuity after Paralleling and redundancy of the a malfunction power supply to ensure uninterrupted operation of the application excluding AC line failures and application overloads Discriminating Electronic protection (1...10 A downstream overload or short-circuit) with 4 output protection terminals from a Universal range Phaseo power supply Weight kg 1.200 0.500 0.700 3.500 6.500 12.000 0.700 0.270 0.270 c/c converters (for use with Universal range of Phaseo power supplies) Primary (5) Input voltage ABL 8BUF24400 24 V c - 9%, + 24% Secondary Output voltage 5...6.5 V c 7...15 V c Universal range power supply module output current 2.2 A 1.7 A Reference Nominal current 6A 2A Weight kg ABL 8DCC05060 ABL 8DCC12020 0.300 0.300 Separate and replacement parts Designation Fuse assemblies ABL 8BBU24200 Clip-on marker labels DIN rail mounting kit Cables ABL 8RED24400 Description Composition Unit reference For ABL 8PRp24100 discriminating Protection modules For ABL 8BKP24App Battery All products except ABL 8PRpppppp ABL 8PRpppppp 4 x 3 A, 4 x 7.5 A and 4 x 15 A 4 x 20 A and 6 x 30 A Order in multiples of 100 Order in multiples of 22 ABL 8FUS01 For ABL 8BPK2403 Battery Module Single unit ABL 1A02 ABL 8FUS02 LAD 90 ASI20MACC5 Weight kg – – 0.030 – – Connection cable between ABL8 BBU RS232 3 m SR2CBL01 0.150 and PC for updating the software USB 3 m SR2USB01 0.150 EEPROM Backup and duplication of ABL8 BBU Single unit SR2MEM02 0.010 memory parameters (1) For table of compatibility of battery check module-battery unit with holding time depending on the load, consult our “Phaseo Power supplies and transformers” catalogue. (2) Supplied with 20 or 30 A fuse depending on the model. (3) Supplied with four 15 A fuses. (4) Local reset via pushbutton or automatic reset on elimination of the fault and diagnostic relay. (5) Voltage from a 24 V c Universal range Phaseo power supply. r Available 2nd quarter 2007. Description: page 23 Characteristics: pages 24 to 28 Dimensions: page 30 Schemes: page 31 5/29 5 Power supplies and transformers Dimensions, internal schemes 0 Power supplies for DC control circuits Regulated switch mode power supplies Phaseo® power supplies, Universal range Dimensions ABL 8RPS24ppp/ABL 8RPM24200/ABL 8WPS24ppp Common side view b 12 a ABL 8 RPS24030 RPS24050 RPS24100 RPM24200 WPS24200 WPS24400 125 143 L1 N/L2 L3 +IN b 44 56 85 145 95 165 +OUT 14 6 11 6 a 120 120 140 140 155 155 Internal schemes 5/30 Characteristics: pages 24 to 28 C HV LV 11 14 11 14 + + 11 14 L1 L3 C References: page 29 + + 14 11 PFC + + 14 11 PFC + + Description: page 23 ABL 8WPS24400 L3 L1 PFC L2 ABL 8WPS24200 HV C ABL 8RPM24200 LV 5 PFC + + + + PFC L2 PFC ABL 8RPS24100 HV LV C ABL 8RPS24050 HV LV ABL 8RPS24030 Schemes: page 31 0 Connections 0 Power supplies and transformers 0 Power supplies for DC control circuits Regulated switch mode power supplies Phaseo® power supplies, Universal range Line supply connection schemes Single-phase (L-N) 100 to 120 V Phase-to-phase (L1-L2) 200 to 500 V L N 3-phase (L1-L2-L3) 3 x 380 to 500 V L1 L2 L3 Ph 1 Ph 2 LV LV C HV C HV L1 L2 L3 100 120 100 120 200 500 200 500 3x380 - 500 VAC Single-phase (L-N) 200 to 500 V L N LV C HV 100 120 200 500 5 Description: page 23 Characteristics: pages 24 to 28 References: page 29 Dimensions: page 30 5/31 Selection guide 0 Human/Machine Interfaces Operator dialogue terminals Magelis® display units and terminals Applications Display of text messages Type of unit Compact display units Display Display of text messages and/or semigraphics Type Back-lit green LCD, height 5.5 mm or Back-lit green, orange or red LCD, height 4.34…17.36 mm Back-lit monochrome matrix LCD (240 x 64 pixels), height 5.3 or 10.6 mm Capacity 2 lines of 20 characters or 1 to 4 lines of 5 to 20 characters 4 to 8 lines of 20 to 40 characters Via keypad with 8 keys (4 with changeable legends) Display only or via keypad with 4 function keys + 1 service key or 5 service keys Data entry 5 Memory capacity Application Extension via type II PCMCIA 512 Kb Flash – 384 Kb Flash EPROM Functions Maximum number of pages 128/200 application pages 256 alarm pages Variables per page Representation of variables Recipes Curves Alarm logs Real-time clock Alarm relay 40…50 Alphanumeric – – Depending on model Access to the PLC real-time clock – 600 application pages 256 alarm pages 256 print-out form pages (1) 50 Alphanumeric, bargraph, gauge Serial link Downloadable protocols RS 232 C/RS 485 Uni-TE, Modbus Printer link RS 232C serial link (1) Communication No RS 232C or RS 422/485 Uni-TE, Modbus, AEG and for PLC brands: Allen-Bradley, GE Fanuc, Omron, Siemens Development software Operating systems XBT L1001 and XBT L1003 (under Windows 98, 2000 and XP) Magelis Type of terminal XBT N Pages 5/32 XBT HM Consult our “Human/Machine Interfaces” catalogue (1) Depending on model. 0 0 Display of text messages Control and parametering of data 0 Display of text messages and/or semi-graphics Control and parametering of data Compacts terminals Back-lit green, orange and red LCD, height 4.34…17.36 mm Back-lit monochrome matrix LCD (240 x 64 pixels), height 5.3 or 10.6 mm 1 to 4 lines of 5 to 20 characters 4 to 8 lines of 20 to 40 characters Via keypad with 12 keys for function or numeric input (according to the context) + 8 service keys Via keypad with 12 function keys 10 service keys 12 numeric keys 4 soft function keys 512 Kb Flash – 512 Kb Flash EPROM 128/200 application pages 256 alarm pages 800 application pages 256 alarm pages 256 print-out form pages (1) 50 Alphanumeric, bargraph, gauge 40…50 Alphanumeric – – Depending on model Access to the PLC real-time clock No RS 232C/RS 485 Uni-TE, Modbus 5 RS 232C or RS 422/485 Uni-TE, Modbus, AEG and for PLC brands: Allen-Bradley, GE Fanuc, Omron, Siemens RS 232C serial link (1) XBT L1001 and XBT L1003 (under Windows 98, 2000 and XP) Magelis XBT R XBT PM Consult our “Human/Machine Interfaces” catalogue 5/33 Selection guide 0 Human/Machine Interfaces Operator dialogue terminals Magelis® graphic terminals Applications Display of text messages and graphic objects Control and parametering of data Type of unit Graphic terminals Display Type Colour LCD TFT with touch-sensitive screen (320 x 240 pixels) with optimum viewing angle (1) Capacity 5,7” (color) 10,4” (color) Via keypad with: - 10 static function keys - 8 soft function keys - 12 service keys - 12 alphanumeric keys Via touch-sensitive screen Data entry 5 Via keypad with: - 12 static function keys - 10 soft function keys - 12 service keys - 12 alphanumeric keys Memory capacity Application Extension 16 Mb Flash EPROM (via PCMCIA type II card) – Functions Maximum number of pages 50 to 720 application, alarm, help and print-out 30 to 480 application, alarm, help and print-out form pages depending on the memory card form pages depending on the memory card used (512 alarms maximum) used (512 alarms maximum) 64 Alphanumeric, bitmap, bargraph, gauge, potentiometer, selector 125 records maximum with 5000 values maximum 16 Yes Access to the PLC real-time clock 1 alarm relay – Variables per page Representation of variables Recipes Curves Alarm logs Real-time clock Discrete inputs/outputs Multimedia inputs/outputs Communication Downloadable protocols Asynchronous serial link Uni-TE, Modbus, KS and for PLC brands: Uni-TE, Modbus, KS, Modbus TCP/IP, Uni-TE GE Fanuc, Omron, Allen-Bradley and Siemens TCP/IP (1) and for PLC brands: GE Fanuc, Omron, Allen-Bradley and Siemens RS 232C or RS 422/485 USB Ports – Bus and networks Modbus Plus, Fipio/Fipway avec carte additive PCMCIA type III (1), – Ethernet TCP/IP (10BASE-T/100BASE-TX) (1) Printer link RS 232C serial link (1) Development software XBT L1003 (under Windows 98, Windows 2000 and Windows XP) Operating systems Magelis Type of terminal XBT F01 Pages 5/34 XBT F02/F03 Consult our “Human/Machine Interfaces” catalogue (1) Depending on model. (2) Uni-TE version V2 for Twido/TSX Micro/Premium PLCs. 0 0 0 Display of text messages and graphic objects Control and parametering of data New Technology touch-sensitive graphic terminals Back-lit monochrome (amber or red mode) LCD STN (320 x 240 pixels) 3,8” (monochrome) Back-lit monochrome or colour LCD STN or back-lit colour LCD TFT (320 x 240 pixels) 5,7” (monochrome or colour) Back-lit colour LCD STN or color LCD TFT (640 x 480 pixels) Back-lit colour LCD STN or color LCD TFT (640 x 480 pixels) Back-lit colour LCD TFT (800 x 600 pixels) Back-lit colour LCD TFT (1024 x 768 pixels) 7,5” (colour) 10,4” (colour) 12,1” (colour) 15” (colour) Via touch-sensitive screen 6 dynamic function keys Via touch-sensitive screen 8 Mb Flash EPROM – 16 Mb Flash EPROM 32 Mo Flash EPROM By Compact Flash card 128, 256, 512 Mb or 1 Gb (except XBT GT2110 model) Limited by the internal Flash memory capacity Limited by the internal Flash memory capacity or Compact Flash card memory capacity 5 Unrestricted (8000 variables max.) Alphanumeric, bitmap, bargraph, gauge, tank, curves, polygons, button, light 32 groups of 64 recipes of 1024 ingredients max. Yes, with log Yes Built-in – 1 input (reset) et 3 outputs (alarm, buzzer, run) – 1 audio input (microphone), 1 composite vidéo input (numerical or analog camera), 1 audio input (loudspeaker) (1) Uni-TE (2), Modbus, Modbus TCP/IP (1) and for PLC brands: Mitsubishi, Omron, Allen-Bradley and Siemens RS 232C/485 (COM1) RS 232C/RS 422/485 (COM1) and RS 485 (COM2) – 1 (application download) – Ethernet TCP/IP (10BASE-T) (1) – 2 (application download and peripherals) Ethernet TCP/IP (10BASE-T/100BASE-TX) (1) RS 232C serial link (COM1), USB port for parallel printer Vijeo Designer VJD ppD TGS V44M (under Windows 2000 and Windows XP) Magelis (CPU 100 MHz RISC) Magelis (CPU 133 MHz RISC) Magelis (CPU 266 MHz RISC) XBT GT11 XBT GT21/22/23 XBT GT42/43 XBT GT52/53 XBT GT63 XBT GT73 Consult our “Human/Machine Interfaces” catalogue 5/35 Selection guide Human/Machine Interfaces Magelis iPC industrial PCs ® Applications “All in One” compact products Model 15” screen XGA (1024 x 768) Data entry via keyboard Data entry via keyboard and touch screen Data entry via touch screen 12” screen XGA (1024 x 768) 12” screen SVGA (800 x 600) p Data entry via touch screen p Pages 43632/7 Model Smart iPC 5 Control box Pages 5/36 Processor Intel Celeron M 600 MHz VIA 667 MHz Storage 1 GB Compact Flash RAM 256 MB expandable up to 1024 MB CD-ROM drive – Floppy disk drive – Slots available for expansion 1 x PCMCIA slot 1 x type III/type I 1 x PCMCIA slot 1 x type III or 2 x type I Ethernet TCP/IP Network 2 x 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX (RJ45) 1 x 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX (RJ45) I/O ports 4 x USB + 1 x USB on front panel, 1 x RS232 2 x USB, 1 x COM1, 1 x COM2, 1 x parallel 1 x PS2 keyboard, 1 x PS2 pointing device Operating system Windows Embedded XPe SP2 Pre-installed application or software package Web edition or HMI edition - Vijeo Designer Run-Time Power supply a 100...240 V c 24 V Type of PC or Control box MPC ST2 1NAJ 10p MPC ST5 2NDJ 10p 256 MB expandable up to 512 MB Consult our “Human/Machine Interfaces” catalogue 0 0 “All in One” compact products Modular products (Control box to be connected to a front panel or used as a stand-alone device) (1) Front panel MPC NA5 0NNN 20N MPC NB5 0NNN 20N p MPC NT5 0NNN 20N p 43634/6 43631/7 5 Compact iPC Control box 102 Intel Celeron M 1.3 GHz VIA 667 MHz or Pentium 4 M 1.7 GHz Intel Celeron M 1.3 GHz or Intel Pentium M 1.6 GHz Hard disk u 40 GB Hard disk u 20 GB Hard disk u 40 GB, removable Control box 402 512 MB expandable up to 1024 MB 256 or 512 MB depend. on model 512 MB expandable up to 2 GB – Yes Yes, removable. Combined DVD-R/CD-RW drive available as an option. – Yes Yes 1 x PCI bus slot 1 x PCMCIA slot 1 x type III/type I 1 x PCI bus slot 1 x PCMCIA slot 1 x type III or 2 x type II 1 x PCI bus slot and 2 x type 1/2 (or 1 x type III) PCMCIA slots 2 x 10BASE-T/100 BASE-TX (RJ45) 1 x 10BASE-T/100 BASE-TX (RJ45) 1 x 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX (RJ45) 4 x USB + 1 x USB on front panel 1 x RS232 2 x USB, 1 COM1, 1 x COM2, 1 x parallel 2 x PS2 2 x USB, 1 x COM1, 1 x COM4 and 1 x parallel, 1 x VGA external video port, 1 x PS/2 port (2) 4 x PCI bus slots and 2 x type 1/2 (or 1 x type III) PCMCIA slots Windows 2000 or Windows XP Pro Windows XP Pro or Windows 2000 operating system pre-installed Vijeo Designer Run-Time Package A: Vijeo Look Run-Time a 100...240 V a 115…230 V or c 24 V depending on the model MPC KT2 2NAp 00p MPC KT5 pNAp 00p MPC EN0 pNpp 00N Package A: Vijeo Look Run-Time or Package B: Vijeo Look Build-Time MPC DN0 pNpp 00N Consult our “Human/Machine Interfaces” catalogue (1) To use a Control box without a front panel screen, you will require the mounting panel MPC NP0 0NNN 00NN. (2) Port not operational when the Control box is fitted with the front panel screen. 5/37 Selection guide 0 Human/Machine Interfaces HMI software and Web servers Applications Traditional architecture, HMI executed on dedicated terminal or PC platform Configuration software for user interface applications Target products Functions 5 Development of graphics applications Type Operating system on terminals Magelis XBT N/R Magelis XBT H/P/E/HM/PM Magelis XBT F/FC (1) Proprietary Magelis operating system Reading/writing of PLC variables Display of variables Data processing Yes Yes – Sharing of variables between HMI applications Saving of variables to external database – Native library of graphic objects Container Active X Java Beans Curves and alarms Yes – – Yes, with XBT F/FC terminal + alarms via diagnostic buffer (2) – Scripts Magelis XBT G (1) Magelis XBT GT Yes, with Java programming – Yes Yes, with log Java Online modification of applications – Communication between PLCs and HMI application Via I/O drivers Uploading of applications Yes Simulation of HMI applications Yes Redundancy – Recipe management Yes – Report printing Form, historical data and alarm pages On the fly alarms, historical data Access security Linked to user profiles Software compatible with OS Windows 98, 2000 or Windows XP Windows 2000 or Windows XP Type of software XBT L1000 Vijeo Designer Pages 5/38 – Consult our “Human/Machine Interfaces” catalogue (1) Magelis XBT terminals behave transparently on restoration of power. 0 0 0 Web architecture, embedded HMI in PLC SCADA supervisory software Ethernet TCP/IP modules with embedded Web server Magelis Compact iPC industrial PCs Magelis Modular iPC industrial PCs PC micro-computers Servers Microsoft Windows TSX Micro TSX ETZ Premium TSX ETY Quantum 140 NOE 771 FactoryCast Gateway TSX ETG 10p0 Premium TSX WMY 100 Quantum 140 NWM 100 00 Yes – Yes Yes Client/server architecture Yes – Yes – – Yes Alarms via diagnostic buffer (2) C compiler integrated – Yes – Via OFS data server Via internal bus on Premium/Quantum platforms – Yes + E-mail transmission triggered by event 5 Yes Yes – Yes Yes – Yes – All information in the real-time database – Windows XP, Servers Windows 98/2000/NT, Windows XP Windows 2000 or Windows XP Vijeo Citect FactoryCast FactoryCast HMI Consult our “Human/Machine Interfaces” catalogue (2) Specific memory area with Modicon Premium (with PL7 or Unity Pro software) and Quantum (with Unity Pro software) PLC platforms. 5/39 6 6/0 0 Contents 6 - Services 1 Technical information b Standards, certifications, and environmental conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6/2 b Automation product certifications and community regulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6/6 b Power consumption table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6/8 Index b Product reference index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6/9 6 6/1 Modicon® M340™ Automation Platform Standards and certifications Standards, certifications and environmental conditions Standards and certifications Modicon M340 PLCs have been developed to conform to the principal national and international standards concerning electronic equipment for industrial automation systems. b Requirements specific to programmable controllers: functional characteristics, immunity, resistance, safety, etc.: IEC/EN 61131-2, CSA 22.2 N° 142, UL 508. b Merchant navy requirements of the main international bodies (with ABS, BV, DNV, GL, LR, RINA, RMRS): IACS (International Association of Classification Societies) b Compliance with European Directives: v Low Voltage: 73/23/EEC amendment 93/68/EEC, v Electromagnetic Compatibility: 89/336/EEC amendments 92/31/EEC and 93/68/EEC. b Electrical qualities and self-extinguishing capacity of insulating materials: UL 746C, UL 94. b Hazardous areas classification: CSA 22.2 No. 213, Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C and D. Characteristics Service conditions and recommendations relating to environment Temperature Operation °C 0...+ 60 °C - 40...+ 85 Storage Relative humidity Operation % 93…95 without condensation according to IEC/EN 60060-2-30 Db Storage % 93…95 without condensation according to IEC/EN 60060-2-30 Db m 0…4000, Altitude temperature derating above 3000 m: 1 °C / 400 m, equals + 55 °C at 4000 m Supply voltage a: according to IEC/EN 61131-2 Nominal voltage Limit voltages c: according to IACS E10 Nominal frequencies battery without charge Limit frequencies V Hz Hz BMX CPS 2010 24 c 18...31.2 c – – BMX CPS 3020 24...48 c 18...62.4 c – – BMX CPS 2000 100...240 a 85...264 a 50/60 47/63 BMX CPS 3500 100...240 a 85...264 a 50/60 47/63 Protective treatment of Modicon® M340™ PLCs 6 Modicon M340 PLCs meet the requirements of “TC” treatment (Treatment for all Climates). For installations in industrial production workshops or environments corresponding to “TH” treatment (treatment for hot and humid environments), Modicon M340 PLCs must be embedded in envelopes with a minimum IP 54 protection, in compliance with IEC/EN 60664 and NF C 20 040. Modicon M340 PLCs themselves offer protection to IP 20 level and protection against pins (enclosed equipment) (1). They can therefore be installed without an envelope in reserved-access areas which do not exceed pollution level 2 (control room with no dust-producing machine or activity). The pollution level 2 does not take account of more severe environmental conditions: air pollution by dust, smoke, corrosive or radioactive particles, vapors or salts, attack by fungi, insects, ... (1) In the case where a position is not occupied by a module, a BMX XEM 010 protection cover must be installed. 6/2 0 Environment tests Modicon® M340™ Automation Platform 0 Standards, certifications and environmental conditions Environment tests Immunity to LF interference (e) (1) Name of test Voltage and frequency variation Direct voltage variation Harmonic 3 Inter harmonic Short momentary interrupt Voltage shut-down/start-up Standards IEC/EN 61000-4-11 IACS E10 / IEC 60092-504 IEC/EN 61131-2 IEC/EN 61000-4-11 IEC 60092-504 IACS E10 (battery without charge) IEC/EN 61131-2 IACS E10 / IEC 60092-504 IEC/EN 61131-2 IEC/EN 61000-4-11/-6-2 IEC/EN 61131-2 Levels 0.9 Un/0.95 Fn for 30 minutes; 1.10 Un/1.05 Fn for 30 minutes; 0.8 Un/0.9 Fn for 1,5/5 seconds; 1.2 Un/1.1 Fn for 1,5/5 seconds 0.85 Un...1.2 Un for 30 minutes with 5% ripple (peak values) 10% Un; 0° for 5 min...180° for 5 min H2...H200 - 10% (H15), - 10%...1% (H15...H100) and 1% (H100...H200) 10 ms with a supply; 1 ms with c supply Un-0-Un; Un for 60 s; 3 cycles separated by 10 s Un-0-Un; Un for 5 s; 3 cycles separated by 1 to 5 s Un-0.9-Udl; Un for 60 s; 3 cycles separated by 1 to 5 s Where: Un: nominal voltage Fn: nominal frequency Udl: detection level when powered Immunity to HF interference. (e) (1) Name of test Damped oscillatory wave Standards IEC/EN 61000-4-12 IEC/EN 61131-2 Zone C Electrical fast transient bursts IEC/EN 61000-4-4 IEC 61131-2 / IACS E10 Surge IEC/EN 61000-4-5 IEC/EN 61131-2 Zone B IACS E10 Electrostatic discharges IEC/EN 61000-4-2 IEC/EN 61131-2 Zone B IACS E10 IEC/EN 61000-4-3 Radiated electromagnetic field Conducted interference induced IEC/EN 61000-4-6 by radiated field IEC/EN 61131-2 IACS E10 Levels a / c main supply, a auxiliary supply, discrete a I/O (unshielded): 2.5 kV in common mode, 1 kV in differential mode c auxiliary supply, discrete a I/O (unshielded) and analog I/O: 1 kV in common mode, 0.5 kV in differential mode All shielded cable: 0.5 kV in common mode a / c main and auxiliary supplies, discrete a I/O (unshielded): 2 kV in wire mode, 2 kV in common mode Discrete c I/O (unshielded), analog I/O and all shielded cable: 1 kV in common mode a / c main and auxiliary supplies, discrete a I/O (unshielded): 2 kV in common mode, 1 kV in differential mode Discrete a I/O (unshielded) and analog I/O: 0.5 kV in common mode, 0.5 kV in differential mode All shielded cable: 1 kV in common mode 6 kV contact, 8 kV air 6 15 V/m : 80 MHz...2 GHz Sinusoidal modulation amplitude 80% / 1 kHz + internal clock frequency 10 V : 0,15 MHz...80 MHz Sinusoidal modulation amplitude 80% / 1 kHz + spot frequency Electromagnetic emissions (e) (1) (2) Name of test Interference voltage Interference field Standards EN 55011, Class A IEC/EN 61131-2 IEC/EN 61000-6-4 FCC part 15 IACS E10 EN 55011, Class A IEC/EN 61131-2 IEC/EN 61000-6-4 FCC part 15 Levels 150 kHz...500 kHz: quasi-peak 79 dB (µV); average 66 dB (µV) 500 kHz...30 MHz: quasi-peak 73 dB (µV); average 60 dB (µV) IACS E10 Values depending on general power distribution zone Values according general power distribution zone 30 MHz...230 MHz: quasi-peak 40 dB (measurement at 10 m), quasi-peak 50 dB (measurement at 3 m) 230 MHz...2 GHz: quasi-peak 47 dB (measurement at 10 m), quasi-peak 57 dB (measurement at 3 m) (1) Devices must be installed and wired in compliance with the instructions provided in the manual “Grounding and Electromagnetic Compatibility of PLC Systems”, pdf format on CD-Rom support included in Unity Pro software packages or on DVD UNY USE 909 CD M reference (see page 4/31). (2) These tests are performed without a cabinet, with devices fixed on a metal grid and wired as per the recommendations in the manual “Grounding and Electromagnetic Compatibility of PLC Systems”. (e): tests required by European directives e. and based on IEC / EN 61131-2 standards. 6/3 Environment tests (continued) Modicon® M340™ Automation Platform Standards, certifications and environmental conditions Environment tests (continued) Immunity to climatic variations Name of test Dry heat Standards IEC/EN 60068-2-2 Bd IACS E10 Levels 60 °C for 16 hours Cold IEC/EN 60068-2-1 Ab & Ad IACS E10 0 °C for 16 hours with start at 0 °C Continuous humid heat IEC/EN 60068-2-78 Ca 60 °C with 93% relative humidity for 96 hours Cyclical humid heat IEC/EN 60068-2-30 Db 55 °C; 25 °C with 93...95% relative humidity with 2 cycles of 12 hours/12 hours Cyclical temperature variations IEC/EN 60068-2-14 Na & Nb 0...60 °C with 5 cycles of 3 hours/3 hours IEC/EN 61131-2 Withstand to climatic variations Name of test Dry heat (power off) Standards IEC/EN 60068-2-2 Bb & Bd Levels 85 °C for 96 hours Cold (power off) IEC/EN 60068-2-1 Ab & Ad IEC/EN 60068-2-48 - 40 °C for 96 hours Humid heat (power off) IEC/EN 60068-2-30 dB 25...60 °C with 93...95% relative humidity with 2 cycles of 12 hours/12 hours Heat shocks (power off) IEC/EN 60068-2-14 Na & Nb - 40...85 °C with 2 cycles of 3 hours/3 hours . 6 6/4 0 Environment tests (continued) Modicon® M340™ Automation Platform 0 Standards, certifications and environmental conditions Environment tests (continued) Immunity to mechanical constraints (1) (power on) Name of test Sinusoidal vibrations Standards IEC/EN 60068-2-6 Fc IACS E10 Sinusoidal vibrations (Class 3M7) Shocks IEC/EN 60068-2-6 Fc IEC/EN 61131-2 Specific profile IEC/EN 60068-2-27 Ea Bumps IEC/EN 60068-2-29 Eb Plugging / unplugging IEC/EN 61131-2 Levels 3 Hz...100 Hz/1 mm amplitude / 0.7 g, transition frequency 13.2 Hz Endurance to resonance frequency 90 min/axis Application coefficient < 10 5...150 Hz with 10 mm amplitude / 3 g, transition frequency 9 Hz Endurance: 10 cycles of 1 octave/min 30 g - 11 ms; 3 shocks/direction/axis (2) 25 g - 6 ms; 100 bumps/direction/axis (3) For modules and connectors 50 operations for permanent connections 500 operations for non-permanent connections Withstand to mechanical constraints (power off) Name of test Flat free-fall Controlled position free-fall (for handheld product) Random free-fall (equipment in packaging) Vibrations, transports (Class 2M3) Standards IEC/EN 60068-2-32 Ed method 1 IEC/EN 61131-2 IEC/EN 60068-2-31 Ec IEC/EN 61131-2 IEC/EN 60068-2-32 method 1 IEC/EN 61131-2 IEC/EN 60721-4-2 IEC/EN 60068-2-64 Fh Levels 10 cm / 2 falls 30 ° or 10 cm / 2 falls 1 m / 5 falls Stationary vibrations, random: 5 m2/s3 from 10…100 Hz, 7 dB/octave from 100…200 Hz, 1 m2/s3 de 200…2000 Hz, 30 min duration Equipment and personnel reference information (1) (e) Name of test Dielectric strength Insulation resistance Continuity of earth ground Leakage current Standards UL 508/CSA 22-2 No.142 / FM IEC/EN 61131-2 UL 508/CSA 22-2 No.142 / FM IEC/EN 61131-2 UL 508/CSA 22-2 No.142 / FM IEC/EN 61131-2 IEC/EN 61131-2 Levels 2 Un + 1000 V / 1 min Un y 50 V: 10 MΩ 50 V y Un y 250 V: 10 MΩ 30 A for 2 min, R < 0,1 Ω Protection offered by enclosures IEC/EN 61131-2 IP 20 and protection Withstand to impacts UL 508/CSA 22-2 No.142 / FM IEC/EN 61131-2 IEC/EN 61131-2 500 g sphere: fall from 1.3 m UL 508/CSA 22-2 No.142 / FM IEC/EN 61131-2 UL 508/CSA 22-2 No.142 / FM IEC/EN 61131-2 IEC/EN 61131-2/UL 508 CSA 22-2 No.142/UL 1604 CSA 22-2 No.213 / FM 50 cycles 1 s / 9 s to Un and 1.5 In Stored energy injury risk Overload Endurance Temperature rise 6 I < 3.5 mA after disconnecting After 10 s, max. 37 % Un 12 cycles 100 ms / 100ms, 988 cycles 1 s / 1 s and 5000 cycles 1 s / 9 s to Un and In Ambient temperature 60 °C (1) Devices must be installed, wired and maintained in compliance with the instructions provided in the users manual. (2) In case of using fast actuators (response time y 15ms) driven by relay outputs: 15 g - 11 ms; 3 shocks/direction/axis\ (3) In case of using fast actuators (response time y 15ms) driven by relay outputs: 15 g - 6 ms; 100 bumps/direction/axis. (e): tests required by European directives (e), and based on IEC / EN 61131-2 standards. 6/5 Technical information 0 Automation products certifications In some countries, certification of certain electrical components is enforced by law. A standard conformity certificate is then issued by the official organization. Each certified product must carry approval symbols when enforced. Use aboard merchant navy vessels generally requires prior approval (= certification) of an electrical device by certain marine classification authorities. Key CSA C-Tick GOST UL Key IACS ABS BV DNV GL LR RINA RMRS Certification body Canadian Standards Association Australian Communication Authority Gost Standard Scientific Research Institute Underwriters Laboratories Classification authority International Association of Classification Societies American Bureau of Shipping Bureau Veritas Det Norske Veritas Germanischer Lloyd Lloyd’s Register Registro Italiano Navale Russian Maritime Register of Shipping Country Canada Australia C.I.S., Russia USA Country International USA France Norway Germany United Kingdom Italy C.I.S. The table below shows the situation as at 01.10.2006 for certifications obtained or pending from organizations for base PLCs. An overview of certificates for Telemecanique products is available on our Internet website: www.telemecanique.com Product certifications Approvals C-Tick Certified Pending certification Advantys STB Advantys Telefast ABE 7 ConneXium Magelis iPC Magelis XBT GT Magelis XBT F/FC/HM/PM Magelis XBT N/R Modicon M340 Modicon Momentum Modicon Premium Modicon Quantum Modicon TSX Micro Twido 6 Hazardous locations Class I, Div 2 (1) UL USA CSA Canada GOST CIS, Russia ATEX USA, Canada Europe FM (2) UL (3) Cat 3 G-D CSA/UL CSA (2) (2) Cat 3 G-D CSA FM (2) (3) (2) UL (2) (1) Hazardous locations: UL 1604, CSA 22.2 no. 213 or FM 3611, certified products are acceptable for use in hazardous locations of Class I, division 2, groups A, B, C and D or unclassified only. (2) Depending on product, consult our website: www.telemecanique.com (3) cULus North American certification (Canada and USA). Local certifications BG Germany SIMTARS Australia AS-Interface Europe 6/6 AC A Australia TSX DPZ 10D2A safety module (TSX Micro). TSX PAY 262/282 safety modules (Premium). Modicon TSX Micro automation platform Modicon Premium automation platform (PL7) TWD NOI 10M3 master module (Twido). TSX SAZ 10 master module (TSX Micro). TSX SAY 1000 master modules (Premium). Technical information 0 Automation products certifications Community regulations Marine classification Marine classification authorities Certified Pending certification Advantys STB Advantys Telefast ABE 7 ConneXium Magelis iPC Magelis XBT GT Magelis XBT F/FC/HM/PM Magelis XBT N/R Modicon M340 Modicon Momentum Modicon Premium (4) Modicon Quantum Modicon TSX Micro Twido ABS BV DNV GL LR RINA RMRS USA France Norway Germany UK Italy C.I.S. (2) (2) (2) (2) (1) (2) (3) (2) (2) (2) (2) (2) (2) (2) (2) (1) Also meets US Navy requirements, ABS-NRV part 4. (2) Depending on product, consult our website: www.telemecanique.com. (3) Request for Marine certifications forecast 1st quarter of 2007. (4) Modicon Premium, also KRS (Korean register of Shipping) certified. Community regulations European directives The opening of European markets implies a harmonization of regulations in the various European Union member states. European Directives are documents used to remove obstacles to the free movement of goods, and their application is compulsory in all states of the European Union. Member states must transcribe each Directive into their national legislation and, at the same time, withdraw any conflicting regulations. The Directives, particularly those of a technical nature, only set objectives, called “general requirements”. Manufacturers must take all necessary measures to ensure that their products conform to the requirements of each Directive relating to their equipment. As a general rule, manufacturers affirms that their products conform to the necessary requirements of the Directive(s) by applying the e label to their product. The e marking is applied to Telemecanique products where relevant. The significance of e marking ■ The e marking on a product means that the manufacturer certifies that its product conforms to the relevant European Directives; it is necessary so that a product which is subject to any Directive(s) can be marketed and freely moved within the European Union. ■ The e marking is intended solely for the national authorities responsible for market regulation. For electrical equipment, conformity of the product to standards indicates that it is suitable for use. Only the guarantee of a recognized manufacturer provides an assurance of high quality. One or more Directives, as appropriate, may apply to our products, in particular: ■ The Low Voltage Directive 72/23/EEC amended by Directive 93/68/EEC: The e marking under the terms of this Directive is compulsory as of January 1, 1997. ■ The Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive 89/336/EEC, amended by Directives 92/31/EEC and 93/68/EEC: The e marking on the products covered by this Directive has been compulsory since January 1, 1996. ■ Directive e ATEX 94/9/EC. 6/7 6 Choice of BMX CPS ppp0 power supply modules Modicon® M340™ Automation Platform 0 Power consumption table The power required to supply each BMX XBP pp00 rack depends on the type and number of modules installed. It is therefore necessary to create a power consumption table for each rack to define the most suitable BMX CPS ppp0 power supply module for each rack. The table below can be used to calculate the consumption on the 2 or 3 different voltages (depending on model) to be supplied by the BMX CPS ppp0 power supply module: 3,3 V c , 24 V c rack, 24 V c sensors. Procedure: b Ensure that the power supply module corresponds to the power supplies available for the two or three voltages. b Ensure that the total power absorbed on these three voltages does not exceed the overall power of the power supply module. b Values to be entered according to the type of Modicon M340 configuration. Module reference Rack n° Format S : standard D : double Number Consumption in mA (1) Voltage Voltage 3,3 V c 24 V rack Module Total Module BMXP341000 BMXP342010 BMXP342020 BMXP342030 S S S S BMXDAI1602 BMXDAI1603 BMXDAI1604 BMXDAO1605 BMXDDI1602 BMXDDI1603 BMXDDI3202K BMXDDI6402K BMXDDM16022 BMXDDM16025 BMXDDM3202K BMXDDO1602 BMXDDO1612 BMXDDO3202K BMXDDO6402K BMXDRA0805 BMXDRA1605 S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S 90 90 90 100 90 90 140 200 100 100 150 100 100 150 240 100 100 Analog I/O BMXAMI0410 BMXAMM0600 BMXAMO0210 BMXART0414 BMXART0814 S S S S S 150 150 150 150 150 45 130 110 40 100 Counting BMXEHC0200 BMXEHC0800 S S 200 200 40 Communication BMXNOE0100 BMXNOE0110 S S Processors Discrete I/O 6 Consumption per voltage Voltage 24 V c sensors Total 60 110 110 30 30 55 50 55 95 80 80 90 90 Total current (mA) x 3,3 V x 24 V + D D D D (1) Typical value given for 100% of inputs or outputs at state 1. 6/8 24 V c isolated 24...48 V c isolated 100...240 V a 8250 14850 8250 14850 x 24 V + Power available (mW) BMXCPS2010 BMXCPS3020 BMXCPS2000 BMXCPS3500 Total 72 90 95 135 1 Consumption voltage (mW) Choice of power supply Module = Power overall (mW) 16 800 31 200 16 800 31 200 10 800 21 600 17 000 32 000 20 000 36 000 6 6/9 Product reference index CHAPTER 1 BMXCPS2000. . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 BMXCPS2010 . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 BMXCPS3020 . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 BMXCPS3500 . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 BMXP341000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 BMXP342010 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 BMXP342020 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 BMXP342030 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 BMXRMS008MP . . . . . . . . . . . 9 BMXRMS008MPF . . . . . . . . . . 9 BMXXB0600 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 BMXXBP0400 . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 BMXXBP0800 . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 BMXXBP1200 . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 BMXXCAUSBH018 . . . . . . . . . 9 BMXXCAUSBH045 . . . . . . . . . 9 BMXXEM010 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 BMXXSP0400 . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 BMXXSP0600 . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 BMXXSP0800 . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 BMXXSP1200 . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 BMXXTSCPS10 . . . . . . . . . . . 13 BMXXTSCPS20 . . . . . . . . . . . 13 CHAPTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 STBXSP3010 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 STBXSP3020 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 6 CHAPTER 2 BMXDDI1602 . . . . . . . . . . . . . BMXDDI3202K . . . . . . . . . . . BMXDDI6402K . . . . . . . . . . . BMXDAI1602 . . . . . . . . . . . . . BMXDDI1603 . . . . . . . . . . . . BMXDAI1602 . . . . . . . . . . . . . BMXDAI1603 . . . . . . . . . . . . . BMXDAI1604 . . . . . . . . . . . . . BMXDDO1602 . . . . . . . . . . . . BMXDDO1612 . . . . . . . . . . . BMXDDO3202K . . . . . . . . . . . BMXDDO6402K . . . . . . . . . . . BMXDAO1605 . . . . . . . . . . . . BMXDRA0805 . . . . . . . . . . . . BMXDRA1605 . . . . . . . . . . . . BMXDDM16022 . . . . . . . . . . . BMXDDM16025 . . . . . . . . . . . BMXDDM3202K . . . . . . . . . . BMXFTB2000 . . . . . . . . . . . . BMXFTB2010 . . . . . . . . . . . . BMXFTB2020 . . . . . . . . . . . . BMXFTW301 . . . . . . . . . . . . . BMXFTW501 . . . . . . . . . . . . . BMXFTW1001 . . . . . . . . . . . . BMXFCW301 . . . . . . . . . . . . . BMXFCW501 . . . . . . . . . . . . . BMXFCW1001 . . . . . . . . . . . . BMXFCW303 . . . . . . . . . . . . . BMXFCW503 . . . . . . . . . . . . . BMXFCW1003 . . . . . . . . . . . . BMXFCC051 . . . . . . . . . . . . . BMXFCC101 . . . . . . . . . . . . . BMXFCC201 . . . . . . . . . . . . . BMXFCC301 . . . . . . . . . . . . . BMXFCC501 . . . . . . . . . . . . . BMXFCC1001 . . . . . . . . . . . . BMXFCC053 . . . . . . . . . . . . . BMXFCC103 . . . . . . . . . . . . . BMXFCC203 . . . . . . . . . . . . . BMXFCC303 . . . . . . . . . . . . . BMXFCC503 . . . . . . . . . . . . . BMXFCC1003 . . . . . . . . . . . . BMXAMI0410 . . . . . . . . . . . . . BMXART0414 . . . . . . . . . . . . BMXART0814 . . . . . . . . . . . . BMXAMO0210 . . . . . . . . . . . . BMXAMM0600 . . . . . . . . . . . . BMXFTB2000 . . . . . . . . . . . . BMXFTB2010 . . . . . . . . . . . . BMXFTB2020 . . . . . . . . . . . . BMXFTW301S . . . . . . . . . . . . BMXFTW501S . . . . . . . . . . . . BMXFCW301S . . . . . . . . . . . BMXFCW501S . . . . . . . . . . . ABE7CPA410 . . . . . . . . . . . . ABE7CPA412 . . . . . . . . . . . . BMXFCA150 . . . . . . . . . . . . . BMXFCA300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . BMXFCA500 . . . . . . . . . . . . . BMXFCA152 . . . . . . . . . . . . . BMXFCA302 . . . . . . . . . . . . . BMXFCA502 . . . . . . . . . . . . . BMXEHC0200 . . . . . . . . . . . . BMXEHC0800 . . . . . . . . . . . . BMXXTSHSC20 . . . . . . . . . . BMXFTB2000 . . . . . . . . . . . . BMXFTB2010 . . . . . . . . . . . . BMXFTB2020 . . . . . . . . . . . . CHAPTER 3 6/10 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 41 41 41 41 41 41 0 490NOC00005 . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 490NOR00003 . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 490NOR00005 . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 490NOR00015 . . . . . . . . . . . 26 490NOT00005 . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 490NTC00005 . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 490NTC00005U . . . . . . . . . . . 26 490NTC00015 . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 490NTC00015U . . . . . . . . . . . 26 490NTC00040 . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 490NTC00040U . . . . . . . . . . . 26 490NTC00080 . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 490NTC00080U . . . . . . . . . . . 26 490NTW00002 . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 490NTW00002U . . . . . . . . . . . 26 490NTW00005 . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 490NTW00005U . . . . . . . . . . 26 490NTW00012 . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 490NTW00012U . . . . . . . . . . . 26 490NTW00040 . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 490NTW00040U . . . . . . . . . . . 26 490NTW00080 . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 490NTW00080U . . . . . . . . . . . 26 AM02CA001V000 . . . . . . . . . . 43 BMXNOE0100 . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 BMXNOE0110 . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 BMXP341000 . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 BMXP342010 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 BMXP342010 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 BMXP342020 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 BMXP342020 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 BMXP342030 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 BMXP342030 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 FTXBLA10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 FTXC78B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 FTXC78F5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 FTXC78M5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 FTXCM08B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 FTXCM12B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 FTXCN12F5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 FTXCN12M5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 FTXCN3130 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 FTXCN3150 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 FTXCN3203 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 FTXCN3206 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 FTXCN3210 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 FTXCN3220 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 FTXCN3230 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 FTXCN3250 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 FTXCNCT1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 FTXCNTL12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 FTXCY1208 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 FTXCY1212 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 FTXDG12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 FTXDP2115 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 FTXDP2130 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 FTXDP2150 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 FTXDP2206 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 FTXDP2210 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 FTXDP2220 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 FTXDP2250 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 FTXMLA10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 LU9GC3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 TCSCCE4F3M05 . . . . . . . . . . 42 TCSCCE4F3M1 . . . . . . . . . . . 42 TCSCCU4F3M05 . . . . . . . . . . 42 TCSCCU4F3M1 . . . . . . . . . . . 42 TCSCTN011M11F . . . . . . . . . 43 TCSEAAF11F13F00 . . . . . . . . 27 TCSEAAF1LFH00 . . . . . . . . . 27 TCSEAAF1LFS00 . . . . . . . . . 27 TCSEAAF1LFU00 . . . . . . . . . 27 TCSEAM0100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 TCSEC1M3M1S2 . . . . . . . . . . 27 TCSECL1M1M10S2 . . . . . . . . 27 TCSECL1M1M1S2 . . . . . . . . . 27 TCSECL1M1M1X5S2 . . . . . . . 27 TCSECL1M1M25S2 . . . . . . . . 27 TCSECL1M1M3S2 . . . . . . . . . 27 TCSECL1M1M40S2 . . . . . . . . 27 TCSECL1M1M5S2 . . . . . . . . . 27 TCSECL1M3M10S2 . . . . . . . . 27 TCSECL1M3M1X5S2 . . . . . . . 27 TCSECL1M3M25S2 . . . . . . . . 27 TCSECL1M3M3S2 . . . . . . . . . 27 TCSECL1M3M40S2 . . . . . . . . 27 TCSECL1M3M5S2 . . . . . . . . . 27 TCSMCN3M4F3C2 . . . . . . . . 47 TCSMCN3M4M3S2 . . . . . . . . 47 TLACDCBA005 . . . . . . . . . . . 42 TLACDCBA015 . . . . . . . . . . . 42 TLACDCBA030 . . . . . . . . . . . 42 TLACDCBA050 . . . . . . . . . . . 42 TSXCANCA100 . . . . . . . . . . . 42 TSXCANCA300 . . . . . . . . . . . 42 TSXCANCA50 . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 TSXCANCADD03 . . . . . . . . . . 42 TSXCANCADD1 . . . . . . . . . . . 42 TSXCANCADD3 . . . . . . . . . . . 42 TSXCANCADD5 . . . . . . . . . . .42 TSXCANCB100 . . . . . . . . . . . .42 TSXCANCB300 . . . . . . . . . . . .42 TSXCANCB50 . . . . . . . . . . . . .42 TSXCANCBDD03 . . . . . . . . . .42 TSXCANCBDD1 . . . . . . . . . . .42 TSXCANCBDD3 . . . . . . . . . . .42 TSXCANCBDD5 . . . . . . . . . . .42 TSXCANCD100 . . . . . . . . . . . .42 TSXCANCD300 . . . . . . . . . . . .42 TSXCANCD50 . . . . . . . . . . . . .42 TSXCANKCDF180T . . . . . . . .42 TSXCANKCDF90T . . . . . . . . .42 TSXCANKCDF90TP . . . . . . . .42 TSXCANTDM4 . . . . . . . . . . . .42 TSXCSA100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47 TSXCSA200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47 TSXCSA500 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47 TSXSCA50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46 TSXSCA62 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46 TSXSCPCM4530 . . . . . . . . . .47 TWDXCAISO . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46 TWDXCARJ003 . . . . . . . . . . .47 TWDXCARJ010 . . . . . . . . . . .47 TWDXCARJ030 . . . . . . . . . . .47 TWDXCAT3RJ . . . . . . . . . . . .46 VW3 A8114 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46 VW3A8306 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47 VW3A8306D30 . . . . . . . . . . . .47 VW3A8306R03 . . . . . . . . . . . .47 VW3A8306R10 . . . . . . . . . . . .47 VW3A8306R30 . . . . . . . . . . . .47 VW3A8306R30 . . . . . . . . . . . .47 VW3A8306RC . . . . . . . . . . . . .46 VW3A8306TF03 . . . . . . . . . . .46 VW3A8306TF10 . . . . . . . . . . .46 VW3CANA71 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 VW3CANCARR03 . . . . . . . . . .43 VW3CANCARR1 . . . . . . . . . . .43 VW3CANKCDF180T . . . . . . . .43 VW3CANTAP2 . . . . . . . . . . . .42 XBTZ938 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47 XGSZ24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46 XZCC12FCM50B . . . . . . . . . .27 XZCC12FCM50B . . . . . . . . . .43 XZCC12FDM50B . . . . . . . . . .27 XZCC12FDM50B . . . . . . . . . .43 XZCC12MCM50B . . . . . . . . . .43 XZCC12MDM50B . . . . . . . . . .43 XZCP1164L2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27 XZCP1164L5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27 XZCP1264L2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27 XZCP1264L5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27 CHAPTER 4 110XCA28201 . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 110XCA28202 . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 110XCA28203 . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 990NAA26320 . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 990NAA26350 . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 BMXXCAUSBH018 . . . . . . . . .31 BMXXCAUSBH045 . . . . . . . . .31 TSXCRJMD25 . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 TSXCUSB485 . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 TSXPCX1031 . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 UNYSDUDFUCD20 . . . . . . . . .39 UNYSDUMFFCD20 . . . . . . . . .37 UNYSDUMFTCD20 . . . . . . . . .37 UNYSDUMFUCD20 . . . . . . . .37 UNYSMUZUCD30 . . . . . . . . . .39 UNYSPUEFFCD30 . . . . . . . . .30 UNYSPUEFGCD30 . . . . . . . . .30 UNYSPUEFTCD30 . . . . . . . . .30 UNYSPUEFUCD30 . . . . . . . . .30 UNYSPUEZFCD30 . . . . . . . . .30 UNYSPUEZGCD30 . . . . . . . . .30 UNYSPUEZTCD30 . . . . . . . . .30 UNYSPUEZUCD30 . . . . . . . . .30 UNYSPULFFCD30 . . . . . . . . .30 UNYSPULFGCD30 . . . . . . . . .30 UNYSPULFTCD30 . . . . . . . . .30 UNYSPULFUCD30 . . . . . . . . .30 UNYSPULZFCD30 . . . . . . . . .30 UNYSPULZGCD30 . . . . . . . . .30 UNYSPULZTCD30 . . . . . . . . .30 UNYSPULZUCD30 . . . . . . . . .30 UNYSPUMFGCD30 . . . . . . . .30 UNYSPUMFTCD30 . . . . . . . . .30 UNYSPUMFUCD30 . . . . . . . .30 UNYSPUMZGCD30 . . . . . . . .30 UNYSPUMZTCD30 . . . . . . . . .30 UNYSPUMZUCD30 . . . . . . . .30 UNYSPUSFGCD30 . . . . . . . . .30 UNYSPUSFTCD30 . . . . . . . . .30 UNYSPUSFUCD30 . . . . . . . . .30 UNYSPUSZGCD30 . . . . . . . . .30 UNYSPUSZTCD30 . . . . . . . . .30 UNYSPUSZUCD30 . . . . . . . . .30 UNYSPUZFUCD30E . . . . . . . .33 UNYUDEVFUCD21E . . . . . . . 30 UNYUSE909CDM . . . . . . . . . 31 UNYXCAUSB033 . . . . . . . . . . 31 CHAPTER 5 ABE7ACC01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . ABE7ACC02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . ABE7ACC10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . ABE7ACC11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . ABE7ACC12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . ABE7ACC20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . ABE7ACC21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . ABE7ACC30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . ABE7ACC80 . . . . . . . . . . . . . ABE7ACC81 . . . . . . . . . . . . . ABE7ACC82 . . . . . . . . . . . . . ABE7ACC83 . . . . . . . . . . . . . ABE7ACC84 . . . . . . . . . . . . . ABE7ACC85 . . . . . . . . . . . . . ABE7BV10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ABE7BV10E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ABE7BV20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ABE7BV20E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ABE7CPA01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ABE7CPA01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ABE7CPA02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ABE7CPA03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ABE7CPA11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ABE7CPA12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ABE7CPA13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ABE7CPA21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ABE7CPA31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ABE7CPA31E . . . . . . . . . . . . ABE7CPA410 . . . . . . . . . . . . . ABE7CPA412 . . . . . . . . . . . . . ABE7FU012 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ABE7FU050 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ABE7FU100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ABE7FU200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ABE7FU400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ABE7FU630 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ABE7H08R10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . ABE7H08R11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . ABE7H08R21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . ABE7H08S21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . ABE7H12R10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . ABE7H12R11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . ABE7H12R20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . ABE7H12R21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . ABE7H12R50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . ABE7H12S21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . ABE7H16C10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . ABE7H16C11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . ABE7H16C21 . . . . . . . . . . . . ABE7H16C31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . ABE7H16CM11 . . . . . . . . . . . ABE7H16CM21 . . . . . . . . . . . ABE7H16F43 . . . . . . . . . . . . . ABE7H16R10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . ABE7H16R11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . ABE7H16R11E . . . . . . . . . . . ABE7H16R20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . ABE7H16R21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . ABE7H16R21E . . . . . . . . . . . ABE7H16R23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . ABE7H16R30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . ABE7H16R31 . . . . . . . . . . . . ABE7H16R50 . . . . . . . . . . . . ABE7H16R50E . . . . . . . . . . . ABE7H16S21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . ABE7H16S21E . . . . . . . . . . . . ABE7H16S43 . . . . . . . . . . . . . ABE7H20E100 . . . . . . . . . . . ABE7H20E200 . . . . . . . . . . . . ABE7H20E300 . . . . . . . . . . . . ABE7H32E150 . . . . . . . . . . . . ABE7H32E300 . . . . . . . . . . . . ABE7LOGF25 . . . . . . . . . . . . ABE7LOGV10 . . . . . . . . . . . . ABE7P08T330 . . . . . . . . . . . . ABE7P08T330E . . . . . . . . . . . ABE7P16F310 . . . . . . . . . . . . ABE7P16F310E . . . . . . . . . . . ABE7P16F312 . . . . . . . . . . . . ABE7P16M111 (2) . . . . . . . . . ABE7P16T111 . . . . . . . . . . . . ABE7P16T210 (3) . . . . . . . . . ABE7P16T212 . . . . . . . . . . . . ABE7P16T214 . . . . . . . . . . . . ABE7P16T215 . . . . . . . . . . . . ABE7P16T230 (3) . . . . . . . . . ABE7P16T230E (3) . . . . . . . . ABE7P16T318 . . . . . . . . . . . . ABE7P16T318E . . . . . . . . . . . ABE7P16T330 . . . . . . . . . . . . ABE7P16T330E . . . . . . . . . . . ABE7P16T332 . . . . . . . . . . . . ABE7P16T334 . . . . . . . . . . . . ABE7R08S111 . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 17 17 17 15 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 17 17 17 17 17 17 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 10 10 10 10 10 10 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 10 10 10 10 10 17 17 14 14 13 13 13 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 12 ABE7R08S111E . . . . . . . . . . . 12 ABE7R08S210 . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 ABE7R08S210E . . . . . . . . . . . 12 ABE7R08S216 . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 ABE7R08S216E . . . . . . . . . . . 12 ABE7R16M111 . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 ABE7R16S111 . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 ABE7R16S111E . . . . . . . . . . . 12 ABE7R16S210 . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 ABE7R16S210E . . . . . . . . . . . 12 ABE7R16S212 . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 ABE7R16S212E . . . . . . . . . . . 12 ABE7R16T111 . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 ABE7R16T210 . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 ABE7R16T212 . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 ABE7R16T230 . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 ABE7R16T231 . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 ABE7R16T330 . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 ABE7R16T332 . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 ABE7R16T370 . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 ABE7S08S2B0 . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 ABE7S08S2B0E . . . . . . . . . . . 12 ABE7S08S2B1 . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 ABE7S08S2B1E . . . . . . . . . . . 12 ABE7S16E2B1 . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 ABE7S16E2B1E . . . . . . . . . . . 12 ABE7S16E2E0 . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 ABE7S16E2E0E . . . . . . . . . . . 12 ABE7S16E2E1 . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 ABE7S16E2E1E . . . . . . . . . . . 12 ABE7S16E2F0 . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 ABE7S16E2F0E . . . . . . . . . . . 12 ABE7S16E2M0 . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 ABE7S16E2M0E . . . . . . . . . . . 12 ABE7S16S1B2 . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 ABE7S16S1B2E . . . . . . . . . . . 12 ABE7S16S2B0 . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 ABE7S16S2B0E . . . . . . . . . . . 12 ABE7TES160 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 ABFC08R02B . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 ABFC08R02R . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 ABFC08R02W . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 ABFC08R12B . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 ABFC08R12R . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 ABFC08R12W . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 ABR7S11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 ABR7S21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 ABR7S23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 ABR7S33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 ABR7S33E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 ABR7S37 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 ABS7EA3E5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 ABS7EA3F5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 ABS7EA3M5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 ABS7EC3AL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 ABS7EC3B2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 ABS7EC3E2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 ABS7SA2M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 ABS7SA3MA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 ABS7SC1B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 ABS7SC2E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 ABS7SC3BA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 ABS7SC3E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 AR1SB3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 CHAPTER 6 BMXAMI0410 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 BMXAMM0600 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 BMXAMO0210 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 BMXART0414 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 BMXART0814 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 BMXCPS2000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 BMXCPS2010 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 BMXCPS3020 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 BMXCPS3500 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 BMXDAI1602 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 BMXDAI1603 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 BMXDAI1604 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 BMXDAO1605 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 BMXDDI1602 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 BMXDDI1603 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 BMXDDI3202K . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 BMXDDI6402K . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 BMXDDM16022 . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 BMXDDM16025 . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 BMXDDM3202K . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 BMXDDO1602 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 BMXDDO1612 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 BMXDDO3202K . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 BMXDDO6402K . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 BMXDRA0805 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 BMXDRA1605 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 BMXEHC0200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 BMXEHC0800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 BMXNOE0100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 BMXNOE0110 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 BMXP341000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 BMXP342010 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 BMXP342020 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Product reference index (continued) 0 BMXP342030 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 6 6/11 The efficiency of Telemecanique® branded solutions Used in combination, Telemecanique products provide quality solutions, meeting all your Automation and Control applications requirements. Platform for machine manufacturers Modicon® M340™ PLC Unity™ software Platform for machines and manufacturing processes Modicon® Premium™ Unity™ and PL7™ software A worldwide presence Constantly available ■ More than 5 000 points of sale in 130 countries. ■ You can be sure to find the range of products that are right for you and which comply fully with the standards in the country where they are used. Platform for continuous and semicontinuous industrial processes and infrastructure sites Modicon® Quantum™ Unity™, Concept™ and ProWORX™ 32 software Technical assistance wherever you are ■ Our technicians are at your disposal to assist in finding the optimum solution for your particular needs. ■ Schneider Electric offers all necessary technical assistance, throughout the world. Schneider Electric 1415 South Roselle Road Palatine, IL 60064 TEL: 847-397-2600 www.schneider-electric.com www.us.telemecanique.com ART. 960128 Due to evolution of standards and equipment, the characteristics indicated in texts and images of this document do not constitute a commitment on our part without confirmation. Design: Schneider Electric Photos: Schneider Electric Printed by: Delzer Lithograph DIA6ED2061001EN-US © 2007 Schneider Electric. All Rights Reserved. 06 / 2007 DIA6ED2061001EN-US Simply Smart ! North American Operating Division DIA6ED2061001EN-US www.us.telemecanique.com
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.6 Linearized : Yes XMP Toolkit : 3.1-702 Producer : Acrobat Distiller 7.0.5 (Windows) Creator Tool : PScript5.dll Version 5.2.2 Modify Date : 2007:05:15 14:20:51-04:00 Create Date : 2007:05:14 16:29:19-04:00 Metadata Date : 2007:05:15 14:20:51-04:00 Format : application/pdf Title : DIA6ED2061001EN-US.book Creator : mra634 Document ID : uuid:e960e5e9-2a35-4f52-9a17-39649c0b82ec Instance ID : uuid:271ba6de-f557-459b-a2a1-ce74019c5f9c Has XFA : No Page Count : 218 Author : mra634EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools